Table of Contents
- Contents
- Important Safety Instructions
- Basic Operations
- Printing
- Basic Printing Operations
- Canceling Prints
- Checking the Printing Status and Log
- Various Print Settings
- Enlarging or Reducing
- Switching 1-Sided and 2-Sided Printing
- Collating Printouts by Page
- Printing Multiple Pages onto One Sheet
- Printing Posters
- Printing Booklet
- Printing Borders
- Printing Dates and Page Numbers
- Printing Watermarks
- Printing Specific Pages onto Different Paper
- Selecting Document Type
- Saving Toner
- Combining and Printing Multiple Documents
- Configuring Printer Settings on the Machine
- Printing a Document Secured by a PIN (Secure Print)
- Configuring Print Settings to Your Needs
- Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device
- Network
- Security
- Using Remote UI
- Setting Menu List
- Troubleshooting
- Maintenance
- Appendix
- SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE
Canon LBP252dw User Manual
Displayed below is the user manual for LBP252dw by Canon which is a product in the Laser Printers category. This manual has pages.
Related Manuals
LBP252dw / LBP251dw
User's Guide
USRMA-0786-00 2016-06 en Copyright CANON INC. 2015
Contents
Important Safety Instructions ........................................................................................................... 2
Installation ............................................................................................................................................................... 3
Power Supply ............................................................................................................................................................ 5
Handling ................................................................................................................................................................... 6
Maintenance and Inspections .................................................................................................................................... 9
Consumables .......................................................................................................................................................... 10
Basic Operations .......................................................................................................................................... 14
Parts and Their Functions ........................................................................................................................................ 16
Front Side .......................................................................................................................................................... 17
Back Side ........................................................................................................................................................... 19
Interior .............................................................................................................................................................. 21
Multi-Purpose Tray .............................................................................................................................................. 22
Paper Drawer ..................................................................................................................................................... 23
Operation Panel ................................................................................................................................................. 24
Display ........................................................................................................................................................ 27
Using the Operation Panel ....................................................................................................................................... 30
Entering Text ...................................................................................................................................................... 32
Logging on to the Machine ...................................................................................................................................... 34
Loading Paper ......................................................................................................................................................... 35
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer ....................................................................................................................... 37
Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray ............................................................................................................... 41
Loading Envelopes .............................................................................................................................................. 44
Loading Preprinted Paper .................................................................................................................................... 46
Specifying Paper Size and Type ............................................................................................................................. 50
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Paper Drawer ......................................................................................... 51
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Multi-Purpose Tray .................................................................................. 53
Registering Default Paper Settings for the Multi-Purpose Tray ............................................................................ 55
Registering a Custom Paper Size .................................................................................................................... 57
Limiting the Paper Sizes Displayed .................................................................................................................. 60
Saving Energy ......................................................................................................................................................... 61
Entering Sleep Mode ........................................................................................................................................... 62
Powering OFF at a Fixed Time ............................................................................................................................... 64
Setting Auto Shutdown Time ................................................................................................................................ 66
Printing ................................................................................................................................................................ 68
Basic Printing Operations ........................................................................................................................................ 70
Canceling Prints ...................................................................................................................................................... 75
Checking the Printing Status and Log ...................................................................................................................... 78
Various Print Settings .............................................................................................................................................. 80
Enlarging or Reducing ......................................................................................................................................... 82
I
Switching 1-Sided and 2-Sided Printing .................................................................................................................. 84
Collating Printouts by Page .................................................................................................................................. 86
Printing Multiple Pages onto One Sheet ................................................................................................................ 88
Printing Posters .................................................................................................................................................. 90
Printing Booklet ................................................................................................................................................. 91
Printing Borders ................................................................................................................................................. 93
Printing Dates and Page Numbers ........................................................................................................................ 94
Printing Watermarks ........................................................................................................................................... 96
Printing Specic Pages onto Different Paper .......................................................................................................... 98
Selecting Document Type .................................................................................................................................. 100
Saving Toner .................................................................................................................................................... 102
Combining and Printing Multiple Documents ....................................................................................................... 104
Conguring Printer Settings on the Machine ........................................................................................................ 108
Printing a Document Secured by a PIN (Secure Print) (LBP252dw) ........................................................................... 109
Preparing for Using Secure Print ........................................................................................................................ 110
Printing via Secure Print .................................................................................................................................... 112
Conguring Print Settings to Your Needs ............................................................................................................... 117
Registering Combinations of Frequently Used Print Settings .................................................................................. 118
Changing Default Settings ................................................................................................................................. 120
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device ........................................................... 123
Connecting to a Mobile Device ............................................................................................................................... 124
Make Direct Connection (Access Point Mode) ....................................................................................................... 125
Making the Best Use of the Machine by Utilizing Applications ................................................................................. 127
Managing the Machine Remotely .......................................................................................................................... 129
Network ............................................................................................................................................................ 131
Connecting to a Network ...................................................................................................................................... 132
Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN .................................................................................................................. 134
Connecting to a Wired LAN ................................................................................................................................ 135
Connecting to a Wireless LAN ............................................................................................................................. 136
Setting Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode ..................................................................................... 138
Setting Up Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode ......................................................................................... 140
Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router ..................................................................................... 143
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings .................................................................................... 146
Checking the SSID and Network Key ............................................................................................................. 150
Setting IP Addresses ......................................................................................................................................... 153
Setting IPv4 Address ................................................................................................................................... 154
Setting IPv6 Addresses ................................................................................................................................ 157
Viewing Network Settings ..................................................................................................................................... 161
Conguring the Machine for Printing from a Computer .......................................................................................... 164
Conguring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions ............................................................................................... 165
Conguring Printer Ports ................................................................................................................................... 168
Setting Up Print Server ...................................................................................................................................... 173
II
Conguring the Machine for Your Network Environment ....................................................................................... 176
Conguring Ethernet Settings ............................................................................................................................ 177
Changing the Maximum Transmission Unit .......................................................................................................... 179
Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network .................................................................................................. 180
Conguring DNS .............................................................................................................................................. 181
Conguring WINS ............................................................................................................................................. 186
Conguring SNTP ............................................................................................................................................. 188
Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP ............................................................................................. 191
Conguring Settings for Device Management Software ......................................................................................... 196
Security .............................................................................................................................................................. 202
Protecting the Machine from Unauthorized Access ................................................................................................ 203
Preventing Unauthorized Access ........................................................................................................................ 204
Setting Access Privileges .................................................................................................................................... 206
Setting the System Manager ID .................................................................................................................... 207
Setting the Department ID Management ....................................................................................................... 209
Setting a Remote UI PIN .............................................................................................................................. 216
Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls ..................................................................................................... 218
Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Rules ...................................................................................................... 219
Specifying MAC Addresses for Firewall Rules .................................................................................................. 223
Changing Port Numbers .................................................................................................................................... 226
Setting a Proxy ................................................................................................................................................. 228
Restricting the Machine's Functions ...................................................................................................................... 230
Restricting USB Functions .................................................................................................................................. 231
Disabling HTTP Communication ......................................................................................................................... 232
Disabling Remote UI ......................................................................................................................................... 233
Implementing Robust Security Features ................................................................................................................ 234
Enabling SSL Encrypted Communication for the Remote UI .................................................................................... 235
Conguring IPSec Settings ................................................................................................................................. 239
Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication ............................................................................................................... 248
Conguring Settings for Key Pairs and Digital Certicates ...................................................................................... 253
Generating Key Pairs ................................................................................................................................... 254
Using CA-issued Key Pairs and Digital Certicates ........................................................................................... 262
Verifying Key Pairs and Digital Certicates ..................................................................................................... 266
Using Remote UI ........................................................................................................................................ 269
Starting Remote UI ............................................................................................................................................... 270
Remote UI Screens ................................................................................................................................................ 272
Managing Documents and Checking the Machine Status ........................................................................................ 275
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI ............................................................................................................. 279
Saving/Loading Registered Data ............................................................................................................................ 281
Saving Registered Data ..................................................................................................................................... 282
Loading Registered Data ................................................................................................................................... 284
III
Setting Menu List ...................................................................................................................................... 287
Paper Settings (LBP252dw) .................................................................................................................................... 288
Direct Connection ................................................................................................................................................. 289
Network Settings .................................................................................................................................................. 290
Output Reports ..................................................................................................................................................... 301
Preferences .......................................................................................................................................................... 302
Timer Settings ...................................................................................................................................................... 307
Common Settings .................................................................................................................................................. 311
Printer Settings .................................................................................................................................................... 313
Adjustment/Maintenance ..................................................................................................................................... 332
System Management Settings ............................................................................................................................... 337
Troubleshooting ......................................................................................................................................... 348
Clearing Jams ........................................................................................................................................................ 350
When an Error Message Appears ........................................................................................................................... 357
When an Error Code Appears ................................................................................................................................. 366
Common Problems ................................................................................................................................................ 368
Installation/Settings Problems ........................................................................................................................... 369
Printing Problems ............................................................................................................................................. 373
When You Cannot Print Properly ............................................................................................................................ 376
Printing Results Are Not Satisfactory ................................................................................................................... 378
Paper Creases or Curls ...................................................................................................................................... 385
Paper Is Fed Incorrectly ..................................................................................................................................... 387
When a Problem Cannot Be Solved ......................................................................................................................... 388
Maintenance ................................................................................................................................................. 390
Cleaning the Machine ........................................................................................................................................... 392
Exterior ........................................................................................................................................................... 393
Fixing Unit ....................................................................................................................................................... 394
Replacing Toner Cartridges ................................................................................................................................... 396
Using Up Toner ................................................................................................................................................ 398
How to Replace Toner Cartridges ........................................................................................................................ 400
Relocating the Machine ......................................................................................................................................... 402
Maintaining and Improving Print Quality ............................................................................................................... 404
Adjusting Print Density ...................................................................................................................................... 405
Adjusting Print Position ..................................................................................................................................... 407
Printing Reports and Lists ..................................................................................................................................... 409
Consumables Status Report ............................................................................................................................... 410
User Data List/System Manager Data List ............................................................................................................ 411
Department ID Management Report ................................................................................................................... 412
IPSec Policy List ................................................................................................................................................ 413
PCL Font List .................................................................................................................................................... 414
PS Font List (LBP252dw) ..................................................................................................................................... 415
IV
Viewing the Counter Value .................................................................................................................................... 416
Using a USB Memory Device to Save/Load Registered Data ..................................................................................... 417
Saving Registered Data to a USB Memory Device .................................................................................................. 418
Loading Registered Data from a USB Memory Device ............................................................................................ 420
Initializing Settings ............................................................................................................................................... 422
Initializing Menu ............................................................................................................................................... 423
Initializing Key and Certicate ............................................................................................................................ 425
Appendix ........................................................................................................................................................... 427
Feature Highlights ................................................................................................................................................ 428
Going Green and Saving Money ......................................................................................................................... 429
Improving Eciency ......................................................................................................................................... 431
So Much More .................................................................................................................................................. 433
Specications ....................................................................................................................................................... 436
Machine Specications ...................................................................................................................................... 437
Wireless LAN Specications ................................................................................................................................ 439
Paper .............................................................................................................................................................. 440
Consumables ........................................................................................................................................................ 443
Optional Items ...................................................................................................................................................... 444
Using AirPrint ....................................................................................................................................................... 445
Printing with AirPrint ........................................................................................................................................ 449
If AirPrint Cannot Be Used ................................................................................................................................. 451
Using Google Cloud Print ....................................................................................................................................... 452
Manuals Included with the Machine ...................................................................................................................... 456
Using e-Manual ..................................................................................................................................................... 457
Installing e-Manual ........................................................................................................................................... 458
Uninstalling e-Manual ....................................................................................................................................... 462
Screen Layout of e-Manual ................................................................................................................................ 465
Viewing e-Manual ............................................................................................................................................. 470
Manual Display Settings .................................................................................................................................... 472
Others .................................................................................................................................................................. 473
Basic Windows Operations ................................................................................................................................. 474
For Mac OS Users ............................................................................................................................................. 481
Notice ............................................................................................................................................................. 482
Oce Locations .................................................................................................................................................... 487
V
Important Safety Instructions
Important Safety Instructions ................................................................................................................... 2
Installation ............................................................................................................................................................ 3
Power Supply ......................................................................................................................................................... 5
Handling ................................................................................................................................................................. 6
Maintenance and Inspections .............................................................................................................................. 9
Consumables ....................................................................................................................................................... 10
Important Safety Instructions
1
Important Safety Instructions
0W20-000
The content described in this chapter is for the prevention of damage to property and injury to users of the machine
and others. Before using this machine, read this chapter and follow the instructions to properly use this machine. Do
not perform any operations not described in this manual. Canon will not be responsible for any damages resulting
from use not described in this manual, improper use, or repair/changes not performed by Canon or a third party
authorized by Canon.
Important Safety Instructions
2
Installation
0W20-001
To use this machine safely and comfortably, carefully read the following precautions and install the machine in an
appropriate location.
Do not install in a location that may result in a re or electrical shock
●A location where the ventilation slots are blocked
(too close to walls, beds, rugs, or similar objects)
●A damp or dusty location
●A location exposed to direct sunlight or outdoors
●A location subject to high temperatures
●A location exposed to open ames
●Near alcohol, paint thinners or other ammable substances
Other warnings
●Do not connect unapproved cables to this machine. Doing so may result in a re or electrical shock.
●Do not place necklaces and other metal objects or containers lled with liquid on the machine. If foreign
substances come in contact with electrical parts inside the machine, it may result in a re or electrical shock.
●When installing and removing the optional accessories, be sure to turn OFF the power, unplug the power
plug, and then disconnect all the interface cables and power cord from the machine. Otherwise, the power
cord or interface cables may be damaged, resulting in a re or electrical shock.
●Do not use near any medical equipment. Radiowaves emitted from this machine may interfere with medical
equipment, which may cause a malfunction and result in serious accidents.
●If any foreign substance falls into this machine, unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet and
contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
Do not install in the following locations
The machine may drop or fall, resulting in injury.
●Unstable location
●Location exposed to vibrations
Other cautions
●When carrying this machine, follow the instructions in this manual. If carried improperly, it may fall, resulting
in injury.
●When installing this machine, be careful not to get your hands caught between the machine and the oor or
walls, or between the paper drawers. Doing so may result in injury.
Important Safety Instructions
3
Do not install in the following locations that may result in damage
●A location subject to dramatic changes in temperature or
humidity
●A location near equipment that generates magnetic or
electromagnetic waves
●A laboratory or location where chemical reactions occur
●A location exposed to corrosive or toxic gases
●A location that may warp from the weight of the machine or
where the machine is liable to sink (a carpet, etc.)
Avoid poorly ventilated locations
●This machine generates a slight amount of ozone, etc. during normal use. Although sensitivity to ozone, etc.
may vary, this amount is not harmful. Ozone, etc. may be more noticeable during extended use or long
production runs, especially in poorly ventilated rooms. It is recommended that the room where the machine
operates be appropriately ventilated to maintain a comfortable working environment. Also avoid locations
where people would be exposed to emissions from the machine.
Do not install in a location where condensation occurs
●Water droplets (condensation) may form inside the machine when the room where the machine is installed
is heated rapidly, and when the machine is moved from a cool or dry location to a hot or humid location.
Using the machine under these conditions may result in paper jams, poor print quality, or damage to the
machine. Let the machine adjust to the ambient temperature and humidity for at least 2 hours before use.
When using wireless LAN
●Set the machine at a distance of 50 m or less from the wireless LAN router.
●Do not set machine in a location where any object blocks communication. The signal may be degraded when
passing through walls or oors.
●Keep the machine as far as possible from digital cordless phones, microwave ovens, or other equipment that
emit radio waves.
In altitudes of 3,000 m or above sea level
●Machines with a hard disk may not operate properly when used at high altitudes of about 3,000 meters
above sea level, or higher.
Important Safety Instructions
4
Power Supply
0W20-002
This machine is compatible with voltages of 220 to 240 V, and electrical frequency of 50/60 Hz.
●Use only a power supply that meets the specied voltage requirements. Failure to do so may result in a re
or electrical shock.
●Do not use power cords other than the one provided, as this may result in a re or electrical shock.
●The provided power cord is intended for use with this machine. Do not connect the power cord to other
devices.
●Do not modify, pull, forcibly bend, or perform any other act that may damage the power cord. Do not place
heavy objects on the power cord. Damaging the power cord may result in a re or electrical shock.
●Do not plug in or unplug the power plug with wet hands, as this may result in an electrical shock.
●Do not use extension cords or multi-plug power strips with the machine. Doing so may result in a re or
electrical shock.
●Do not wrap the power cord or tie it in a knot, as this may result in a re or electrical shock.
●Insert the power plug completely into the AC power outlet. Failure to do so may result in a re or electrical
shock.
●Remove the power plug completely from the AC power outlet during a thunder storm. Failure to do so may
result in a re, electrical shock, or damage to the machine.
●Install this machine near the power outlet and leave sucient space around the power plug so that it can be
unplugged easily in an emergency.
When connecting power
●Do not connect the machine to an uninterruptible power source.
●If plugging this machine into an AC power outlet with multiple sockets, do not use the remaining sockets to
connect other devices.
●Do not connect the power cord into the auxiliary outlet on a computer.
Other precautions
●Electrical noise may cause this machine to malfunction or lose data.
Important Safety Instructions
5
Handling
0W20-003
●Immediately unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet
and contact an authorized Canon dealer if the machine makes
an unusual noise, emits an unusual smell, or emits smoke or
excessive heat. Continued use may result in a re or electrical
shock.
●Do not disassemble or modify this machine. There are high-
voltage and high-temperature components inside the machine
which may result in a re or electrical shock.
●Place the machine where children will not come in contact with the power cord and other cables or internal
and electrical parts. Failure to do so may result in unexpected accidents.
●Do not use ammable sprays near this machine. If ammable substances come into contact with electrical
parts inside this machine, it may result in a re or electrical shock.
●When moving this machine, be sure to turn OFF the power of this machine and your computer, and then
unplug the power plug and interface cables. Failure to do so may damage the power cord or interface
cables, resulting in a re or electrical shock.
●When plugging or unplugging a USB cable when the power plug is plugged into an AC power outlet, do not
touch the metal part of the connector, as this may result in an electrical shock.
If you are using a cardiac pacemaker
●This machine generates a low level magnetic ux. If you use a cardiac pacemaker and feel abnormalities,
please move away from this machine and consult your physician immediately.
●Do not place heavy objects on this machine as they may fall, resulting in injury.
●For your safety, please unplug the power cord if the machine will not be used for a long period of time.
●Use caution when opening and closing covers to avoid injury to your hands.
●Keep hands and clothing away from the rollers in the output area. If the rollers catch your hands or clothing,
this may result in personal injury.
●The inside of the machine and the output slot are very hot during
and immediately after use. Avoid contact with these areas to
prevent burns. Also, printed paper may be hot immediately after
being output, so use caution when handling it. Failure to do so may
result in burns.
Important Safety Instructions
6
●Do not carry the machine with the paper drawers or the optional
paper feeder installed. Otherwise, the paper drawer may fall and
result in injury.
Laser beam
●This machine is classied as a Class 1 Laser Product under IEC60825-1:2007 and EN60825-1:2007. The laser
beam can be harmful to the human body. The laser beam is conned within protective housings and
external covers, so there is no danger of the laser beam escaping during normal machine operation. For
safety, never open covers other than those indicated in this manual.
●If you operate the machine in manners other than the control, adjustment, and operating procedures
prescribed in this manual, this may result in hazardous radiation exposure. If the laser beam should escape
and enter your eyes, exposure may cause damage to your eyes.
When transporting the machine
To prevent damage to the machine during transport, perform the following.
●Remove the toner cartridges.
●Securely pack the machine in the original box with packing materials.
If the operating noise concerns you
●Depending on the use environment and operating mode, if the operating noise is of concern, it is
recommended that the machine be installed in a place other than the oce.
Other precautions
●Follow the instructions in the caution label attached to this machine.
●Avoid shaking or applying shock to this machine.
●Do not forcibly open and close doors, covers, and other parts. Doing so may result in damage to the
machine.
●Do not touch the contacts ( ) inside the machine. Doing so may result in damage to the machine.
Important Safety Instructions
7
●To prevent a paper jam, do not turn OFF the power, open/close the covers, and load/unload the paper when
printing.
Important Safety Instructions
8
Maintenance and Inspections
0W20-004
Clean this machine periodically. If dust accumulates, the machine may not operate properly. When cleaning, be sure to
observe the following. If a problem occurs during operation, see Troubleshooting(P. 348) . If the problem cannot be
resolved or you feel the machine requires an inspection, see When a Problem Cannot Be Solved(P. 388) .
●Before cleaning, turn OFF the power and unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet. Failure to do so
may result in a re or electrical shock.
●Unplug the power plug periodically and clean with a dry cloth to remove dust and grime. Accumulated dust
may absorb humidity in the air and may result in a re if it comes into contact with electricity.
●Use a damp, well wrung-out cloth to clean the machine. Dampen cleaning cloths with water only. Do not use
alcohol, benzenes, paint thinners, or other ammable substances. Do not use tissue paper or paper towels.
If these substances come into contact with electrical parts inside the machine, they may generate static
electricity or result in a re or electrical shock.
●Check the power cord and plug periodically for damage. Check the machine for rust, dents, scratches,
cracks, or excessive heat generation. Use of poorly-maintained equipment may result in a re or electrical
shock.
●The inside of the machine has high-temperature and high-voltage components. Touching these components
may result in burns. Do not touch any part of the machine that is not indicated in the manual.
●When loading paper or removing jammed paper, be careful not to cut your hands with the edges of the
paper.
●When removing jammed paper or replacing toner cartridges, be careful not to get any toner on your hands
or clothing. If toner gets on your hands or clothing, wash them immediately with cold water.
Important Safety Instructions
9
Consumables
0W20-005
●Do not dispose of used toner cartridges in open ames. Also, do not store toner cartridges or paper in a
location exposed to open ames. This may cause the toner to ignite, and result in burns or re.
●If you accidentally spill or scatter toner, carefully wipe up the loose toner with a damp, soft cloth and avoid
inhaling any toner dust. Do not use a vacuum cleaner that is not equipped with safety measures to prevent
dust explosions to clean up loose toner. Doing so may cause damage to the vacuum cleaner or result in a
dust explosion due to static discharge.
If you are using a cardiac pacemaker
●The toner cartridge generates a low level magnetic ux. If you are using a cardiac pacemaker and feel
abnormalities, please move away from the toner cartridge and consult your physician immediately.
●Use caution not to inhale any toner. If you should inhale toner, consult a physician immediately.
●Use caution so that toner does not get into your eyes or mouth. If toner should get into your eyes or mouth,
immediately wash with cold water and consult a physician.
●Use caution so that toner does not come into contact with your skin. If it should, wash with soap and cold
water. If there is any irritation on your skin, consult a physician immediately.
●Keep the toner cartridges and other consumables out of the reach of small children. If toner is ingested,
consult a physician or poison control center immediately.
●Do not disassemble or modify the toner cartridge. Doing so may cause the toner to scatter.
●Remove the sealing tape of the toner cartridge completely without using excessive force. Doing otherwise
may cause the toner to scatter.
Handling the toner cartridge
●Be sure to hold the toner cartridge using the handle.
●Do not touch the toner cartridge memory ( ) or the electrical contacts ( ). To avoid scratching the
surface of the drum inside the machine or exposing it to light, do not open the drum protective shutter ( ).
Important Safety Instructions
10
●Do not remove the toner cartridge from this machine or from the protective bag unnecessarily.
●The toner cartridge is a magnetic product. Do not move it close to products susceptible to magnetism
including oppy disks and disk drives. Doing so may result in data corruption.
Storing the toner cartridge
●Store in the following environment to ensure safe and satisfactory use.
Storage temperature range: 0 to 35 °C
Storage humidity range: 35 to 85% RH (relative humidity/no condensation)*
●Store without opening until the toner cartridge is to be used.
●When removing the toner cartridge from this machine for storage, place the removed toner cartridge into
the original protective bag or wrap it with a thick cloth.
●When storing the toner cartridge, do not store it upright or upside down. The toner will solidify and may not
return to its original condition even if it is shaken.
* Even within the storable humidity range, water droplets (condensation) may develop inside the toner cartridge if there is a
difference of temperature inside and outside the toner cartridge. Condensation will adversely affect the print quality of
toner cartridges.
Do not store the toner cartridge in the following locations
●Locations exposed to open ames
●Locations exposed to direct sunlight or bright light for ve minutes or more
●Locations exposed to excessive salty air
●Locations where there are corrosive gases (i.e. aerosol sprays and ammonia)
●Locations subject to high temperature and high humidity
●Locations subject to dramatic changes in temperature and humidity where condensation may easily occur
●Locations with a large amount of dust
●Locations within the reach of children
Be careful of counterfeit toner cartridges
●Please be aware that there are counterfeit Canon toner cartridges in the marketplace. Use of counterfeit
toner cartridge may result in poor print quality or machine performance. Canon is not responsible for any
malfunction, accident or damage caused by the use of counterfeit toner cartridge.
For more information, see canon.com/counterfeit .
Availability period of repairing parts and toner cartridges
●The repairing parts and toner cartridges for the machine will be available for at least seven (7) years after
production of this machine model has been discontinued.
Toner cartridge packing materials
●Save the protective bag for the toner cartridge. They are required when transporting this machine.
●The packing materials may be changed in form or placement, or may be added or removed without notice.
Important Safety Instructions
11
●Dispose of the removed sealing tape according to local regulations.
When disposing of a used toner cartridge
●Place the toner cartridge into its protective bag to prevent the toner from scattering, and then dispose of the
toner cartridge according to local regulations.
Important Safety Instructions
12
Basic Operations
Basic Operations ............................................................................................................................................... 14
Parts and Their Functions ................................................................................................................................... 16
Front Side ....................................................................................................................................................... 17
Back Side ........................................................................................................................................................ 19
Interior ........................................................................................................................................................... 21
Multi-Purpose Tray ......................................................................................................................................... 22
Paper Drawer ................................................................................................................................................. 23
Operation Panel .............................................................................................................................................. 24
Display ..................................................................................................................................................... 27
Using the Operation Panel .................................................................................................................................. 30
Entering Text .................................................................................................................................................. 32
Logging on to the Machine ................................................................................................................................. 34
Loading Paper ...................................................................................................................................................... 35
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer ................................................................................................................ 37
Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray ........................................................................................................ 41
Loading Envelopes .......................................................................................................................................... 44
Loading Preprinted Paper ............................................................................................................................... 46
Specifying Paper Size and Type ....................................................................................................................... 50
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Paper Drawer ............................................................................... 51
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Multi-Purpose Tray ....................................................................... 53
Registering Default Paper Settings for the Multi-Purpose Tray ................................................................ 55
Registering a Custom Paper Size ............................................................................................................. 57
Limiting the Paper Sizes Displayed .......................................................................................................... 60
Saving Energy ...................................................................................................................................................... 61
Entering Sleep Mode ...................................................................................................................................... 62
Powering OFF at a Fixed Time ......................................................................................................................... 64
Setting Auto Shutdown Time .......................................................................................................................... 66
Basic Operations
13
Basic Operations
0W20-006
This chapter describes basic operations, such as how to use the operation panel or how to load the paper, that are
frequently performed to use the functions of the machine.
◼Parts and Their Functions
This section describes the exterior and interior parts of the machine and their functions, as well as how to use the keys
on the operation panel and how to view the display. Parts and Their Functions(P. 16)
◼Using the Operation Panel
This section describes how to use the keys on the operation panel to perform various operations, such as adjusting
and checking the settings. Using the Operation Panel(P. 30)
◼Logging on to the Machine
This section describes how to log on when a logon screen is displayed. Logging on to the Machine(P. 34)
◼Loading Paper
This section describes how to load the paper into the paper drawer and multi-purpose tray. Loading Paper(P. 35)
Basic Operations
14
Parts and Their Functions
0W20-007
This section describes the parts of the machine (exterior, front and back side, and interior) and how they function. In
addition to describing the parts of the machine used for such basic operations as loading paper and replacing the
toner cartridges, this section also describes the keys on the operation panel and display. Read this section for tips on
how to use the machine properly.
Front Side(P. 17)
Back Side(P. 19)
Interior(P. 21)
Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 22)
Paper Drawer(P. 23)
Operation Panel(P. 24)
Basic Operations
16
Front Side
0W20-008
Operation panel
The operation panel consists of numeric keys, a display, status indicators, etc. You can perform all the
operations and specify settings from the operation panel. Operation Panel(P. 24) Display(P. 27)
Output tray
Printed paper is output to the output tray.
Lift handles
Hold the lift handles when carrying the machine. Relocating the Machine(P. 402)
Multi-purpose tray
Load the paper into the multi-purpose tray when you want to temporarily use a type of paper different from
that which is loaded in the paper drawer. Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 41)
Paper stopper
Open the paper stopper to prevent paper in the output tray from falling.
Front cover
Open the front cover when replacing the toner cartridge or clearing paper jams. How to Replace Toner
Cartridges(P. 400) Clearing Jams(P. 350)
Paper drawer
Load the type of paper you frequently use into the paper drawer. Loading Paper in the Paper
Drawer(P. 37)
Basic Operations
17
Ventilation slots
Air from inside the machine is vented out to cool down the inside of the machine. Note that placing objects in
front of the ventilation slots prevents ventilation. Installation(P. 3)
Power switch
Turns the power ON or OFF. To restart the machine, turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and
turn it back ON.
Basic Operations
18
Back Side
0W20-009
Upper rear cover
Open the upper rear cover when clearing paper jams. Clearing Jams(P. 350)
Rating label
The label shows the serial number, which is needed when making inquiries about the machine. When a
Problem Cannot Be Solved(P. 388)
Power socket
Connect the power cord.
Lower rear cover
Open the lower rear cover to set the paper size switch lever or remove jammed paper. Interior(P. 21)
Clearing Jams(P. 350)
Ventilation slots
Air from inside the machine is vented out to cool down the inside of the machine. Note that placing objects in
front of the ventilation slots prevents ventilation. Installation(P. 3)
Sub-output tray
When using a paper type that easily curls such as labels, or envelopes, you can reduce curl by opening this
tray. Paper Curls(P. 385)
USB port (for USB device connection)
Connect a USB memory device when exporting or importing the settings of the machine.
Basic Operations
19
Interior
0W20-00A
Transport guide
If there is a paper jam inside the machine, raise the transport guide to remove the jammed paper.
Clearing Jams(P. 350)
Duplex transport guide
If paper has jammed during 2-sided printing, lower the duplex transport guide to remove the jammed paper.
Clearing Jams(P. 350)
Paper size switch lever
Before starting 2-sided printing, change the position of this lever properly to match the size of the paper to
print on.
A4 size
Pull the lever towards you.
Letter/Legal size
Push the lever away from you.
●In addition to A4, Letter, and Legal sizes, some other paper sizes can be used for 2-sided printing (
Paper(P. 440) ). When using those paper sizes, set the paper size switch lever in the same position as that for
Letter/Legal size.
Basic Operations
21
Multi-Purpose Tray
0W20-00C
Paper guides
Adjust the paper guides to exactly the width of the loaded paper to ensure that paper is fed straight into the
machine.
Paper tray
Pull out the paper tray when loading paper.
Tray extension
Open the tray extension when loading large paper.
LINKS
Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 41)
Basic Operations
22
Paper Drawer
0W20-00E
Paper guides
Adjust the paper guides to exactly the size of the loaded paper to ensure that paper is fed straight into the
machine. Press the lock release levers that are marked with arrows in the illustrations to release the locks
and slide the paper guides.
Paper level indicator
Indicates the remaining amount of paper. The mark moves downward as the remaining amount of paper
decreases.
LINKS
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 37)
Basic Operations
23
Operation Panel
0W20-00F
Display
Displays the current printing or other operation status, error information, amount remaining in the toner
cartridge, etc. Display(P. 27)
Menu key
Displays the Setup menu. You can specify settings of the machine. Setting Menu List(P. 287)
Back key
Press to return to the previous screen. If you press this key when specifying settings, for example, the
settings are not applied and the display returns to the previous screen.
Numeric keys ([0]-[9] keys)
Press to enter numbers and text. Entering Text(P. 32)
[*] key
Press to switch the type of text that is entered.
Basic Operations
24
Energy Saver key
Press to put the machine into sleep mode. The display is turned OFF and the Main Power indicator lights up
when the machine is in sleep mode. Press the key again to exit sleep mode. Entering Sleep Mode(P. 62)
Status Monitor key
Press to check the status of printing, to view the usage history, or to view the network settings such as the IP
address of the machine. You can also check the status of the machine, such as the remaining amounts of
paper and the amount remaining in the toner cartridge, or whether any errors occurred. Display(P. 27)
[ID] key
Press after entering the ID and PIN to log on when Department ID Management is enabled. After you nish
using the machine, press this key again to log off. Logging on to the Machine(P. 34)
Clear key
Press to delete the entered numbers and text.
Stop key
Press to cancel the current operation, including printing.
[#] key
Press to enter symbols such as "@" or "/".
Processing/Data indicator
Blinks while printing or other operation is being performed. Lights up when there are documents waiting to
be processed.
Wi-Fi indicator
Lights up when the machine is connected to wireless LAN.
Error indicator
Blinks or lights up when an error such as a paper jam occurs.
Main Power indicator
Lights when the machine is turned ON.
[ ] key
When specifying settings, press to return to the previous screen. When entering numbers, press to move the
cursor to the left.
[ ] key
When specifying settings, press to select the item immediately above the currently selected item. When
changing setting values, press to increase a value.
Basic Operations
25
[ ] key
When specifying settings, press to proceed to the next screen. When entering numbers, press to move the
cursor to the right.
[ ] key
When specifying settings, press to select the item immediately below the currently selected item. When
changing setting values, press to decrease a value.
[OK] key
Press to apply settings or specied details.
Secure Print key (LBP252dw)
Press to print secured documents. Printing a Document Secured by a PIN (Secure Print) (LBP252dw)
(P. 109)
Paper Settings key (LBP251dw)
Press to specify paper sizes and types. Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 50)
LINKS
Using the Operation Panel(P. 30)
Basic Operations
26
Display
0W20-085
The display shows the printing status and the screens for specifying settings. It also
shows error messages and the amount remaining in the toner cartridge.
Main Screen
Status indication
Displays the current status or operation mode of the machine.
Amount remaining in the toner cartridge
Indicates stepwise decreases of the amount remaining in the toner cartridge.
<Menu> Screen
When you press , the <Menu> screen is displayed. On this screen, you can start specifying general machine
settings such as <Preferences> or <Timer Settings>, as well as many of the settings for printing, such as paper
settings and density adjustment.
Setting Menu List(P. 287)
<Status Monitor> Screen
When you press , a screen is displayed that enables you to check the status of document that is being
printed, as well as the status of the machine (amount remaining in the toner cartridge, etc.) or the network
setting information such as the IP address of the machine.
<Error Information/Notication>
Displays the details of any errors that occurred. When an Error Message Appears(P. 357)
Basic Operations
27
<Device Status>
Displays the status of the machine, such as the amount of paper or the amount remaining in the toner
cartridge.
<Paper Information>
Displays whether paper is loaded in each paper source.
<Cartridge Level>
Displays the amount remaining in the toner cartridge.
<Check Counter>
Displays the total number of pages printed by this machine.
Viewing the Counter Value(P. 416)
<Secure Print Memory Usage> (LBP252dw)
Displays the amount of memory currently used for storing secured document data. Printing a
Document Secured by a PIN (Secure Print) (LBP252dw)(P. 109)
<Version Information>
Displays rmware version information.
<Serial Number>
Displays the serial number.
<Print Job>
Displays the status of the current print job.
<Network Information>
Displays the network settings such as the IP address of the machine and status such as the condition of
wireless LAN communications. Viewing Network Settings(P. 161)
When an Error Occurs
In some cases when an error occurs, instructions on how to respond to the error are displayed. Follow the on-
screen instructions to solve the problem. The screen displayed when a paper jam occurs is shown below as an
example. When an Error Message Appears(P. 357)
Basic Operations
28
Using the Operation Panel
0W20-086
Use the keys shown below to specify settings and adjust values.
Using /
Scrolling the Screen
The scroll bar is displayed on the right side of the screen when not all of the information ts on one screen. If
the scroll bar is displayed, use / to scroll up or down. The text and background colors of an item are
inverted when it is selected.
Changing a Setting Value
Use / to enter values. If an icon such as below is displayed at the upper left of the screen, you can
enter values directly using the numeric keys. Entering Text(P. 32)
Values in ( ) displayed below the entry box are the enterable value range.
Using /
Proceeding to the Next Screen/Returning to the Previous Screen
Press to proceed to the next screen. Press to return to the previous screen.
Basic Operations
30
You can also proceed to the next screen by pressing , and return to the previous screen by pressing .
Changing Setting Values
Use / to adjust the setting on the scale.
Moving the Cursor
Use / to enter text and values. Entering Text(P. 32)
Using
Press to apply a setting.
Using the Numeric Keys
Use the numeric keys to enter text and values. Entering Text(P. 32)
●You can change a variety of display-related settings, such as the scrolling speed or display language:
Display Settings(P. 303)
Basic Operations
31
Entering Text
0W20-087
Use the numeric keys to enter text and values.
Switching the Type of Text
Press to switch the type of text that is entered.
●You can also select <Entry Mode> and press to switch the type of text.
Types of Text That Can Be Entered
Text that can be entered is listed below.
Key A a 12
@ . - _ / 1
ABC abc 2
DEF def 3
GHI ghi 4
Basic Operations
32
JKL jkl 5
MNO mno 6
PQRS pqrs 7
TUV tuv 8
WXYZ wxyz 9
(Not available) 0
(space) -.*#!",;:^`_=/|'?$@%&+\~()[]{}<> (Not available)
●Press or select <Symbol> and press when the type of text that is entered is <A> or <a> to
display enterable symbols in the screen. Use / / / to select the symbol you want to
enter, and press .
Deleting Text
One character is deleted each time is pressed. Press and hold to delete all of the entered text.
Moving the Cursor (Entering a Space)
Press or to move the cursor. To enter a space, move the cursor to the end of the text, and press .
Example of Entering Text and Numbers
Example: "Canon-1"
1Press repeatedly until <A> is selected.
2Press repeatedly until the letter "C" is selected.
3Press repeatedly until <a> is selected.
4Press repeatedly until the letter "a" is selected.
5Press repeatedly until the letter "n" is selected.
6Press repeatedly until the letter "o" is selected.
7Press repeatedly until the letter "n" is selected.
8Press repeatedly until the symbol "-" is selected.
9Press repeatedly until <12> is selected.
10 Press .
11 Select <Apply> and press .
Basic Operations
33
Logging on to the Machine
0W20-00L
If Department ID Management is enabled or System Manager IDs are enabled, you must log on before using the
machine. When the logon screen appears, use the procedure below to enter the department ID and PIN.
1Enter an ID.
1Use / to select <Department ID> or <System Manager ID>, and press .
2Enter an ID using the numeric keys, and press .
●If no PIN is registered, proceed to step 3.
2Enter the PIN.
1Select <PIN>, and press .
2Enter an ID using the numeric keys, and press .
3Press .
●The logon screen will be changed to the main screen.
●After you nish using the machine, press again to display the logon screen.
LINKS
Setting the Department ID Management(P. 209)
Setting the System Manager ID(P. 207)
Basic Operations
34
Loading Paper
0W20-00R
You can load the paper into the paper drawer or multi-purpose tray. Load the paper you usually use into the paper
drawer. The paper drawer is convenient when using large amounts of paper. Use the multi-purpose tray when you
temporarily use size or type of paper that is not loaded in the paper drawer. See Paper(P. 440) for available paper
sizes.
Paper Type and Setting for the Machine
See the table below to specify the paper settings according to the type and weight of the paper to load into the
paper source. For more information about how to specify the paper settings on the machine, see Specifying
Paper Size and Type(P. 50) . For the amount of paper that can be loaded in each paper source, see
Paper(P. 440) .
Paper Type Paper Weight Paper Setting on the Machine
Plain paper
60 to 89 g/m² <Plain>
60 to 69 g/m² <Plain L> *1
Recycled paper 60 to 89 g/m² <Recycled>
Color paper 60 to 89 g/m² <Color>
Heavy paper
90 to 150 g/m² <Heavy 1>
151 to 163 g/m² <Heavy 2>
Envelope <Envelope>
Label <Labels>
*1 Specify <Plain L> as the paper type if printouts come out curled with <Plain> specied.
Do not use the following types of paper:
●Wrinkled or creased paper
●Curled or rolled paper
●Torn paper
●Damp paper
●Very thin paper
●Paper printed by a thermal transfer printer
●Highly textured paper
●Glossy paper
Paper handling and storage
●Store the paper on a at surface.
Basic Operations
35
●Keep the paper wrapped in its original package to protect the paper from moisture or dryness.
●Do not store the paper in such a way that may cause it to curl or fold.
●Do not store the paper vertically or stack too much paper.
●Do not store the paper in direct sunlight, or in a place subject to high humidity, dryness, or drastic
changes in temperature or humidity.
When printing on paper that has absorbed moisture
●Steam may emit from the paper output area, or water droplets may form around the paper output
area. There is nothing unusual about any of these occurrences, which occur when the heat generated
from xing toner on the paper causes moisture in the paper to evaporate (most likely to occur at low
room temperatures).
LINKS
Registering a Custom Paper Size(P. 57)
Basic Operations
36
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer
0W20-00S
Load the paper that you usually use in the paper drawer. When you want to print on paper that is not loaded in the
paper drawer, load the paper in the multi-purpose tray. Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 41)
Make sure to load paper in portrait orientation
●Paper cannot be loaded in landscape orientation. Make sure to load the paper in portrait orientation, as
shown in the illustrations below.
●Follow the procedure below when loading paper into the optional paper feeder.
1Pull out the paper drawer.
●Make sure to hold the paper drawer with both hands, and pull it out gently. Otherwise, you may damage
the paper drawer by dropping it, if it slides out too easily.
2Slide the paper guides apart.
●Press the lock release lever to slide the paper guides outward.
Basic Operations
37
3Load the paper so that the edge of the paper stack is aligned against the front side of
the paper drawer.
●Load the paper in portrait orientation (with the short edge toward the machine), with the print side face
down. Paper cannot be loaded in landscape orientation.
●Fan the paper stack well, and tap it on a at surface to align the edges.
Do not exceed the load limit line when loading paper
●Make sure that the paper stack does not exceed the load limit line ( or ). Loading too much paper
can cause paper jams.
For A5 or larger paper size
For paper size smaller than A5
●When loading paper with a logo, see Loading Preprinted Paper(P. 46) .
4Align the paper guides against the edges of the paper.
●Press the lock release lever and slide the paper guides inward until they are aligned securely against the
edges of the paper.
Basic Operations
38
Align the paper guides securely against the edges of the paper
●Paper guides that are too loose or too tight can cause misfeeds or paper jams.
When loading paper with length shorter than A5 size length
When loading A6 size paper or other paper with length shorter than 210 mm, slide the paper guide on the
rear side toward the front side and beyond its position for A5 size paper.
1Align the paper guides on the left and right sides against the edges of the paper.
●Press the lock release lever and slide the paper guides inward until they are aligned securely against
the edges of the paper.
2Align the paper guide on the rear side against the edge of the paper.
●Press the lock release lever and slide the paper guide toward the front side and beyond its position for
A5 size paper until it is securely aligned against the edge of the paper.
5Insert the paper drawer into the machine.
●When you insert the paper drawer with <Notify to Check Paper Settings> set to <On>, a conrmation
screen is displayed. Notify to Check Paper Settings(P. 343)
Basic Operations
39
»Continue to Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Paper Drawer(P. 51)
When changing the paper size or type
●The factory default settings for paper size and type are <A4> and <Plain>, respectively. If you load a
different size or type of paper into the machine, make sure to change the settings. If you do not change
the settings, the machine cannot print properly.
Printing on the Back Side of Printed Paper (Manual 2-Sided Printing)
You can print on the back side of printed paper. Flatten any curls on the printed paper and insert it into the
multi-purpose tray ( Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 41) ), with the side to print face up
(previously printed side face down).
●Load one sheet of paper each time you print.
●You can use only the paper printed with this machine.
●You cannot print on the side that has previously been printed on.
LINKS
Paper(P. 440)
Notify to Check Paper Settings(P. 343)
Basic Operations
40
Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray
0W20-00U
When you want to print on paper that is not loaded in the paper drawer, load the paper in the multi-purpose tray.
Load the paper that you usually use in the paper drawer. Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 37)
Make sure to load paper in portrait orientation
●Paper cannot be loaded in landscape orientation. Make sure to load the paper in portrait orientation, as
shown in the illustrations below.
1Open the cover.
●Hold the top center of the cover to open it.
2Pull out the paper tray and the tray extension.
●Pull out the tray extension when loading large paper.
3Spread the paper guides apart.
●Slide the paper guides outward.
Basic Operations
41
4Insert the paper into the multi-purpose tray until the paper stops.
●Load the paper in portrait orientation (with the short edge toward the machine), with the print side face up.
Paper cannot be loaded in landscape orientation.
●Fan the paper stack well, and tap it on a at surface to align the edges.
Do not exceed the load limit guide when loading paper
●Make sure that the paper stack does not exceed the load limit guide ( ). Loading too much paper can
cause paper jams.
●When loading envelopes or paper with a logo, see Loading Envelopes(P. 44) or Loading Preprinted
Paper(P. 46) .
5Align the paper guides against the edges of the paper.
●Slide the paper guides inward until they are aligned securely against the edges of the paper.
Basic Operations
42
Align the paper guides securely against the edges of the paper
●Paper guides that are too loose or too tight can cause misfeeds or paper jams.
»Continue to Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 53)
Printing on the Back Side of Printed Paper (Manual 2-Sided Printing)
You can print on the back side of printed paper. Flatten any curls on the printed paper and insert it into the
multi-purpose tray, with the side to print face up (previously printed side face down).
●Load one sheet of paper each time you print.
●You can use only the paper printed with this machine.
●You cannot print on the side that has previously been printed on.
LINKS
Paper(P. 440)
Basic Operations
43
Loading Envelopes
0W20-00W
Make sure to atten any curls on envelopes before loading them. Also pay attention to the orientation of envelopes
and which side is face up. Note that envelopes cannot be loaded in the paper drawer.
Before Loading Envelopes(P. 44)
Loading Envelopes in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 45)
●This section describes how to load envelopes in the orientation you want, as well as procedures that you
need to complete before loading envelopes. For a description of the general procedure for loading
envelopes in the multi-purpose tray, see Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 41) .
Before Loading Envelopes
Follow the procedure below to prepare the envelopes before loading.
1Close the ap of each envelope.
2Flatten them to release any remaining air, and make sure that the edges are pressed
tightly.
3Loosen any stiff corners of the envelopes and atten any curls.
Basic Operations
44
4Align the edges of the envelope on a at surface.
Loading Envelopes in the Multi-Purpose Tray
Load the envelopes Monarch, COM10, DL, or ISO-C5 in portrait orientation (with the short edge toward the machine),
with the non-glued side (front side) face up. You cannot print on the reverse side of envelopes.
Load the envelopes so that the edge with the ap is toward the left side as shown in the illustration.
Basic Operations
45
Loading Preprinted Paper
0W20-00X
When you use paper that has been preprinted with a logo, pay attention to the orientation of the paper when loading.
Load the paper properly so that printing is performed on the correct side of the paper with a logo.
Making 1-Sided Printouts on Paper with Logos(P. 46)
Making 2-Sided Printouts on Paper with Logos(P. 47)
●This section mainly describes how to load preprinted paper with the proper facing and orientation. For a
description of the general procedure for loading paper in the paper drawer or multi-purpose tray, see
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 37) or Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 41) .
Making 1-Sided Printouts on Paper with Logos
Printing on Paper with Logos in Portrait Orientation
When loading the paper in the paper drawer
Load the paper with the logo side (the side to print the document) face down.
When loading the paper in the multi-purpose tray
Load the paper with the logo side (the side to print the document) face up.
Basic Operations
46
Printing on Paper with Logos in Landscape Orientation
When loading the paper in the paper drawer
Load the paper with the logo side (the side to print the document) face down.
When loading the paper in the multi-purpose tray
Load the paper with the logo side (the side to print the document) face up.
Making 2-Sided Printouts on Paper with Logos
Printing on Paper with Logos in Portrait Orientation
When loading the paper in the paper drawer
Load the paper with the front logo side (the side to print the rst page of the document) face up.
Basic Operations
47
When loading the paper in the multi-purpose tray
Load the paper with the front logo side (the side to print the rst page of the document) face down.
Printing on Paper with Logos in Landscape Orientation
When loading the paper in the paper drawer
Load the paper with the front logo side (the side to print the rst page of the document) face up.
When loading the paper in the multi-purpose tray
Load the paper with the front logo side (the side to print the rst page of the document) face down.
Basic Operations
48
The <Switch Paper Feed Method> setting
●When you print on preprinted paper, you need to change the facing of the paper to load each time you
switch between 1-sided and 2-sided printing. However, if <Switch Paper Feed Method> is set to <Print Side
Priority>, the facing that you use for loading preprinted paper for 2-sided printing (logo side face up for
paper drawer or down for multi-purpose tray) can also be used for 1-sided printing. This setting is especially
useful if you frequently perform both 1-sided and 2-sided printing. Switch Paper Feed Method(P. 311)
Basic Operations
49
Specifying Paper Size and Type
0W20-00Y
You must specify the paper size and type settings to match the paper that is loaded. Make sure to change the paper
settings when you load the paper that is different from the previously loaded paper.
●If the setting does not match the size and type of loaded paper, a paper jam or printing error may occur.
Basic Operations
50
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Paper Drawer
0W20-010
●To specify a custom paper size, you need to register that size before hand. Registering a Custom Paper
Size(P. 57)
1Display the <Paper Settings> screen.
LBP252dw
Press use / to select <Paper Settings> press .
LBP251dw
Press ( ).
2Select <Drawer 1> or <Drawer 2>, and press .
●<Drawer 2> is displayed only when the optional paper feeder is installed.
3Select the paper size, and press .
If the loaded paper size is not displayed
●Select <Other Sizes>, and press .
About <Free Size>
●If you frequently change sizes of paper to load, you can specify <Free Size>, which saves you the trouble of
changing the paper size setting each time you print. You can make a setting so that an error message will
be displayed when the paper size set in the printer driver is rather different from the size of the loaded
paper. Barcode Adjustment Mode(P. 316)
4Select the paper type, and press .
Basic Operations
51
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Multi-Purpose
Tray
0W20-011
The screen shown here is displayed when paper is loaded in the multi-purpose tray. Follow the on-screen instructions
to specify settings that match the size and type of the loaded paper.
If the screen shown above is not displayed when paper is loaded
●If you always load the same paper in the multi-purpose tray, you can skip the paper setting operations by
registering the paper size and type as the default setting. When the default setting is registered, however,
the screen shown above is not displayed. To display the screen, select <Specify When Loading Paper> (
Registering Default Paper Settings for the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 55) ).
1Use / to select the paper size, and press .
When loading custom size paper
1Select <Custom>, and press .
2Specify the length of the <X> (shorter) side.
●Select <X>, and press .
●Input the length of the <X> side using / or the numeric keys, and press .
3Specify the length of the <Y> (longer) side.
●Select <Y>, and press .
●Input the length of the <Y> side, and press .
Basic Operations
53
4Select <Apply>, and press .
If the loaded paper size is not displayed
●Select <Other Sizes>, and press .
About <Free Size>
●If you specify <Free Size>, you can save the trouble of changing the paper size setting each time you print.
You can make a setting so that an error message will be displayed when the paper size set in the printer
driver is rather different from the size of the loaded paper. Action When Free Paper Size
Mismatch(P. 313)
2Select the paper type, and press .
LINKS
Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 41)
Limiting the Paper Sizes Displayed(P. 60)
Paper(P. 440)
Basic Operations
54
Registering Default Paper Settings for the Multi-
Purpose Tray
0W20-012
You can register default paper settings for the multi-purpose tray. Registering default settings can save yourself the
effort of having to specify the settings each time you load the same paper into the multi-purpose tray.
●After the default paper setting is registered, the paper setting screen is not displayed when paper is loaded,
and the same setting is always used. If you load a different paper size or type without changing the paper
settings, the machine may not print properly. To avoid this problem, select <Specify When Loading Paper> in
step 3, and then load the paper.
1Display the <Paper Settings> screen.
LBP252dw
Press use / to select <Paper Settings> press .
LBP251dw
Press ( ).
2Select <Multi-Purpose Tray>, and press .
3Select the paper size, and press .
Registering a custom paper size
1Select <Custom>, and press .
2Specify the length of the <X> (shorter) side.
●Select <X>, and press .
●Input the length of the <X> side using / or the numeric keys, and press .
Basic Operations
55
3Specify the length of the <Y> (longer) side.
●Select <Y>, and press .
●Input the length of the <Y> side, and press .
4Select <Apply>, and press .
If the loaded paper size is not displayed
●Select <Other Sizes>, and press .
About <Free Size>
●If you frequently change sizes of paper to load, you can specify <Free Size>, which saves you the trouble of
changing the paper size setting each time you print. You can make a setting so that an error message will
be displayed when the paper size set in the printer driver is rather different from the size of the loaded
paper. Action When Free Paper Size Mismatch(P. 313)
4Select the paper type, and press .
LINKS
Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 41)
Limiting the Paper Sizes Displayed(P. 60)
Paper(P. 440)
Basic Operations
56
Registering a Custom Paper Size
0W20-013
You can register up to three frequently used custom paper sizes.
1Display the <Paper Settings> screen.
LBP252dw
Press use / to select <Paper Settings> press .
LBP251dw
Press ( ).
2Select <Register Custom Paper>, and press .
3Select <Not Registered>, and press .
●If paper sizes <1> to <3> have already been registered, either change or delete the setting to continue. The
procedures for changing and deleting these settings are described below.
Changing a setting
1Select the registered size you want to change, and press .
2Select <Edit>, press , and proceed to step 4.
Deleting a setting
1Select the registered size you want to delete, and press .
2Select <Delete>, and press .
3Select <Yes>, and press .
Basic Operations
57
4Specify the paper size.
1Select <X>, and press .
●Select <X>, and press .
●Input the length of the <X> side using / or the numeric keys, and press .
2Specify the length of the <Y> (longer) side.
●Select <Y>, and press .
●Input the length of the <Y> side, and press .
3Select <Apply>, and press .
5Select the paper type, and press .
Selecting a Registered Custom Paper Setting
The paper sizes that are registered in the procedure above are displayed on the screen for selecting the paper
size.
When selecting the paper size for the paper drawer
On the screen to specify the size of the paper that is loaded in the paper drawers, the registered paper sizes
are displayed. Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Paper Drawer(P. 51)
●Of the registered paper sizes, only those that can be loaded in a paper drawer are displayed.
Paper(P. 440)
Basic Operations
58
When selecting the paper size for the multi-purpose tray
When paper is loaded in the multi-purpose tray, the screen for selecting the paper size for the multi-purpose
tray is displayed. The registered paper sizes are displayed on this screen. Specifying Paper Size and Type
in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 53)
●The registered paper sizes are displayed when you set the default paper settings for the multi-purpose
tray. From the screen, you can select one of the displayed sizes as thedefault paper size for the multi-
purpose tray. Registering Default Paper Settings for the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 55)
LINKS
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 37)
Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 41)
Basic Operations
59
Limiting the Paper Sizes Displayed
0W20-014
You can ensure that only frequently used paper sizes are shown in the screen for selecting the paper size setting.
1Display the <Paper Settings> screen.
LBP252dw
Press use / to select <Paper Settings> press .
LBP251dw
Press ( ).
2Select <Select Frequently Used Paper Sizes>, and press .
3Select <Multi-Purpose Tray>, <Drawer 1> or <Drawer 2>, and press .
●<Drawer 2> is displayed only when the optional paper feeder is installed.
4Clear the check boxes for the paper sizes you do not want to be displayed.
●Select a paper size and press to clear the check box.
●Ensure that only the check boxes for the paper sizes you use frequently are selected.
●To display the paper sizes whose check boxes have been cleared, select <Other Sizes> in the paper size
selection screen.
5Select <Apply>, and press .
LINKS
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Paper Drawer(P. 51)
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 53)
Registering Default Paper Settings for the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 55)
Basic Operations
60
Saving Energy
0W20-015
You can save energy by making a setting so that the machine automatically enters the power saving state (sleep
mode) or automatically turns OFF if no operation is performed for a certain period of time or that the machine is
automatically turned OFF at a xed time on each day of the week.
Entering Sleep Mode(P. 62)
Powering OFF at a Fixed Time(P. 64)
Setting Auto Shutdown Time(P. 66)
Basic Operations
61
Entering Sleep Mode
0W20-016
The sleep mode function reduces the amount of power consumed by the machine by disabling power ow to the
operation panel. If no operations will be performed on the machine for a while, such as during a lunch break, you can
save power simply by pressing on the operation panel. You can also use the Auto Sleep Time setting to
automatically put the machine into sleep mode if it remains idle for a specied length of time.
When in sleep mode
●When the machine enters sleep mode, the display turns OFF and the Main Power indicator turns ON.
Situations in which the machine does not enter sleep mode
●When the machine is in operation
●When the Processing/Data indicator is lit up or blinking
●When the machine is performing an operation such as adjustment or cleaning
●When a paper jam occurs
●When the menu screen is displayed
●When an error message is displayed on the screen (There are some exceptions. The machine sometimes
enters sleep mode when error messages are displayed.)
●When the SSID/network key screen for Direct Connection is displayed.
●When settings data is being imported/exported
When You Want to Set the Auto Sleep Timer
The factory default setting for the amount of time that elapses before the machine enters auto sleep mode is 3
minutes (the user setting range is 3 to 60 minutes). We recommend using the factory default settings to save
the most power. If you want to change the amount of time that elapses before the machine enters auto sleep
mode, follow the procedure below.
<Timer Settings> <Auto Sleep Time> Set the amount of time that elapses
before the machine automatically enters sleep mode
Basic Operations
62
Exiting Sleep Mode
Press any key on the operation panel.
Basic Operations
63
Powering OFF at a Fixed Time
0W20-017
You can make a setting so that the power is automatically tuned OFF at a specied time on each day of the week. This
allows you to avoid useless power consumption that may occur due to failure to turn OFF the power. By default, this
function is disabled.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote
UI(P. 270)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Timer Settings] [Edit].
4Select the check box for [Set Auto Shutdown Weekly Timer], and set the time to turn
OFF the power.
Basic Operations
64
[Set Auto Shutdown Weekly Timer]
Selecting the check box allows you to set the time to turn OFF the power on each day of the week.
[Sunday] to [Saturday]
Enter the desired time to turn OFF the power. For any day of the week, leaving the time eld blank means
that the auto shutdown function is disabled for that day.
5Click [OK].
If the power is not turned OFF automatically at the specied time
●When the Processing/Data indicator is lit up or blinking
●When the menu screen or Check Counter screen is displayed
●When settings data is being imported/exported
●When the rmware is being updated
If the power cannot be turned OFF automatically at the specied time, a retry will be performed up to ten times
at intervals of one minute. If the power cannot be turned OFF even after ten retries, auto shutdown will be
impossible for that day.
Basic Operations
65
Setting Auto Shutdown Time
0W20-018
By enabling this setting, you can set the machine to automatically shut down. The machine automatically turns OFF
after the specied period of idle time has elapsed since entering the sleep mode. You can cut electric power
consumption at night and on holidays if you forget to turn OFF the machine.
<Timer Settings> <Auto Shutdown Time> Set the time period
Before setting <Auto Shutdown Time>
When the <Auto Shutdown Time> setting is enabled, the machine may automatically shut down even if
you are operating the machine from the Remote UI. A malfunction may occur, particularly if the machine
shuts down while data is being imported. When you import data using the Remote UI, set <Auto
Shutdown Time> to <0> (Off) in advance.
●The default setting is 4 hours.
●If any setting of the [Timer Settings] is changed from the Remote UI while the machine is in the sleep
mode, the timer for the <Auto Shutdown Time> setting is reset to the beginning. The machine
automatically shuts down after the specied period of idle time has elapsed since the timer was reset.
Basic Operations
66
Printing
Printing .................................................................................................................................................................. 68
Basic Printing Operations ................................................................................................................................... 70
Canceling Prints ................................................................................................................................................... 75
Checking the Printing Status and Log ................................................................................................................ 78
Various Print Settings ......................................................................................................................................... 80
Enlarging or Reducing .................................................................................................................................... 82
Switching 1-Sided and 2-Sided Printing .......................................................................................................... 84
Collating Printouts by Page ............................................................................................................................ 86
Printing Multiple Pages onto One Sheet ......................................................................................................... 88
Printing Posters .............................................................................................................................................. 90
Printing Booklet .............................................................................................................................................. 91
Printing Borders ............................................................................................................................................. 93
Printing Dates and Page Numbers ................................................................................................................. 94
Printing Watermarks ...................................................................................................................................... 96
Printing Specic Pages onto Different Paper .................................................................................................. 98
Selecting Document Type ............................................................................................................................. 100
Saving Toner ................................................................................................................................................. 102
Combining and Printing Multiple Documents ............................................................................................... 104
Conguring Printer Settings on the Machine ............................................................................................... 108
Printing a Document Secured by a PIN (Secure Print) (LBP252dw) ................................................................ 109
Preparing for Using Secure Print .................................................................................................................. 110
Printing via Secure Print ............................................................................................................................... 112
Conguring Print Settings to Your Needs ....................................................................................................... 117
Registering Combinations of Frequently Used Print Settings ....................................................................... 118
Changing Default Settings ............................................................................................................................ 120
Printing
67
Printing
0W20-019
You can print a document made with an application on your computer by using the printer driver. There are useful
settings on the printer driver, such as enlarging/reducing and 2-sided printing, that enable you to print your
documents in various ways. Before you can use this function, you need to complete some procedures, such as
installing the printer driver on your computer. For more information, see Printer Driver Installation Guide.
●If you are a Mac user, see Canon UFR II/UFRII LT Printer Driver Guide for installing the printer drivers and
Printer Driver's Help for using print functions ( For Mac OS Users(P. 481) ).
●Depending on the operating system and the type or version of the printer driver you are using, the printer
driver screens in this manual may differ from your screens.
●You can use the PCL6 printer driver as well as the UFR II printer driver. The available print settings vary
depending on the printer driver. For more information, click [Help] on each printer driver screen.
About the Printer Driver Help
●Clicking [Help] on the printer driver screen displays the Help screen. On this screen, you can see the detailed
descriptions that are not in the e-Manual.
◼To Use Optional Accessories
If the optional paper feeder (drawer 2) is attached to the machine, perform the following operation on the printer
driver.
●To perform the following procedure, log on to your computer with an administrator account.
Open the printer folder ( Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 474) ) Right-click your printer icon
[Printer Properties] or [Properties] [Device Settings] tab Select the [500 Sheet Drawer] check
box [OK]
Printing
68
Printing
69
Basic Printing Operations
0W20-01A
This section describes how to print a document on your computer by using the printer driver.
●Before printing, specify the paper size and type for the paper loaded in the paper source.
Loading Paper(P. 35)
Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 50)
1Open a document in an application and display the print dialog box.
●How to display the print dialog box differs for each application. For more information, see the instruction
manual for the application you are using.
2Select your printer, and click [Preferences] or [Properties].
●The screen that is displayed differs depending on the application you are using.
3Specify the paper size.
Printing
70
[Page Size]
Select the size of a document made in the application.
[Output Size]
Select the size of paper on which the document will be actually printed. If the selected size differs from the
one specied in [Page Size], the document is printed enlarged/reduced automatically according to the size
specied in [Output Size]. Enlarging or Reducing(P. 82)
Clickable UI
●You can easily specify the page layout, binding position, etc. intuitively on the preview image. For more
information, click [Help] on the printer driver screen.
4Click the [Paper Source] tab, and specify the paper source and paper type.
Printing
71
[Paper Source]
Select the paper source from which paper is fed.
Setting Value Paper Source
Auto The paper source is automatically selected according to the specied size and type of
the paper to print on and the settings congured in the machine.
Multi-Purpose Tray Paper is fed from the multi-purpose tray.
Drawer 1 Paper is fed from the paper drawer of the machine.
Drawer 2 Paper is fed from the optional paper feeder.
[Paper Type]
Specify the setting according to the type and basis weight of the paper to print on. Loading Paper(P. 35)
5Specify other print settings as necessary. Various Print Settings(P. 80)
You can register the settings you specied in this step as a "prole" and use the prole whenever you print.
You can eliminate the need to specify the same settings every time you print.
6Click [OK].
Printing
72
7Click [Print] or [OK].
●Printing starts. On some applications, a screen like shown below appears.
●To cancel printing, click [Cancel] when the screen shown above is displayed. After the screen disappears or if
the screen is not displayed, you can cancel printing in other ways. Canceling Prints(P. 75)
When printing from the Windows Store app in Windows 8/Server 2012
Display the charms on the right side of the screen and use the procedure shown below.
Windows 8/Server 2012
[Devices] the printer you are using tap or click [Print]
Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2
[Devices] [Print] the printer you are using tap or click [Print]
●If you print using this method, only a limited number of print settings are available.
Printing
73
●If the message [The printer requires your attention. Go to the desktop to take care of it.] is displayed, go to
the desktop and follow the instructions in the displayed dialog box. This message appears when the
machine is set to display the user name during printing and similar instances.
LINKS
Checking the Printing Status and Log(P. 78)
Printing
74
Canceling Prints
0W20-01C
You can cancel printing from your computer or on the operation panel of the machine.
From a Computer(P. 75)
From the Operation Panel(P. 76)
From a Computer
You can cancel printing from the printer icon displayed on the system tray on the desktop.
1Double-click the printer icon.
When the printer icon is not displayed
●Open the printer folder ( Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 474) ), right-click your printer icon, and click
[See what's printing] (or double-click the icon of the printer driver for the machine).
2Select the document you want to cancel, and click [Document] [Cancel].
3Click [Yes].
●Printing of the selected document is canceled.
●Several pages may be output after you cancel printing.
Canceling from the Remote UI
●You can cancel printing from the [Job Status] page on the Remote UI: Checking Current Status of Print
Documents(P. 275)
Printing
75
Canceling from an application
●On some applications, a screen like shown below appears. You can cancel printing by clicking [Cancel].
From the Operation Panel
Cancel printing using or .
◼Press to Cancel
If the Screen Displays a List of Documents When is Pressed
Select the document to cancel <Yes>
◼Check the Print Job Status before Canceling
<Print Job> <Job Status> Select the document on the <Print Job Status>
screen <Yes>
●Several pages may be output after you cancel printing.
Printing
76
Checking the Printing Status and Log
0W20-01E
You can check the current print statuses and the logs for printed documents.
●When <Display Job Log> is set to <Off>, you cannot check the communication logs. Display Job Log(P. 341)
Useful in the Following Cases
●When your documents are not printed for a long time, you may want to see the waiting list of the
documents waiting to be printed.
●When you cannot nd your printouts that you thought had been printed, you may want to see whether an
error has occurred.
1Press .
2Use / to select <Print Job>, and press .
3Check the print statuses or logs.
To check the print statuses
1Select <Job Status>, and press .
2Select the document whose status you want to check, and press .
<Print Job Status>
Displays a list of the documents that are being processed or are waiting to be processed.
<Details>
Printing
78
Displays detailed information about the document selected from the list.
To check the print logs
1Select <Print Job Log>, and press .
2Select the document whose log you want to check, and press .
<Print Job Log>
Displays a list of the documents that were printed. <OK> is displayed when a document was printed
successfully, and <Error> is displayed when a document failed to be printed because it was canceled
or there was some error.
<Details>
Displays detailed information about the document selected from the list. The displayed document
name or user name may not reect the actual document or user name.
If the <Result> column shows a three-digit number
This number represents an error code. See When an Error Code Appears(P. 366) .
LINKS
Basic Printing Operations(P. 70)
Canceling Prints(P. 75)
Printing
79
Various Print Settings
0W20-01F
There are a variety of settings to suit your needs, such as Enlarged/Reduced and 2-sided Printing.
Enlarging or Reducing(P. 82) Switching 1-Sided and 2-Sided
Printing(P. 84)
Collating Printouts by
Page(P. 86)
Printing Multiple Pages onto One
Sheet(P. 88)
Printing Posters(P. 90) Printing Booklet(P. 91)
Printing Borders(P. 93) Printing Dates and Page
Numbers(P. 94)
Printing Watermarks(P. 96)
Printing
80
Enlarging or Reducing
0W20-01H
You can make enlarged or reduced printouts by using a preset print ratio, such as A5
to A4, or a custom print ratio that you set in increments of 1%.
Setting Print Ratio by Specifying the Original Document and Paper Size (Preset Ratio)
The print ratio is automatically set based on the document and paper size you have specied.
[Basic Settings] tab Select the document size in [Page Size] Select the paper size in [Output
Size] [OK]
Specifying Print Ratio in Increments of 1%
[Basic Settings] tab Select the [Manual Scaling] check box Enter the print ratio in [Scaling]
[OK]
Printing
82
●Depending on the selected paper size, you may not be able to set the optimum enlarging/reducing ratio. For
example, there may be large blank spaces on your printout, or portions of the document that are missing.
●The enlarging/reducing settings on some applications have priority over those on the printer driver.
LINKS
Basic Printing Operations(P. 70)
Printing
83
Switching 1-Sided and 2-Sided Printing
0W20-01J
You can make both 1-sided and 2-sided printouts. The default setting is [2-sided
Printing]. Change the setting as necessary.
Make sure that the paper size switch lever is set properly
●When performing 2-sided printing, improper setting of the paper size switch lever can cause misfeeds or
paper jams. When performing 2-sided printing, make sure that the paper size switch lever is set properly for
the size of the paper to be used. Interior(P. 21)
Make sure that the sub-output tray is closed
●When the sub-output tray is open, you cannot perform 2-sided printing. When performing 2-sided printing,
always make sure that the sub-output tray is closed. Back Side(P. 19)
●2-sided printing may not be available with some sizes and types of paper. Paper(P. 440)
[Basic Settings] tab Select [1-sided Printing] or [2-sided Printing] in [1-sided/2-sided/Booklet
Printing] Select the position to bind in [Binding Location] [OK]
Printing
84
[1-sided/2-sided/Booklet Printing]
Select [1-sided Printing] or [2-sided Printing].
●For [Booklet Printing], see Printing Booklet(P. 91) .
[Binding Location]
Specify the position to bind the printouts with a binding tool such as a stapler. Printing orientation will be
changed depending on the specied binding position. To specify the margin width for the binding position,
click [Gutter].
[Long Edge [Left]]
Prints images in such a way that the printed pages are opened horizontally when bound.
[Short Edge [Top]]
Prints images in such a way that the printed pages are opened vertically when bound.
[Gutter]
Specify a binding margin.
LINKS
Basic Printing Operations(P. 70)
Printing Multiple Pages onto One Sheet(P. 88)
Printing Booklet(P. 91)
Printing
85
Collating Printouts by Page
0W20-01K
When printing copies of multi-page documents, select [Collate] to print complete
sets in sequential page order. This function is useful when preparing handouts for
meetings or presentations.
[Basic Settings] tab Select [Collate] or [Group] in [Collate/Group] [OK]
[Collate/Group]
Specify the sorting method of the printouts when printing multiple-page documents.
[Collate]
The printouts are grouped into complete sets in sequential page order. For example, if you are printing
three copies of a ve-page document, the printouts will be arranged in the following page order: 1, 2, 3, 4,
5, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5.
[Group]
The printouts are not collated. For example, if you are printing three copies of a ve-page document, the
printouts will be arranged in the following page order: 1, 1, 1, 2, 2, 2, 3, 3, 3, 4, 4, 4, 5, 5, 5.
Printing
86
Printing Multiple Pages onto One Sheet
0W20-01L
You can print multiple pages onto a single sheet. For example, you can print four or
nine pages onto a single sheet by using [4 on 1] or [9 on 1]. Use this function if you
want to save paper or to view your document in thumbnails.
●To save more paper, combine this setting with 2-sided printing. Switching 1-Sided and 2-Sided
Printing(P. 84)
[Basic Settings] tab In [Page Layout], select the number of pages to print onto a single sheet In
[Page Order], select the page distribution layout [OK]
[Page Layout]
Select the number of pages to print onto a single sheet from [1 on 1] to [16 on 1]. For example, to print 16
pages onto a single sheet, select [16 on 1].
●For options such as [Poster [2 x 2]], see Printing Posters(P. 90) .
●Printing may not be performed properly if you combine this setting with an application setting for
collating printouts.
Printing
88
Printing Posters
0W20-01R
You can print one page of a document onto multiple pages. For example, if you make
a one-page A4-size document nine times larger, you will have a poster 3x3 A4 size
sheets large after you print the document and paste it together.
[Basic Settings] tab In [Page Layout], select the dimensions of your poster (for example, [Poster [2
x 2]]) [OK]
●There are four size settings: [Poster [1 x 2]], [Poster [2 x 2]], [Poster [3 x 3]], and [Poster [4 x 4]].
Poster size settings cannot be selected when 2-sided printing is enabled. Select [1-sided Printing] in [1-
sided/2-sided/Booklet Printing], and then select a poster size setting.
●Select the [Print Border] check box to add borders on your printouts. The borders are helpful if you want to
paste the printouts together or cut off the margins.
LINKS
Basic Printing Operations(P. 70)
Enlarging or Reducing(P. 82)
Printing
90
Printing Booklet
0W20-01S
You can print two pages of a document on both sides of paper and then fold your
printed pages in half to make a booklet. The printer driver controls the print order in
such a way that the page numbers are correctly arranged.
Make sure that the paper size switch lever is set properly
●When performing booklet printing, improper setting of the paper size switch lever can cause misfeeds or
paper jams. When performing booklet printing, make sure that the paper size switch lever is set properly for
the size of the paper to be used. Interior(P. 21)
Make sure that the sub-output tray is closed
●When the sub-output tray is open, you cannot perform booklet printing. When performing booklet printing,
always make sure that the sub-output tray is closed. Back Side(P. 19)
●Booklet printing may not be available with some sizes and types of paper. The paper that is available for 2-
sided printing is also available for booklet printing. See Paper(P. 440) .
[Basic Settings] tab Select [Booklet Printing] in [1-sided/2-sided/Booklet Printing] Click
[Booklet] to specify detailed settings as necessary [OK] [OK]
Printing
91
[1-sided/2-sided/Booklet Printing]
Select [Booklet Printing].
●For [1-sided Printing] and [2-sided Printing], see Switching 1-Sided and 2-Sided Printing(P. 84) .
[Booklet]
The screen below is displayed.
[Booklet Printing Method]
●[All Pages at Once]: Prints all of the pages at once as a single bundle so that you can make a booklet just
by folding the printed pages in half.
●[Divide into Sets]: Prints as multiple bundles divided by the number of the pages specied on [Sheets
per Set]. Bind each bundle, and then combine them as one booklet. Select this option when the
document has so many pages that you cannot bind them all into a single booklet.
[Specify Booklet Gutter]
If you are using a stapler or other binding tools, specify the margin width for binding your booklet. Select
the [Specify Booklet Gutter] check box and specify the margin width in [Booklet Gutter].
LINKS
Basic Printing Operations(P. 70)
Printing
92
Printing Borders
0W20-01U
You can add borders, such as broken lines or double lines, in the margins of
printouts.
[Page Setup] tab Click [Page Options] Select the border type in [Edging] [OK] [OK]
[Edging]
Select the border type.
Preview
Displays a preview with the selected border.
LINKS
Basic Printing Operations(P. 70)
Printing Dates and Page Numbers(P. 94)
Printing Watermarks(P. 96)
Printing
93
Printing Dates and Page Numbers
0W20-01W
You can print the information such as dates or page numbers, and you can specify
where to print this information on the document (upper-left, lower-right, etc.).
[Page Setup] tab Click [Page Options] Select the print position of the print date, user name or
page number [OK] [OK]
[Print Date]
Specify the position to print the print date.
[Print User Name]
Specify the position to print the user name (logon name) for the computer used to print the document.
[Print Page Number]
Specify the position to print the page number.
Changing the Print Format of Dates and Page Numbers
●You can change formatting details such as font and font size when printing dates, logon names, or page
numbers. Click [Format Settings] on the Page Options screen shown above to specify the details.
Printing
94
Printing Watermarks
0W20-01X
You can print watermarks such as "COPY" or "CONFIDENTIAL" over the document.
You can create new watermarks or use pre-registered watermarks.
[Page Setup] tab Select the [Watermark] check box Select a watermark from [Watermark
Name] [OK]
[Watermark]/[Watermark Name]
Select the [Watermark] check box to display the list of the watermarks in the [Watermark Name] drop-down
list. Select a watermark from the menu.
[Edit Watermark]
Displays the screen to create or edit watermarks.
Printing
96
[Add]
Click to create a new watermark. Up to 50 watermarks can be registered.
[Name]
Enter the created watermark name.
[Attributes]/[Alignment]/[Print Style]
Click each tab to specify the text, color, or print position of the watermark. For more information, click [Help]
on the printer driver screen.
LINKS
Basic Printing Operations(P. 70)
Printing Borders(P. 93)
Printing Dates and Page Numbers(P. 94)
Printing
97
Printing Specic Pages onto Different Paper
0W20-01Y
You can print specic pages of a document, such as when you want to print the cover
of a booklet on colored paper. In this case, load colored paper for the cover in the
multi-purpose tray and load plain paper for the body pages in the paper drawer, and
then specify the paper settings on the printer driver.
[Paper Source] tab Select the pages to print on different paper and the paper source loaded with
the paper from [Paper Selection] [OK]
[Paper Selection]
Specify which pages should be printed on different paper, and select which paper source should be used to
feed paper for each page.
[Same Paper for All Pages] Prints all of the pages on the same paper, and does not print any specic
pages on different paper. All the pages are printed on paper specied in [Paper
Source].
[Different for First, Others, and Last] You can use different paper for the rst page, body pages, and last page,
respectively. For example, you can specify the paper in the multi-purpose tray
for [First Page], the paper in the paper drawer for [Other Pages] (body pages),
and the paper in the multi-purpose tray for [Last Page]. Also, selecting [Paper
Type] in [Select by] enables you to specify the paper type used for printing
rather than the paper source.
[Different for First, Second, Others,
and Last]
You can also specify the paper for the following page of the cover as well as
specifying the paper in [Different for First, Others, and Last]. Also, selecting
[Paper Type] in [Select by] enables you to specify the paper type used for
printing rather than the paper source.
Printing
98
[Different for Cover and Others] Specify the settings for booklet printing ( Printing Booklet(P. 91) ). You can
specify different paper for the cover and body pages, respectively. For
example, you can specify the paper in the multi-purpose tray for [Cover Page]
and the paper in the paper drawer for [Other Pages] (body pages).
LINKS
Basic Printing Operations(P. 70)
Printing
99
Selecting Document Type
0W20-020
You can specify the document type to ensure optimal image quality. There are
different settings for photo documents, documents that have charts or graphs, and
documents that have design drawings with ne lines.
[Quality] tab Select the document type in [Objective] [OK]
[Objective]
Select an option that suits the document type or purpose of printing. For example, select [General] for
general use, or select [Photos] when you want to print photo images in optimal print quality.
[General]
A versatile option that is suitable when printing most documents.
[Publications]
Suitable when printing documents that have a mix of photo images, charts, and graphs.
[Graphics]
Suitable when printing documents that have charts or graphs.
[Photos]
Suitable when printing photo images.
[Designs [CAD]]
Suitable when printing design drawings that have many ne lines.
[High Denition Text]
Suitable when printing documents that have small characters.
Printing
100
Saving Toner
0W20-021
You can set the printer driver to print documents using less toner.
●When the toner save setting is enabled, ne lines and portions with lighter print density may become
blurred.
[Quality] tab Select the document type in [Objective] Click [Advanced Settings] Select [Toner
Save] in the [Advanced Settings] screen Select [On] from the drop-down list [OK] [OK]
[Objective] Selecting Document Type(P. 100)
Select the document type for which you want to enable the toner save setting.
Printing
102
[Advanced Settings]
A screen with settings is displayed. Click [Toner Save] and select [On] from the drop-down list on the bottom
of the screen.
●You can specify whether to enable the toner save setting for each document type. Specify the toner save
setting for each document type listed in [Objective].
●In the [Advanced Settings] screen, you can specify various print settings other than toner save settings.
For more information, click [Help] on the printer driver screen.
LINKS
Basic Printing Operations(P. 70)
Printing
103
Combining and Printing Multiple Documents
0W20-022
By using Canon PageComposer, you can combine multiple documents into one print
job and print the job with specied print settings. This function, for example, enables
you to combine documents made with different applications and print all of the
pages in the same paper size.
1Open a document in an application and display the print dialog box.
●How to display the print dialog box differs for each application. For more information, see the instruction
manual for the application you are using.
2Select your printer, and click [Preferences] or [Properties].
3Select [Edit and Preview] in [Output Method].
●Click [OK] on the [Information] pop-up screen.
●Click [OK] at the bottom of the screen.
4Click [Print] or [OK].
Printing
104
●The Canon PageComposer starts. Printing does not start in this step.
5Repeat steps 1 to 4 for the documents you want to combine.
●The documents are added to the Canon PageComposer.
6From the [Document Name] list, select the documents to combine, and click .
●To select multiple documents, click the documents while holding down [SHIFT] key or [CTRL] key.
7Change the settings as necessary, and click [Combine].
●The documents selected in step 6 are combined.
Printing
105
[Print Preview]
Displays a preview of the document to be printed.
[Document List]/[Print Settings]
●Click the [Document List] tab to display the documents added in steps 1 to 4. You can remove
documents by selecting them in the list and clicking [Delete from List].
●Click the [Print Settings] tab to display the screen for specifying print settings such as the number of
copies or 1-sided/2-sided printing. The settings specied here are applied to the whole print job.
●For more information, click [Help] on the Canon PageComposer screen.
[Details]
Displays the print setting screen of the printer driver. There are fewer settings available than when using
the ordinary printing method.
Printing
106
Conguring Printer Settings on the Machine
0W20-023
When you print a document from a computer, you can specify many print settings, such as the number of copies or 1-
sided/2-sided printing, in the application you used to make the document or on the printer driver. However, the
<Paper Size Override> setting described below can only be specied on the machine.
◼<Paper Size Override>
Select whether to switch between printing on A4 and Letter size paper if one of these paper sizes is loaded but the
other is not. For example, if you are printing a Letter size document but only A4 paper is loaded in the machine, the
machine will print your document on A4 paper.
<Printer Settings> <Paper Size Override> Select <Off> or <On>
<Off>
Does not perform paper size substitution. Printing stops and an error message is displayed when the
machine runs out of the paper that has been specied.
<On>
Performs paper size substitution. However, if no paper to substitute is loaded in any paper sources, the
substitution cannot be performed.
◼Other Printer Settings
There are other printer settings you can specify on the operation panel of the machine. These settings are applied only
for PS/PCL printing. Printer Settings(P. 313)
Priority of settings
When a particular setting can be specied either on the machine, or in an application or on the printer driver,
the settings made in the application or on the printer driver will override those specied on the machine.
LINKS
Basic Printing Operations(P. 70)
Various Print Settings(P. 80)
Printing
108
Printing a Document Secured by a PIN (Secure Print)
0W20-024
By setting a PIN to a document when printing from a computer, the document is held in the memory of the machine,
and is not printed until the correct PIN is entered on the operation panel of the machine. This function is called "Secure
Print," and the document that is protected by a PIN is called a "secured document." Using Secure Print keeps printouts
of condential documents from being left unattended. Before you can use this function, you need to complete some
procedures. Preparing for Using Secure Print(P. 110)
Printing
109
Preparing for Using Secure Print
0W20-025
Make sure that Secure Print is enabled on the printer driver.
●To perform the following procedure, log on to the computer with an administrator account.
1Open the printer folder. Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 474)
2Right-click your printer icon and click [Printer properties] or [Properties].
3Click the [Device Settings] tab and make sure that the [Allow Use of Secured Print]
check box is selected.
●If the check box is selected, Secure Print is enabled.
●If the check box is not selected, select it and click [OK].
Printing
110
Printing via Secure Print
0W20-026
This section describes how to print a document from an application as a secured document. The rst part of this
section describes how to send a secured document to the machine, and the second part of this section describes how
to print the secured document on the machine.
Sending a Secured Document from a Computer to the Machine(P. 112)
Printing Out Secured Documents(P. 114)
Changing the Valid Time Period for Secured Documents(P. 115)
Sending a Secured Document from a Computer to the Machine
1Open a document in an application and display the print dialog box.
●How to display the print dialog box differs for each application. For more information, see the instruction
manual for the application you are using.
2Select your printer, and click [Preferences] or [Properties].
3Select [Secured Print] in [Output Method].
●Click [Yes] or [No] on the [Information] pop-up screen.
●If you want to use the same user name and PIN every time, click [Yes]. To change the user name and PIN
every time, click [No].
Printing
112
If you selected [Yes]
Enter the user name for [User Name] and PIN for [PIN], and click [OK].
●The computer name (logon name) of your computer is displayed in [User Name]. if you want to change the
user name, enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters for a new user name.
●Enter the PIN of up to seven digits.
4Specify the print settings, and click [OK].
●Click the [Basic Settings], [Page Setup], [Finishing], [Paper Source], or [Quality] tabs to specify the print
settings on each screen as necessary. Various Print Settings(P. 80)
5Click [Print] or [OK].
●After the secured document is sent to the machine, it is held in the memory of the machine waiting to be
printed.
Printing
113
If you selected [No] at step 3
Enter the [Document Name], [User Name], and [PIN] and click [OK].
●The document name is automatically set based on the information from the application. If you want to
change the document name, enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters for a new document name.
●The computer name (logon name) of your computer is displayed in [User Name]. If you want to change the
user name, enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters for a new user name.
●Enter the [PIN] of up to seven digits.
Printing Out Secured Documents
After you send the secured document to the machine, print it out within 30 minutes. After that, the secured document
will be deleted from the memory of the machine and can no longer be printed.
●If secured documents are left unprinted, they occupy the memory and may prevent the machine from
printing even ordinary (not secured) documents. Make sure that you print your secured documents as soon
as you can.
●You can check how much memory is being used for secured documents.
<Device Status> <Secure Print Memory Usage>
●You can change the valid time period for secured documents. Changing the Valid Time Period for
Secured Documents(P. 115)
1Press ( ).
2Use / to select the secured document to print, and press .
If the <Select User> screen is displayed
●If secured documents from two or more users are being held in memory, the <Select User> screen is
displayed prior to the <Select File> screen. Select your user name, and press .
Printing
114
3Enter the PIN using numeric keys, and then press .
●Printing starts.
●If you want to cancel printing, press <Cancel> <Yes> .
Changing the Valid Time Period for Secured Documents
The machine at purchase is set to delete secured documents 30 minutes after receiving them unless they are printed,
but you can change this setting.
1Press .
2Use / to select <System Management Settings>, and press .
●If the logon screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN using numeric keys, and then press . Logging
on to the Machine(P. 34)
3Select <Secure Print Settings>, and press .
4Select <On>, and press .
Disabling Secure Print
●Select <Off> and press , and restart the machine.
5Specify how long the machine holds secured documents, and press .
●Use / or the numeric keys to enter the time.
●The secured document is erased from the memory of the machine when the time specied here elapses.
6Restart the machine.
●Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
LINKS
Preparing for Using Secure Print(P. 110)
Printing
115
Conguring Print Settings to Your Needs
0W20-027
You can register combinations of settings as "Proles" to suit your different printing needs. Also, you can register the
settings that you frequently use as the default setting. Once the default setting is set, the registered settings are
automatically displayed on the printer driver screen, and you can skip the operations to specify the print settings and
print immediately.
Specify "TOP SECRET" for a watermark and register it as a
"Prole." Just select this "Prole" when you need it.
Registering Combinations of Frequently Used Print
Settings(P. 118)
Specify [2 on 1] as the user default in the printer driver.
The next and following print jobs will be performed so
that each two pages are shrinked and printed on one
page. Changing Default Settings(P. 120)
Printing
117
Registering Combinations of Frequently Used Print
Settings
0W20-028
Specifying combinations of settings such as "1-sided landscape orientation on A4 size paper" every time you print may
be time consuming. If you register these frequently used combinations of print settings as "proles," you can specify
printing settings simply by selecting one of these proles from the list. This section describes how to register proles
and how to print using them.
Registering a Prole(P. 118)
Selecting a Prole(P. 119)
Registering a Prole
1Change the settings that you want to register as a prole, and click [Add].
●Click the [Basic Settings], [Page Setup], [Finishing], [Paper Source], or [Quality] tabs to specify the print
settings on each screen as necessary. Various Print Settings(P. 80)
2Enter a prole name in [Name], select an icon, and then click [OK].
●Enter comments on the prole in [Comment] as necessary.
●Click [View Settings] to see the settings to register.
Editing a prole
●By clicking [Edit] on the right side of [Add] on the screen shown in step 1, you can change the name, icon, or
comment of the proles you have previously registered. You cannot edit the pre-registered proles.
Printing
118
Selecting a Prole
Select the prole that suits your needs, and click [OK].
Changing the settings of the selected prole
●You can change the settings of a selected prole. In addition, the changed settings can be registered as
another prole.
LINKS
Basic Printing Operations(P. 70)
Changing Default Settings(P. 120)
Printing
119
Changing Default Settings
0W20-029
The default settings are the settings that are rst displayed whenever you open the print settings screen of the printer
driver, but you can change them. For example, if you want to print all documents in such manner that each two pages
are shrinked and printed on one page, specify [2 on 1] as the user default of page layout. From next time on, the
printer driver will be opened with [2 on 1] specied as page layout setting and you will not have to change settings
each time you print.
●To perform the following procedure, log on to your computer with an administrator account.
1Open the printer folder. Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 474)
2Right-click your printer icon and click [Printing preferences].
3Change the settings on the print setting screen, and click [OK].
●Click the [Basic Settings], [Page Setup], [Finishing], [Paper Source], or [Quality] tabs to specify the print
settings on each screen as necessary. Various Print Settings(P. 80)
Printing
120
Can Be Used Conveniently with a
Mobile Device
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device ........................................................................ 123
Connecting to a Mobile Device ......................................................................................................................... 124
Make Direct Connection (Access Point Mode) ............................................................................................... 125
Making the Best Use of the Machine by Utilizing Applications ...................................................................... 127
Managing the Machine Remotely .................................................................................................................... 129
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device
122
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device
0W20-02E
Combining the machine with a mobile device such as a smartphone or tablet enables you to use an appropriate
application to perform printing with ease. You can also use a mobile device to operate the machine remotely, check
the printing status, and change machine's settings.
Connecting to a Mobile Device(P. 124)
Making the Best Use of the Machine by Utilizing Applications(P. 127)
Managing the Machine Remotely(P. 129)
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device
123
Connecting to a Mobile Device
0W20-02F
When connecting the machine to a mobile device, you can select whether to connect by wireless LAN or Direct
Connection. Select the connection method that better suits your environment and devices.
◼Connecting to a Wireless LAN
Like when connecting a computer and the machine, connect a mobile device and the machine via a wireless LAN
router. Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 136)
◼Making Direct Connection
Connect the mobile device and the machine directly without using a wireless LAN router. Even where no wireless LAN
environment is available, you can quickly connect the machine and a mobile device. Make Direct Connection
(Access Point Mode)(P. 125)
●When Direct Connection has been established, you can use neither a wired LAN nor a wireless LAN via router.
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device
124
Make Direct Connection (Access Point Mode)
0W20-02H
Even in an environment without wireless LAN router, you can connect your mobile device and the machine without
going through dicult settings when you use "Access Point Mode," which allows you to wirelessly and directly connect
your mobile device to the machine.
Using the Machine in Direct Connection (in Access Point Mode)
Follow these steps to establish a connection using Access Point Mode.
Put the machine into Access Point Mode.
●Set <Enable Direct Connection> to <On>.
Enable Direct Connection(P. 292)
Put the machine into a connection waiting state.
●Press use / to select <Enable Direct Connection> press . The
machine enters the state in which you can connect your mobile device to the machine.
Connecting from a mobile device
●Based on the SSID and network key displayed in the display, make wireless LAN
connection settings for connecting to the machine.
●The screen below appears in the display during the connection process.
<Disconnect>
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device
125
Stops the Direct Connection procedure. When printing or other desired
operation is complete, select this item to terminate the connection.
<Connection Information>
You can view the information on the Direct Connection being proceeding.
●When the machine is in Direct Connection mode, it is possible that you cannot connect to the Internet
depending on your mobile device.
●Direct Connection is only possible as a one-to-one connection between the machine and a single mobile
device. You cannot connect 2 or more mobile devices to the machine at a time.
●If wireless connection from the mobile device is not performed within 5 minutes while the SSID and network
key are displayed, the connection waiting state terminates.
●If while in communication by Direct Connection, a duration when there is no data transmission between the
machine and the mobile device lasts for some time, the communication may terminate.
●The machine's SSID and network key are changed each time the Direct Connection procedure is started.
●While in Direct Connection, sleep mode is not as effective at saving power.
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device
126
Making the Best Use of the Machine by Utilizing
Applications
0W20-02K
You can use an appropriate application that enables you to print by operating the machine from your mobile device.
The machine supports a dedicated application from Canon and various other applications. You can select the most
appropriate application to your mobile device, the purpose, the situation, and so on.
◼Printing through Canon Mobile Application or a Plug-In
You can perform printing from a mobile device. For compatible operating systems, the detailed setting procedure and
operating procedure, please see the Canon website at: http://www.canon.com/ .
◼Using AirPrint
You can print from an Apple device without the need to download the dedicated application or install the dedicated
driver. Using AirPrint(P. 445)
◼Using Google Cloud Print
You can print from an application or service that supports Google Cloud Print. You can print by remotely operating the
machine at any time and from anywhere, for example even while you are on the go. Using Google Cloud
Print(P. 452)
◼Printing with Mopria™
This machine also supports Mopria™. Using Mopria™ allows you to print with printers of different models from
different manufacturers by using common operations and common settings. For example, assume that Mopria™
compatible printers of different models from different manufacturers are installed in your oce, at your place, or at
places you are visiting. You can then print with any of those printers by using Mopria™ without the need to install the
respective dedicated applications on them. For details about the models supporting Mopria™ and the system
requirements, see http://www.mopria.org .
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device
127
Managing the Machine Remotely
0W20-02L
You can use the Remote UI from a Web browser installed on your mobile device. This allows you to check the
machine's status and specify machine's settings from your mobile device.
Supported Browsers
The browsers compatible with the Remote UI for mobile devices are the following.
For Android OS
●Chrome
For iOS
●Safari
Starting Remote UI with a Mobile Device
Enter the IP address of the machine into the Web browser and start the Remote UI. Check the IP address set to the
machine in advance ( Viewing Network Settings(P. 161) ). If you have any questions, ask your Network
Administrator.
1Start the Web browser on your mobile device.
2Enter "http://(the IP address of the machine)/" in the address eld.
●If you want to use an IPv6 address, enclose the IPv6 address with brackets (example: http://
[fe80::2e9e:fcff:fe4e:dbce]/).
●Some items of the Remote UI are not displayed in its "Smartphone Version." If you want to check all items,
see the "PC Version."
LINKS
Using Remote UI(P. 269)
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device
129
Network
Network .............................................................................................................................................................. 131
Connecting to a Network .................................................................................................................................. 132
Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN ........................................................................................................... 134
Connecting to a Wired LAN ........................................................................................................................... 135
Connecting to a Wireless LAN ....................................................................................................................... 136
Setting Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode ........................................................................... 138
Setting Up Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode ................................................................................ 140
Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router ........................................................................... 143
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings .......................................................................... 146
Checking the SSID and Network Key ...................................................................................................... 150
Setting IP Addresses ..................................................................................................................................... 153
Setting IPv4 Address .............................................................................................................................. 154
Setting IPv6 Addresses .......................................................................................................................... 157
Viewing Network Settings ................................................................................................................................ 161
Conguring the Machine for Printing from a Computer ................................................................................ 164
Conguring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions ...................................................................................... 165
Conguring Printer Ports ............................................................................................................................. 168
Setting Up Print Server ................................................................................................................................. 173
Conguring the Machine for Your Network Environment ............................................................................. 176
Conguring Ethernet Settings ...................................................................................................................... 177
Changing the Maximum Transmission Unit .................................................................................................. 179
Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network ......................................................................................... 180
Conguring DNS .......................................................................................................................................... 181
Conguring WINS ......................................................................................................................................... 186
Conguring SNTP ......................................................................................................................................... 188
Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP .................................................................................... 191
Conguring Settings for Device Management Software ............................................................................... 196
Network
130
Network
0W20-02R
The machine has been designed for exibility of use across a variety of environments, and it includes advanced
technologies in addition to basic network features. Do not worry if you are not a network expert, because the machine
has also been designed for convenience and ease of use. Relax and proceed with the network setup one step at a time.
◼Connecting to a Computer/Viewing the Machine's Network Settings
Connecting to a Network(P. 132) Viewing Network Settings(P. 161)
◼Conguring for Printing
Conguring the Machine for Printing from a Computer(P. 164)
◼Customizing the Machine for More Convenient Network Experience
Conguring the Machine for Your Network Environment(P. 176)
Direct Connection to a mobile device
●You can directly communicate with the machine from your mobile device without the need to congure
dicult network settings. Make Direct Connection (Access Point Mode)(P. 125)
Network
131
Connecting to a Network
0W20-02S
When connecting the machine to a wired or wireless local area network (LAN), you need to set an IP address unique to
the selected network. Select "wired" or "wireless" depending on your communication environment and networking
devices. For specic IP address settings, contact your Internet service provider or Network Administrator.
●If the machine is connected to an unsecured network, your personal information might be leaked to a third
party.
●The machine cannot connect to both wired and wireless LANs at the same time.
●The machine does not come with a LAN cable or router. Have them ready as necessary.
●For more information about your networking devices, see the instruction manuals for the devices or contact
your manufacturer.
◼Before You Start
Follow these steps to connect the machine to a network.
Check your computer settings.
●Make sure that the computer is correctly connected to the network. For more
information, see the instruction manuals for the devices you are using, or contact the
device manufacturers.
●Make sure that the network settings have been completed on the computer. If the
network has not been set up properly, you will not be able to use the machine on the
network, even if you perform the rest of the procedure below.
●Depending on the network, you may need to change settings for the
communication method (half-duplex/full-duplex) or the Ethernet type (10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T) ( Conguring Ethernet Settings(P. 177) ). For more
information, contact your Internet service provider or Network Administrator.
●To check the MAC address of the machine.
Viewing the MAC Address for Wired LAN(P. 162)
Viewing the MAC Address and Information for Wireless LAN(P. 162)
Network
132
●To connect to an IEEE 802.1X network, see Conguring IEEE 802.1X
Authentication(P. 248) .
Select wired or wireless LAN.
Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN(P. 134)
Connect to a wired or wireless LAN.
●Proceed to the section that corresponds to the setting you selected in step 2.
Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 135)
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 136)
Set the IP address as necessary.
●At the time of purchase, the machine is set to automatically acquire an IP address.
Change this setting if you want to use a specic IP address.
Setting IP Addresses(P. 153)
Network
133
Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN
0W20-02U
After you decide on wired or wireless LAN to connect the machine to the computer, select wired LAN or wireless LAN
using the operation panel. Note that if you change the setting from <Wired LAN> to <Wireless LAN> or vice versa, you
will need to uninstall the printer driver installed on your computerand then reinstall it. For more information, see
the Printer Driver Installation Guide.
1Press .
2Use / to select <Network Settings>, and press .
●If the logon screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN using the numeric keys, and then press .
Logging on to the Machine(P. 34)
3Select <Network Settings>, and press .
4Select <Wired LAN> or <Wireless LAN>, and press .
LINKS
Connecting to a Network(P. 132)
Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 135)
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 136)
Network
134
Connecting to a Wired LAN
0W20-02W
Connect the machine to a computer via a router. Use a LAN cable to connect the machine to the router.
1Connect a LAN cable.
●Connect the machine to a router by using a LAN cable.
●Push the connector in until it clicks into place.
2Wait approximately 2 minutes.
●While you wait, the IP address is set automatically.
●You can set the IP address manually. Setting IP Addresses(P. 153)
LINKS
Connecting to a Network(P. 132)
Network
135
Connecting to a Wireless LAN
0W20-02X
Wireless routers (or access points) connect the machine to a computer via radio waves. If your wireless router is
equipped with Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS), conguring your network is automatic and easy. If your networking
devices do not support automatic conguration, or if you want to specify authentication and encryption settings in
detail, you need to manually set up the connection. Make sure that your computer is correctly connected to the
network.
Setting Up Connection Using WPS(P. 136)
Manually Setting Up Connection(P. 137)
Risk of information leak
●Use wireless LAN connection at your own discretion and at your own risk. If the machine is connected to an
unsecured network, your personal information might be leaked to a third party because radio waves used in
wireless communication can go anywhere nearby, even beyond walls.
Wireless LAN security
The wireless LAN security that is supported by the machine is listed below. For the wireless security
compatibility of your wireless router, see the instruction manuals for your networking devices or contact your
manufacturer.
●128 (104)/64 (40) bit WEP
●WPA-PSK (TKIP/AES-CCMP)
●WPA2-PSK (TKIP/AES-CCMP)
Required devices for wireless LAN connection
●The machine does not come with a wireless router. Have the router ready as necessary.
●The wireless router must conform to IEEE 802.11b/g/n and be able to communicate in 2.4 GHz frequency
band. For more information, see the instruction manuals for your networking devices or contact your
manufacturer.
Setting Up Connection Using WPS
When using WPS, two modes are available: push button mode and PIN code mode.
Network
136
◼Push Button Mode
Find the WPS mark shown below on the package of your wireless router. Also make sure that there is a WPS button on
your networking device. Setting Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode(P. 138)
◼PIN Code Mode
Some WPS routers do not support the push button mode. If WPS PIN code mode is mentioned on the package or in
the instruction manuals of your networking device, set up the connection by entering the PIN code. Setting Up
Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode(P. 140)
●If the wireless router is set to use WEP authentication, you may not be able to set up connection using WPS.
Manually Setting Up Connection
When manually setting up a wireless connection, you can either select a wireless router or manually enter the required
information. Regardless of the method, make sure that you have the required setup information, including the SSID
and network key ( Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 150) ).
◼Selecting a Wireless Router
Select this setup option if you need to manually set up the connection but want to complete the setup as easily as
possible. Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 143)
◼Manually Entering the Setup Information
If you want to specify security settings in detail, such as authentication and encryption settings, manually enter the
SSID and network key to set up the connection. Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 146)
LINKS
Connecting to a Network(P. 132)
Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN(P. 134)
Network
137
Setting Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode
0W20-02Y
If your wireless router supports WPS push button mode, you can easily set up a connection with a WPS button.
●How to operate the wireless router may vary on each device. See the instruction manuals for your
networking device for help.
1Press .
2Use / to select <Network Settings>, and press .
●If the logon screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN using the numeric keys, and then press .
Logging on to the Machine(P. 34)
3Select <Wireless LAN Settings>, and press .
●If the <Do you want to enable the wireless LAN?> message is displayed, select <Yes>, and press .
4Read the message that is displayed, and press .
5Select <WPS Push Button Mode>, and press .
6Select <Yes>, and press .
➠A PIN code is generated.
7Press and hold the WPS button on the wireless router.
The button must be pressed within 2 minutes after performing step 6.
●Depending on the networking device, you may need to press and hold the button for 2 seconds or longer.
See the instruction manuals for your networking device for help.
Network
138
If an error message is displayed during setup
●Press and return to step 5.
8Check that the Wi-Fi indicator is blinking on the operation panel.
●The Wi-Fi indicator blinks when a wireless router is detected.
●When the setup is completed, the screen below is displayed, and approximately 2 seconds later, the Wi-Fi
indicator lights up.
●Wait approximately 2 minutes until the IP address settings of the machine are completed.
Signal strength
●When more than one wireless router is available for connection, the machine connects to the device with
the strongest signal. Signal strength is measured using RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication).
Reducing power consumption
●You can set the machine to enter <Power Save Mode> based on signals emitted from the wireless router.
Power Save Mode (P. 291)
If the IP address of the machine has changed
●In a DHCP environment, the IP address of the machine may be changed automatically. If this happens, the
connection is maintained as long as the machine and the computer belong to the same subnet.
LINKS
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 136)
Network
139
Setting Up Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode
0W20-030
If your wireless router supports WPS PIN code mode, generate a PIN code with the machine and register the code to
the networking device.
●How to operate the wireless router may vary on each device. See the instruction manuals for your
networking device for help.
From a Computer
1Access your wireless router from a computer and display the screen for entering a
WPS PIN code.
●For more information, see the instruction manuals for your networking device.
From the Operation Panel
2Press .
3Use / to select <Network Settings>, and press .
●If the logon screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN using the numeric keys, and then press .
Logging on to the Machine(P. 34)
4Select <Wireless LAN Settings>, and press .
●If the <Do you want to enable the wireless LAN?> message is displayed, select <Yes>, and press .
5Read the message that is displayed, and press .
6Select <WPS PIN Code Mode>, and press .
7Select <Yes>, and press .
➠A PIN code is generated.
Network
140
From a Computer
8Register the generated PIN code to the wireless router.
●Register the PIN code on the setup screen displayed in step 1.
●The PIN code must be registered within 10 minutes after pressing with <Yes> selected in step 7.
If an error message is displayed during setup
●Press and return to step 6.
From the Operation Panel
9Check that the Wi-Fi indicator is blinking on the operation panel.
●The Wi-Fi indicator blinks when a wireless router is detected.
●When the setup is completed, the screen below is displayed, and approximately 2 seconds later, the Wi-Fi
indicator lights up.
●Wait approximately 2 minutes until the IP address settings of the machine are completed.
Signal strength
●When more than one wireless router is available for connection, the machine connects to the device with
the strongest signal. Signal strength is measured using RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication).
Reducing power consumption
●You can set the machine to enter <Power Save Mode> based on signals emitted from the wireless router.
Power Save Mode (P. 291)
Network
141
Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router
0W20-031
You can search the wireless routers (or access points) available for connection and select one from the display of the
machine. For the network key, enter a WEP key or PSK. Before selecting a wireless router, check and write down the
required setup information, including the SSID and network key ( Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 150) ).
Security settings
●If the wireless connection is set up by selecting a wireless router, the WEP authentication method is set to
<Open System> or the WPA/WPA2 encryption method is set to <Auto> (AES-CCMP or TKIP). If you want to
select <Shared Key> for WEP authentication or <AES-CCMP> for WPA/WPA2 encryption, you need to set up
the connection using the manual entry method ( Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed
Settings(P. 146) ).
1Press .
2Use / to select <Network Settings>, and press .
●If the logon screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN using the numeric keys, and then press .
Logging on to the Machine(P. 34)
3Select <Wireless LAN Settings>, and press .
●If the <Do you want to enable the wireless LAN?> message is displayed, select <Yes>, and press .
4Read the message that is displayed, and press .
5Select <SSID Settings>, and press .
6Select <Select Access Point>, and press .
●The machine starts searching for available wireless routers.
If <Cannot nd the access point.> is displayed
Network
143
●See When an Error Message Appears(P. 357) .
7Select a wireless LAN router, and press .
●Select the router whose SSID matches the one that you have written down.
If your wireless router is not found
●Check whether the machine is properly installed and ready to connect to the network. Installation/
Settings Problems(P. 369)
8Enter the network key that you have written down.
●Enter the network key using the numeric keys, select <Apply>, and press .
Entering Text(P. 32)
WEP WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK
9Select <Yes>, and press .
If an error message is displayed during setup
●Press , check whether the network key is correct, and return to step 5.
10 Check that the Wi-Fi indicator is blinking on the operation panel.
●The Wi-Fi indicator blinks when a wireless router is detected.
●When the setup is completed, the screen below is displayed, and approximately 2 seconds later, the Wi-Fi
indicator lights up.
Network
144
●Wait approximately 2 minutes until the IP address settings of the machine are completed.
Signal strength
●When more than one wireless router is available for connection, the machine connects to the device with
the strongest signal. Signal strength is measured using RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication).
Reducing power consumption
●You can set the machine to enter <Power Save Mode> based on signals emitted from the wireless router.
Power Save Mode (P. 291)
If the IP address of the machine has changed
●In a DHCP environment, the IP address of the machine may be changed automatically. If this happens, the
connection is maintained as long as the machine and the computer belong to the same subnet.
LINKS
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 136)
Network
145
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings
0W20-032
If you want to specify the security settings in detail or cannot establish the wireless connection using the other
procedures, manually enter all the required information for the wireless LAN connection. Before specifying detailed
settings, check and write down the required information, including the SSID, network key, and wireless security
protocols ( Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 150) ).
1Press .
2Use / to select <Network Settings>, and press .
●If the logon screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN using the numeric keys, and then press .
Logging on to the Machine(P. 34)
3Select <Wireless LAN Settings>, and press .
●If the <Do you want to enable the wireless LAN?> message is displayed, select <Yes>, and press .
4Read the message that is displayed, and press .
5Select <SSID Settings> <Enter Manually>.
6Enter the SSID that you have written down.
●Enter the SSID using the numeric keys, select <Apply>, and press . Entering Text(P. 32)
7Specify the security settings based on the information that you have written down.
●If you do not need to specify the security settings, select <None>, and press .
Using WEP
1Select <WEP>, and press .
2Select an authentication method, and press .
Network
146
<Open System>
Sets open system authentication, which is also called "open authentication."
<Shared Key>
Uses the WEP key as a password.
When <Open System> is selected
●When connecting to a wireless LAN, the machine experiences an authentication error if the shared key
authentication is set on the wireless router. If this happens, the machine automatically changes the
setting to <Shared Key> and retries the connection.
3Select <Edit WEP Key>, and press .
4Select the WEP key (1 to 4) you want to edit, and press .
●Up to four WEP keys can be registered.
5Enter the network key that you have written down.
●Enter the network key using the numeric keys, select <Apply>, and press . Entering Text(P. 32)
6Select <Select WEP Key>, and press .
7Select the WEP key you have edited, and press .
Using WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK
1Select <WPA/WPA2-PSK>, and press .
2Select an encryption method, and press .
<Auto>
Network
147
Sets the machine to automatically select AES-CCMP or TKIP to match the setting of the wireless router.
<AES-CCMP>
Sets AES-CCMP as the encryption method.
3Enter the network key that you have written down.
●Enter the network key using the numeric keys, select <Apply>, and press . Entering Text(P. 32)
8Select <Yes>, and press .
If an error message is displayed during setup
●Press , check whether the specied settings are correct, and return to step 5.
9Check that the Wi-Fi indicator is blinking on the operation panel.
●The Wi-Fi indicator blinks when a wireless router is detected.
●When the setup is completed, the screen below is displayed, and approximately 2 seconds later, the Wi-Fi
indicator lights up.
●Wait approximately 2 minutes until the IP address settings of the machine are completed.
Signal strength
●When more than one wireless router is available for connection, the machine connects to the device with
the strongest signal. Signal strength is measured using RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication).
Network
148
Reducing power consumption
●You can set the machine to enter <Power Save Mode> based on signals emitted from the wireless router.
Power Save Mode (P. 291)
If the IP address of the machine has changed
●In a DHCP environment, the IP address of the machine may be changed automatically. If this happens, the
connection is maintained as long as the machine and the computer belong to the same subnet.
LINKS
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 136)
Network
149
Checking the SSID and Network Key
0W20-033
When manually setting up a wireless connection, you need to specify the SSID and network key of your wireless router.
The SSID and network key may be indicated on these networking devices. Check your devices and write down the
necessary information before setting up the connection. For more information, see the instruction manuals for your
networking devices or contact your manufacturer.
SSID A name given for identifying a specic wireless LAN. Some other terms used for SSID include
"access point name" and "network name."
Network Key
A keyword or password used for encrypting data or authenticating a network. Some other
terms used for network key include "encryption key," "WEP key," "WPA/WPA2 passphrase,"
and "preshared key (PSK)."
Wireless Security
Protocols
(Authentication/
Encryption)
When manually setting up a wireless connection by specifying detailed settings, you need to
specify security settings. Check the following information:
●Security types (WEP/WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK)
●Authentication method (Open System/Shared Key)
●Encryption method (TKIP/AES-CCMP)
◼Checking the SSID and Network Key from a Computer
The SSID or the network key may have been changed. If you do not know the SSID or the network key, you can check
them by using the Canon MF/LBP Wireless Setup Assistant included with the provided DVD-ROM. The Canon MF/LBP
Wireless Setup Assistant can be used on a computer connected to a wireless LAN.
If you are a Mac OS user
●The provided DVD-ROM that comes with the machine does not contain the Canon MF/LBP Wireless Setup
Assistant for Macintosh. It is available from the following Canon Web site: http://www.canon.com/
1Insert the provided DVD-ROM into the drive on the computer.
●Select a language and click [OK] if you are prompted to do so.
2Click [Start Software Programs].
Network
150
5Check the information displayed for the wireless router.
●Write down the necessary information. If you do not know what information is necessary, write down all the
information that is displayed.
If wireless routers are not found
●Click [Refresh]. If nothing happens, check that the settings are correctly congured on the computer and
the wireless router.
LINKS
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 136)
Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 143)
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 146)
Network
152
Setting IP Addresses
0W20-034
Connecting the machine to a network requires a unique network IP address. Two versions of IP addresses are
available: IPv4 and IPv6. Congure these settings depending on the network environment. To use IPv6 addresses, you
need to properly congure the IPv4 address settings.
Network
153
Setting IPv4 Address
0W20-035
The machine's IPv4 address can be either assigned automatically by a dynamic IP
addressing protocol, such as DHCP, or entered manually. When connecting the
machine to a wired LAN, make sure that the connectors of the LAN cable are rmly
inserted into the ports ( Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 135) ). You can test the
network connection if necessary.
Setting IPv4 Address(P. 154)
Testing the Network Connection(P. 156)
Setting IPv4 Address
1Press .
2Use / to select <Network Settings>, and press .
●If the logon screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN using the numeric keys, and then press .
Logging on to the Machine(P. 34)
3Select <TCP/IP Settings> <IPv4 Settings> <IP Address Settings>.
4Congure IP address settings.
<Auto Acquire>
Select to automatically assign an IP address via DHCP protocol. When <Auto Acquire: On> is displayed,
automatic addressing is enabled.
<Manually Acquire>
Select to congure the IP address settings by manually entering an IP address. In order to select this
option, <Auto Acquire> must be set to <Off>.
<Check Settings>
Select when you want to view the current IP address settings.
Automatically assigning an IP address
1Select <Auto Acquire> <Select Protocol>.
Network
154
2Select <DHCP>, and press .
If you do not want to use DHCP/BOOTP/RARP to assign an IP address
●Select <Off>, and press . If you select <DHCP> and press when these services are unavailable,
the machine will waste time and communications resources searching the network for these services.
3Check that <Auto IP> is set to <On>.
●If <Off> is selected, change the setting to <On>.
4Select <Apply>, and press .
●IP addresses assigned via DHCP override the address obtained via Auto IP.
Manually entering an IP address
1Check that <Auto Acquire> is set to <Off>.
●If <On> is displayed, select <Auto Acquire>, press , and set both <Select Protocol> and <Auto IP> to
<Off>.
2Select <Manually Acquire>, and press .
3Specify the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address (or default gateway).
●Specify the settings in the following order: <IP Address> <Subnet Mask> <Gateway Address>.
●Enter each setting using the numeric keys, and press .
5Restart the machine.
●Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
Checking whether the settings are correct
●Make sure that the Remote UI screen can be displayed with your computer ( Starting Remote UI(P. 270) ).
If a computer is not available, you can check the connection by using the operation panel ( Testing the
Network Connection(P. 156) ).
Network
155
If you changed the IP address after installing the printer driver
●If you are using an MFNP port, and the machine and the computer are on the same subnet, then the
connection will be maintained. You do not need to add a new port. If you are using a standard TCP/IP port,
then you need to add a new port. Conguring Printer Ports(P. 168)
* If you are not sure which type of port you are using, see Checking the Printer Port(P. 478) .
Testing the Network Connection
1Press .
2Use / to select <Network Settings>, and press .
●If the logon screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN using the numeric keys, and then press .
Logging on to the Machine(P. 34)
3Select <TCP/IP Settings> <IPv4 Settings> <PING Command>.
4Enter the IPv4 address of another device on the network, and press .
●If a proper connection has been established, the result is displayed as shown above.
LINKS
Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 157)
Viewing Network Settings(P. 161)
Conguring WINS(P. 186)
Network
156
Setting IPv6 Addresses
0W20-036
The IPv6 addresses of the machine can be congured via the Remote UI. Before
setting IPv6 addresses, check the IPv4 address settings ( Viewing IPv4
Settings(P. 161) ). You need to set the correct IPv4 settings to use IPv6 addresses.
The machine can use up to nine of the following IPv6 addresses:
Type Maximum
number
available
Description
Link-local address 1 An address that is only valid within a subnet or link and cannot be used to
communicate with devices beyond a router. A link-local address is automatically set
when the IPv6 function of the machine is enabled.
Manual address 1 An address that is entered manually. When using this address, specify the prex
length and default router address.
Stateless address 6 An address that is generated automatically using the MAC address of the machine
and the network prex that is advertised by the router. Stateless addresses are
discarded when the machine is restarted (or turned ON).
Stateful address 1 An address obtained from a DHCP server using DHCPv6.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote
UI(P. 270)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Network Settings] [TCP/IP Settings].
Network
157
4Click [Edit] in [IPv6 Settings].
5Select the [Use IPv6] check box and congure the required settings.
Network
158
[Use IPv6]
Select the check box to enable IPv6 on the machine. When not using IPv6, clear the check box.
[Use Stateless Address]
Select the check box when using a stateless address. When not using a stateless address, clear the check box.
[Use Manual Address]
When you want to manually enter an IPv6 address, select the check box and enter the IP address, prex
length, and default router address in the corresponding text boxes.
[IP Address]
Enter an IPv6 address. Addresses that start with "ff" (or multicast address) cannot be entered.
[Prex Length]
Enter a number that indicates how many bits are available for the network address.
[Default Router Address]
Specify the IPv6 address of the default router as necessary. Addresses that start with "ff" (or multicast
address) cannot be entered.
[Use DHCPv6]
Select the check box when using a stateful address. When not using DHCPv6, clear the check box.
6Click [OK].
Network
159
7Restart the machine.
●Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
Checking whether the settings are correct
●Make sure that the Remote UI screen can be displayed with your computer by using the IPv6 address of the
machine. Starting Remote UI(P. 270)
Selecting settings from the operation panel
●IPv6 settings can also be accessed by pressing on the operation panel. IPv6 Settings(P. 294)
If you changed the IP address after installing the printer driver
●You need to add a new port. Conguring Printer Ports(P. 168)
LINKS
Setting IPv4 Address(P. 154)
Viewing Network Settings(P. 161)
Network
160
Viewing Network Settings
0W20-037
Viewing IPv4 Settings(P. 161)
Viewing IPv6 Settings(P. 161)
Viewing the MAC Address for Wired LAN(P. 162)
Viewing the MAC Address and Information for Wireless LAN(P. 162)
●The IP address is not correctly congured if it is displayed as "0.0.0.0".
●Connecting the machine to a switching hub or bridge may result in a connection failure even when the IP
address is correctly congured. This problem can be solved by setting a certain interval before the machine
starts communicating. Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network(P. 180)
●You can print a list of the current network settings. User Data List/System Manager Data List(P. 411)
Viewing IPv4 Settings
<Network Information> <IPv4> Select the setting to view Check
the settings
Viewing IPv6 Settings
<Network Information> <IPv6> Select the setting to view Check
the settings
Network
161
Viewing the MAC Address for Wired LAN
1Press .
2Use / to select <Network Settings>, and press .
●If the logon screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN using the numeric keys, and then press .
Logging on to the Machine(P. 34)
3Select <Ethernet Driver Settings>, and press .
Viewing the MAC Address and Information for Wireless LAN
1Press .
2Use / to select <Network Settings>, and press .
●If the logon screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN using the numeric keys, and then press .
Logging on to the Machine(P. 34)
3Select <Wireless LAN Settings>, and press .
●If the <Do you want to enable the wireless LAN?> message is displayed, select <Yes> and press .
4Read the message that is displayed, and press .
5Select <Connection Information>, and press .
6Select the setting to view, and press .
Network
162
Viewing WEP and WPA/WPA2-PSK information
1Select <Security Settings>, and press .
2Conrm the current security setting, and press .
●If the security settings are not congured, <None> is displayed.
3Select the setting to view, and press .
WEP WPA/WPA2-PSK
●<Wireless LAN Status> and <Latest Error Information> can be viewed from . Press <Network
Information> <Network Connection Method> <Connect. Info.> and select the setting to view.
LINKS
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 136)
Setting IPv4 Address(P. 154)
Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 157)
Conguring DNS(P. 181)
Network
163
Conguring the Machine for Printing from a Computer
0W20-039
When using the machine as a network printer, you can congure the protocols and ports used for printing and create
a print server for the machine. Before conguring the machine for printing from a computer, perform the basic setup
procedures, including the printer driver installation.For more information, see the Printer Driver Installation Guide.
●Printing protocols are rules for delivering document data created on a computer to the machine, and can be
selected according to the printing purpose or the network environment.
●Ports are gateways for passing document data from a computer to the printer. Incorrect port settings are
often the cause when documents cannot be printed from a network computer.
Network
164
Conguring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions
0W20-03A
Congure the protocols that are used for printing documents from a networked computer. The protocols supported
by the machine include LPD, RAW, and WSD (Web Services on Devices).
●To change protocols' port numbers, see Changing Port Numbers(P. 226) .
1Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote
UI(P. 270)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Network Settings] [TCP/IP Settings].
4Congure printing protocols.
Network
165
Conguring LPD or RAW
1Click [Edit] in [LPD Settings] or [RAW Settings].
2Congure the settings as necessary.
[Use LPD Printing]
Select the check box to print via LPD. When not using LPD printing, clear the check box.
[Use RAW Printing]
Select the check box to print via RAW. When not using RAW printing, clear the check box.
[RX Timeout]
Set a value between 1 and 60 (minutes) as the restart wait time for data reception. If data reception does
not resume within the set time, printing is canceled.
3Click [OK].
Conguring WSD
1Click [Edit] in [WSD Settings].
Network
166
2Congure the settings as necessary.
[Use WSD Printing]
Select the check box to print via WSD. When not using WSD printing, clear the check box.
[Use WSD Browsing]
Select the check box to obtain information about the machine from a computer via WSD. This check box is
automatically selected when the [Use WSD Printing] check box is selected.
[Use Multicast Discovery]
Select the check box to set the machine to reply to multicast discovery messages. If the check box is
cleared, the machine stays in sleep mode even when multicast discovery messages are owing on the
network.
3Click [OK].
5Restart the machine.
●Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
Selecting settings from the operation panel
●LPD, RAW, and WSD settings can also be accessed by pressing on the operation panel.
LPD Settings(P. 295)
RAW Settings(P. 296)
WSD Settings(P. 296)
Setting up WSD network devices on Windows Vista/7/8
●The WSD printer can be added from the printer folder. Open the printer folder ( Displaying the Printer
Folder(P. 474) ) click [Add a device] or [Add a printer] and follow the on-screen instructions. For more
information about how to install the printer driver for the WSD network printer, see Printer Driver
Installation Guide.
LINKS
Conguring Printer Ports(P. 168)
Network
167
Conguring Printer Ports
0W20-03C
Printing errors can occur when the IP address of the machine has been changed, or when a printer has been added via
the Windows printer folder. These errors are typically caused by incorrect printer port settings. For example, an
incorrect port number or port type may have been specied. In such situations, your attempt to print fails because the
document data cannot reach the machine. To x this type of problem, congure the printer port settings on the
computer.
●To perform the following procedure, log on to your computer with an administrator account.
1Open the printer folder. Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 474)
2Right-click your printer icon and click [Printer properties] or [Properties].
3Click the [Ports] tab and congure the required settings.
Network
168
Adding a port
When an incorrect port was selected while installing a printer driver from the Windows printer folder, add a
new port. There are two types of port: "MFNP Port" and "Standard TCP/IP Port." Select the port type
according to your environment.
MFNP Port
(only for IPv4 environment)
This is a port that allows the IP address of the machine to be detected automatically.
Even if the IP address of the machine is changed, the connection is maintained,
provided that the machine and the computer are in the same subnet. You do not need
to add a new port every time the IP address is changed. If you are using the machine
in an IPv4 environment, you should normally select this type of port.
You can add an MFNP port only when you installed the printer driver from the
provided DVD-ROM, or when you downloaded and installed the printer driver from the
Canon website.
Standard TCP/IP Port This is a standard Windows port. When you use this type of port, you need to add a
new port every time that the IP address of the machine is changed. Select this type of
port when you are using the machine in an IPv6 environment and when you cannot
add an MFNP port.
Adding an MFNP port
1Click [Add Port].
2Select [Canon MFNP Port] in [Available port types] and click [New Port].
3Select [Auto Detect] and select the machine when it is detected, and then click [Next].
If the machine is not detected
Click [Refresh]. If the problem persists, select [IP address] or [MAC address], enter the IP address or MAC
address of the machine ( Viewing Network Settings(P. 161) ) and then click [Next].
Network
169
4Click [Add] [Finish].
5Click [Close].
Adding a standard TCP/IP port
1Click [Add Port].
2Select [Standard TCP/IP Port] in [Available port types] and click [New Port].
3Click [Next].
4Enter the IP address or the DNS name of the machine, and click [Next].
●The [Port Name] is entered automatically. If necessary, you can change it.
When the next screen is displayed, follow the instructions on the screen.
Network
170
* When you select the [Device Type], select [Canon Network Printing Device with P9100] under [Standard].
5Click [Finish].
6Click [Close].
Changing the port type or number
If the printing protocol (LPD or RAW) has been changed on the machine side ( Conguring Printing
Protocols and WSD Functions(P. 165) ) or the port number has been changed ( Changing Port
Numbers(P. 226) ), the corresponding settings on the computer must also be congured. This operation is
not needed for WSD ports.
MFNP port
1Click [Congure Port].
2Under [Protocol Type], select [RAW] or [LPR], and change the [Port Number].
3Click [OK].
Standard TCP/IP port
1Click [Congure Port].
2Under [Protocol], select [Raw] or [LPR].
●If you selected [Raw], change the [Port Number].
●If you selected [LPR], enter "lp" in [Queue Name].
Network
171
Setting Up Print Server
0W20-03E
With a print server, you can reduce the load on the computer that you print from. The print server also enables each
computer to install printer drivers over the network, which saves you the trouble of installing the drivers on each
computer by using the DVD-ROM. To set up a computer on the network as a print server, congure the settings for
sharing the printer.
●To perform the following procedure, log on to your computer with an administrator account.
●You may be unable to install drivers over the network depending on the operating system and the bit
architecture (32-bit or 64-bit) of the print server and client computers.
●When implementing a print server in a domain environment, consult your Network Administrator.
To carry out Department ID Management when using a print server
●Canon Driver Information Assist Service must be added during the printer driver installation. For more
information, see the Printer Driver Installation Guide.
1Open the printer folder. Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 474)
2Right-click your printer icon and click [Printer properties] or [Properties].
3Click the [Sharing] tab, select [Share this printer], and enter the share name of the
machine.
Network
173
When [Change Sharing Options] is displayed
●Click [Change Sharing Options].
4Install additional drivers as necessary.
●This operation is required if you want to install printer drivers in other computers running a different bit
architecture via the print server.
1Click [Additional Drivers].
2Select the check box for the bit architecture that other computers are running, and click [OK].
●Select additional drivers from the following, according to the operating system of the print server.
Print server Select the check box for
32-bit operating systems [x64]
64-bit operating systems
●Windows Server 2003
[Windows 2000, Windows XP and Windows Server 2003] under [Version]
●Windows Vista/7/8/Server 2008/Server 2012
Network
174
[x86] under [Processor]
●If you do not know whether your Windows Vista/7/8/Server 2008/Server 2012 is a 32-bit or 64-bit
operating system, see Checking the Bit Architecture(P. 477) .
3Insert the provided DVD-ROM into the drive on the computer, click [Browse] to specify the folder that
contains printer drivers, and then click [OK].
●If the print server runs a 32-bit operating system, select [DRIVERS] [x64] [Driver] folders on the
provided DVD-ROM.
●If the print server runs a 64-bit operating system, select [DRIVERS] [32bit] [Driver] folders on the
provided DVD-ROM.
4Follow the on-screen instructions to install the additional drivers.
5Click [OK].
◼Installing Printer Drivers on a Computer via the Print Server
1Locate the shared printer in the print server. Displaying Shared Printers in the
Print Server(P. 475)
2Double-click the shared printer.
3Follow the on-screen instructions to install the printer drivers.
LINKS
Printing(P. 68)
Network
175
Conguring the Machine for Your Network
Environment
0W20-03F
The conguration of a network varies depending on the purpose of the network. The machine has been designed to
be compatible with as many network congurations as possible, and it is equipped with a variety of technologies.
Consult your Network Administrator and set a conguration to suit your network environment.
Network
176
Conguring Ethernet Settings
0W20-03H
Ethernet is a standard for communicating data in a local area network (LAN). You can set
the communication mode (half-duplex/full-duplex) and the Ethernet type (10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T). In general, the machine can be used without changing the
defaults ( Ethernet Driver Settings(P. 299) ), but you can change these settings to suit
your network environment.
1Press .
2Use / to select <Network Settings>, and press .
●If the logon screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN using the numeric keys, and then press .
Logging on to the Machine(P. 34)
3Select <Ethernet Driver Settings> <Auto Detect>.
4Select whether to congure Ethernet settings automatically or manually.
Conguring Ethernet settings automatically
Select <On> and press . The machine detects and automatically sets the communication mode and the
Ethernet type that can be used.
Conguring Ethernet settings manually
1Select <Off>, and press .
2Select the communication mode.
●Select <Communication Mode> Select <Half Duplex> or <Full Duplex>
<Half Duplex>
Alternately sends and receives communication data. Select when the machine is connected to a
networking device using half duplex.
<Full Duplex>
Simultaneously sends and receives communication data. Use this setting for most environments.
Network
177
3Select the Ethernet type.
●Select <Ethernet Type> Select the Ethernet type
●When <Communication Mode> is set to <Half Duplex>, you cannot select <1000BASE-T>.
4Select <Apply>, and press .
5Restart the machine.
●Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
LINKS
Changing the Maximum Transmission Unit(P. 179)
Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network(P. 180)
Network
178
Changing the Maximum Transmission Unit
0W20-03J
In most Ethernet networks, the maximum size of a packet that can be sent is 1500 bytes. A packet refers to a chunk of
data into which the original data is divided before being sent. The maximum transmission unit (MTU) may vary on each
network. Change the settings of the machine as necessary. For more information, contact your Network Administrator.
1Press .
2Use / to select <Network Settings>, and press .
●If the logon screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN using the numeric keys, and then press .
Logging on to the Machine(P. 34)
3Select <TCP/IP Settings> <MTU Size>.
4Select the MTU, and press .
5Restart the machine.
●Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
LINKS
Conguring Ethernet Settings(P. 177)
Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network(P. 180)
Network
179
Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network
0W20-03K
When a network is designed to enjoy redundant connectivity with multiple switching hubs or bridges, it must have a
mechanism to prevent packets from looping. One effective solution is to dene the role of each switch port. However,
communication may still be disrupted for several tens of seconds immediately after you change the way that network
devices are connected, or if you add a new device. If this type of problem occurs, set a wait time for connecting to the
network.
1Press .
2Use / to select <Network Settings>, and press .
●If the logon screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN using the numeric keys, and then press .
Logging on to the Machine(P. 34)
3Select <Waiting Time for Connection at Startup>, and press .
4Enter the wait time in seconds, select <Apply>, and press .
●Use / or the numeric keys to enter the time.
LINKS
Conguring Ethernet Settings(P. 177)
Changing the Maximum Transmission Unit(P. 179)
Network
180
Conguring DNS
0W20-03L
DNS (Domain Name System) provides a service for name resolution that associates a host (or domain) name with an IP
address. Congure the DNS, mDNS, or DHCP option settings as necessary. Note that the procedures for conguring
DNS are different for IPv4 and IPv6.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote
UI(P. 270)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Network Settings] [TCP/IP Settings].
4Congure DNS settings.
Network
181
Conguring IPv4 DNS
1Click [Edit] in [IPv4 Settings].
2Congure IPv4 DNS settings.
[DNS Settings]
[Primary DNS Server Address]
Enter the IP address of a DNS server.
[Secondary DNS Server Address]
Enter the IP address of a secondary DNS server, if any.
[Host Name]
Enter up to 47 alphanumeric characters for the host name of the machine that is to be registered to
the DNS server.
[Domain Name]
Enter up to 47 alphanumeric characters for the name of the domain the machine belongs to, such
as "example.com."
[DNS Dynamic Update]
Select the check box to dynamically update the DNS records whenever the machine's IP address is
changed. When specifying the interval between updates, enter the time in hours in the [DNS
Dynamic Update Interval] text box.
Network
182
[mDNS Settings]
[Use mDNS]
Adopted by Bonjour, mDNS (multicast DNS) is a protocol for associating a host name with an IP
address without using DNS. Select the check box to enable mDNS and enter the mDNS name in the
[mDNS Name] text box.
[DHCP Option Settings]
[Acquire Host Name]
Select the check box to enable Option 12 to obtain the host name from the DHCP server.
[DNS Dynamic Update]
Select the check box to enable Option 81 to dynamically update the DNS records through the DHCP
server.
[Acquire DNS Server Address]
Select the check box to enable Option 6 to obtain a DNS server address from the DHCP server.
[Acquire Domain Name]
Select the check box to enable Option 15 to obtain a domain name from the DHCP server.
[Acquire WINS Server Address]
Select the check box to enable Option 44 to obtain a WINS server address from the DHCP server.
3Click [OK].
Conguring IPv6 DNS
1Click [Edit] in [IPv6 Settings].
2Congure IPv6 DNS settings.
Network
183
●The [Use IPv6] check box must be selected to congure the settings. Setting IPv6
Addresses(P. 157)
[DNS Settings]
[Primary DNS Server Address]
Enter the IP address of a DNS server. Addresses that start with "ff" (or multicast address) cannot be
entered.
[Secondary DNS Server Address]
Enter the IP address of a secondary DNS server, if any. Addresses that start with "ff" (or multicast
address) cannot be entered.
[Use Same Host Name/Domain Name as IPv4]
Select the check box to use the same host and domain names as in IPv4.
[Host Name]
Enter up to 47 alphanumeric characters for the host name of the machine that is to be registered to
the DNS server.
[Domain Name]
Enter up to 47 alphanumeric characters for the name of the domain the machine belongs to, such
as "example.com."
[DNS Dynamic Update]
Select the check box to dynamically update the DNS records whenever the machine's IP address is
changed. To specify the type(s) of addresses you want to register to the DNS server, select the
check box for [Register Manual Address], [Register Stateful Address], or [Register Stateless
Address]. To specify the interval between updates, enter the time in hours in the [DNS Dynamic
Update Interval] text box.
[mDNS Settings]
[Use mDNS]
Adopted by Bonjour, mDNS (multicast DNS) is a protocol for associating a host name with an IP
address without using DNS. Select the check box to enable mDNS.
[Use Same mDNS Name as IPv4]
Select the check box to use the same mDNS name as in IPv4. To set a different name, clear the
check box and enter the mDNS name in the [mDNS Name] text box.
Network
184
[DHCP Option Settings]
[Acquire DNS Server Address]
Select the check box to enable Option 23 to obtain a DNS server address from the DHCP server.
[Acquire Domain Name]
Select the check box to enable Option 24 to obtain a domain name from the DHCP server.
3Click [OK].
5Restart the machine.
●Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
Selecting settings from the operation panel
●DNS settings can also be accessed by pressing on the operation panel. IPv4 Settings(P. 292) IPv6
Settings(P. 294)
LINKS
Setting IPv4 Address(P. 154)
Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 157)
Viewing Network Settings(P. 161)
Network
185
Conguring WINS
0W20-03R
Windows Internet Name Service (WINS) is a name resolution service that associates a NetBIOS name (a computer or
printer name in an SMB network) with an IP address. To enable WINS, the WINS server must be specied.
●The function is not available in an IPv6 network.
●The machine's NetBIOS name will be registered to the WINS server as "letters Canon followed by the last six
digits of the MAC address," and its work group name, as "WORKGROUP."
1Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote
UI(P. 270)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Network Settings] [TCP/IP Settings].
Network
186
4Click [Edit] in [WINS Settings].
5Select the [WINS Resolution] check box, specify the required settings, and click [OK].
[WINS Resolution]
Select the check box to use WINS for name resolution. When not using WINS, clear the check box.
[WINS Server Address]
Enter the IP address of the WINS server.
●If the IP address of the WINS server is obtained from a DHCP server, the obtained IP address overrides the
IP address entered in the [WINS Server Address] text box.
6Restart the machine.
●Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
Selecting settings from the operation panel
●WINS settings can also be accessed by pressing on the operation panel. WINS Settings(P. 295)
LINKS
Setting IPv4 Address(P. 154)
Network
187
Conguring SNTP
0W20-03S
Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) enables you to adjust the system clock by using
the time server on the network. When you use SNTP, the system checks the time server
periodically, so that the system clock is always accurate. The time is adjusted based on
Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), so specify the time zone setting before conguring
SNTP ( Date/Time Settings(P. 307) ). SNTP settings can be specied via the Remote UI.
●The SNTP of the machine supports both NTP (version 3) and SNTP (versions 3 and 4) servers.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote
UI(P. 270)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Network Settings] [TCP/IP Settings].
Network
188
4Click [Edit] in [SNTP Settings].
5Select the [Use SNTP] check box and specify the required settings.
[Use SNTP]
Select the check box to use SNTP for synchronization. If you do not want to use SNTP, clear the check box.
[NTP Server Name]
Enter the IP address of the NTP or the SNTP server. If DNS is available on the network, you can enter a host
name (or FQDN) of up to 255 alphanumeric characters instead (example: ntp.example.com).
[Polling Interval]
Specify the interval between one synchronization and the next. Specify an interval from 1 to 48 hours.
6Click [OK].
7Restart the machine.
●Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
Network
189
Testing communication with the NTP/SNTP server
●You can view communication status with the registered server by clicking [Settings/Registration] [Network
Settings] [TCP/IP Settings] and then clicking [Check NTP Server] in [SNTP Settings] that appears. If a
proper connection has been established, the result is displayed as shown below. Note that this operation
does not adjust the system clock.
Network
190
Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP
0W20-03U
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is a protocol for monitoring and controlling communication devices in a
network by using Management Information Base (MIB). The machine supports SNMPv1 and security-enhanced
SNMPv3. You can check the status of the machine from a computer when you print documents or use the Remote UI.
You can enable either SNMPv1 or SNMPv3, or both at the same time. Specify the settings for each version to suit your
network environment and the purpose of use.
SNMPv1
SNMPv1 uses information called "community" to dene the scope of SNMP communication. Because this
information is exposed to the network in plain text, your network will be vulnerable to attacks. If you want to
ensure network security, disable SNMPv1 and use SNMPv3.
SNMPv3
With SNMPv3, you can implement network device management that is protected by robust security features.
Note that SSL must be enabled for the Remote UI before conguring SNMPv3 ( Enabling SSL Encrypted
Communication for the Remote UI(P. 235) ).
●The machine does not support the trap notication feature of SNMP.
●To change the port number of SNMP, see Changing Port Numbers(P. 226) .
●SNMP management software, when installed on a computer on the network, enables you to congure,
monitor, and control the machine remotely from the computer. For more information, see the instruction
manuals for your management software.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager mode. Starting Remote
UI(P. 270)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
Network
191
3Click [Network Settings] [SNMP Settings].
4Click [Edit].
5Specify SNMPv1 settings.
●If you do not need to change SNMPv1 settings, proceed to the next step.
Network
192
[Use SNMPv1]
Select the check box to enable SNMPv1. You can specify the rest of SNMPv1 settings only when this check box
is selected.
[Use Community Name 1]/[Use Community Name 2]
Select the check box to specify a community name. If you do not need to specify a community name, clear
the check box.
[Community Name]
Enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters for the name of the community.
[MIB Access Permission]
For each community, select [Read/Write] or [Read Only] for the access privileges to MIB objects.
[Read/Write] Permits both viewing and changing the values of MIB objects.
[Read Only] Permits only viewing the values of MIB objects.
[Use Dedicated Community]
Dedicated Community is a preset community, intended exclusively for Administrators using Canon software,
such as imageWARE Enterprise Management Console. Select the check box to use Dedicated Community. If
you do not need to use Dedicated Community, clear the check box.
6Specify SNMPv3 settings.
●If you do not need to change SNMPv3 settings, proceed to the next step.
Network
193
[Use SNMPv3]
Select the check box to enable SNMPv3. You can specify the rest of SNMPv3 settings only when this check box
is selected.
[Enable User]
Select the check box to enable [User Settings 1]/[User Settings 2]/[User Settings 3]. To disable user settings,
clear the corresponding check box.
[User Name]
Enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters for the user name.
[MIB Access Permission]
Select [Read/Write] or [Read Only] for the access privileges to MIB objects.
[Read/Write] Permits both viewing and changing the values of MIB objects.
[Read Only] Permits only viewing the values of MIB objects.
[Security Settings]
Select [Authentication On/Encryption On], [Authentication On/Encryption Off], or [Authentication Off/
Encryption Off] for the desired combination of authentication and encryption settings.
[Authentication Algorithm]
Click the [Authentication On/Encryption On] or [Authentication On/Encryption Off] for [Security Settings] for
the algorithm that corresponds to your environment.
[Encryption Algorithm]
Click the [Authentication On/Encryption On] for [Security Settings] for the algorithm that corresponds to your
environment.
[Set/Change Password]
To set or change the password, select the check box and enter between 8 and 16 alphanumeric characters
for the password in the [Authentication Password] or [Encryption Password] text box. For conrmation, enter
the same password in the [Conrm] text box. Passwords can be set independently for authentication and
encryption algorithms.
[Context Name 1]/[Context Name 2]/[Context Name 3]
Enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters for the context name. Up to three context names can be registered.
7Specify Printer Management Information Acquisition Settings.
●With SNMP, the printer management information, such as printing protocols and printer ports, can be
monitored and obtained regularly from a computer on the network.
Network
194
[Acquire Printer Management Information from Host]
Select the check box to enable monitoring of the printer management information of the machine via SNMP.
To disable monitoring of the printer management information, clear the check box.
8Click [OK].
9Restart the machine.
●Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
Disabling both SNMPv1 and SNMPv3
●If both versions of SNMP are disabled, some of the functions of the machine become unavailable, such as
obtaining machine information via the printer driver.
Using the operation panel
●You can enable or disable the SNMP settings by pressing on the operation panel. SNMP
Settings(P. 298)
Enabling Both SNMPv1 and SNMPv3
●If both versions of SNMP are enabled, it is recommended that MIB access permission in SNMPv1 be set to
[Read Only]. MIB access permission can be set independently in SNMPv1 and SNMPv3 (and for each user in
SNMPv3). Selecting [Read/Write] (full access permission) in SNMPv1 negates the robust security features
that characterize SNMPv3 because most of the machine settings can then be controlled with SNMPv1.
LINKS
Enabling SSL Encrypted Communication for the Remote UI(P. 235)
Network
195
Conguring Settings for Device Management Software
0W20-03W
You can facilitate the collection and management of various information about networked devices by implementing
device management software, such as imageWARE Enterprise Management Console*, into the network. Information
such as device settings and error logs is retrieved and distributed via the server computer. If the machine is connected
to such a network, imageWARE Enterprise Management Console searches the network for the machine by using
protocols such as Service Location Protocol (SLP) to gather information from the machine, including the power status.
SLP settings can be specied via the Remote UI.This section also describes how to congure communication settings
for the imageWARE Enterprise Management Console plug-ins.
* For more information about imageWARE Enterprise Management Console, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
Conguring SLP Communication with Device Management Software(P. 196)
Conguring Settings for Device Settings Management(P. 199)
To use imageWARE Enterprise Management Console plug-ins
●You need to enable dedicated port settings and SNMP settings. For SNMP settings, set [MIB Access
Permission] to [Read/Write] for both SNMPv3 and SNMPv1. plug-in. Dedicated Port Settings (P. 298)
Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP(P. 191)
Conguring SLP Communication with Device Management Software
1Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote
UI(P. 270)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Network Settings] [TCP/IP Settings].
Network
196
4Specify SLP settings.
Specifying multicast device discovery
1Click [Edit] in [Multicast Discovery Settings].
2Select the [Respond to Discovery] check box and specify the required settings.
[Respond to Discovery]
Select the check box to set the machine to respond to device management software multicast discovery
packets and enable monitoring by device management software.
[Scope Name]
To include the machine into a specic scope, enter up to 32 characters for the scope name.
Network
197
3Click [OK].
●To change the port number for multicast discovery, see Changing Port Numbers(P. 226) .
Notifying a device management software of the power status of the machine
1Click [Edit] in [Sleep Mode Notication Settings].
2Select the [Notify] check box and specify the required settings.
[Notify]
Select the check box to notify a device management software of the power status of the machine. When
[Notify] is selected, you can expect the machine to avoid unnecessary communication during sleep mode
and reduce the total power consumption.
[Port Number]
Change the port number for this function according to the network environment.
[Number of Routers to Traverse]
Specify how many routers the notication packets can pass. Enter a number from 0 to 254.
[Notication Interval]
Specify how often the machine noties a device management software of its power status. Enter a
number in seconds from 60 to 65535.
3Click [OK].
5Restart the machine.
●Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
Network
198
Conguring Settings for Device Settings Management
Congure settings so that communication with an imageWARE Enterprise Management Console plug-in is enabled.
Use of a plug-in allows you to manage the machine's settings from the imageWARE Enterprise Management Console.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote
UI(P. 270)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Network Settings] [Settings for Device Settings Management].
4Click [Edit]
Network
199
5Select the [Use Device Settings Management] check box and click [OK].
[Use Device Settings Management]
If the check box is cleared, the machine cannot be recognized as a device that is to be managed from the
plug-in.
Using the operation panel
●You can also congure settings for device settings management from on the operation panel. Device
Settings Management On/Off (P. 300)
LINKS
Entering Sleep Mode(P. 62)
Network
200
Security
Security ................................................................................................................................................................ 202
Protecting the Machine from Unauthorized Access ....................................................................................... 203
Preventing Unauthorized Access .................................................................................................................. 204
Setting Access Privileges .............................................................................................................................. 206
Setting the System Manager ID ............................................................................................................. 207
Setting the Department ID Management .............................................................................................. 209
Setting a Remote UI PIN ........................................................................................................................ 216
Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls ............................................................................................. 218
Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Rules ............................................................................................. 219
Specifying MAC Addresses for Firewall Rules ......................................................................................... 223
Changing Port Numbers ............................................................................................................................... 226
Setting a Proxy ............................................................................................................................................. 228
Restricting the Machine's Functions ................................................................................................................ 230
Restricting USB Functions ............................................................................................................................. 231
Disabling HTTP Communication ................................................................................................................... 232
Disabling Remote UI ..................................................................................................................................... 233
Implementing Robust Security Features ......................................................................................................... 234
Enabling SSL Encrypted Communication for the Remote UI ......................................................................... 235
Conguring IPSec Settings ........................................................................................................................... 239
Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication ....................................................................................................... 248
Conguring Settings for Key Pairs and Digital Certicates ........................................................................... 253
Generating Key Pairs ............................................................................................................................. 254
Using CA-issued Key Pairs and Digital Certicates ................................................................................. 262
Verifying Key Pairs and Digital Certicates ............................................................................................. 266
Security
201
Security
0W20-03X
Condential information is handled by information devices everywhere, including computers and printers, and any of
these devices may become a target for malicious third parties at anytime. Attackers may directly gain unauthorized
access to your devices, or indirectly take advantage of negligence or improper use. Either way, you may incur
unanticipated losses when your condential information is leaked. To counter these risks, the machine is equipped
with a variety of security functions. Set the necessary conguration depending on your network environment.
You can congure the best security system by building an environment that inhibits access to printers on your
in-house network via the Internet and using such environment together with the machine's security features.
Preventing Unauthorized Access(P. 204)
◼Establishing the Basics of Information Security
Protecting the Machine from Unauthorized Access(P. 203)
◼Preparing for Risks from Negligence or Misuse
Restricting the Machine's Functions(P. 230) Printing a Document Secured by a PIN (Secure
Print) (LBP252dw)(P. 109)
◼Implementing Robust Security Features
Implementing Robust Security Features(P. 234)
Security
202
Protecting the Machine from Unauthorized Access
0W20-03Y
Prevent unauthorized third parties from accessing and using the machine. You can implement multiple security
measures, such as managing user access privileges, using rewalls, and changing port numbers.
Security
203
Preventing Unauthorized Access
0W20-040
This section describes the security measures on how to prevent unauthorized access from the external network. This is
a must-read for all users and administrators before using this machine, other printers, and multifunction machines
connected to the network. In recent years, a printer/multifunction machine connected to the network can offer you a
variety of useful functions, such as printing from a computer, operating from a computer using the remote function,
and sending scanned documents via the Internet. On the other hand, it is essential to take security measures to
reduce the security risk for information leakage, as a printer/multifunction machine has become more exposed to
threats, such as unauthorized access and theft, when it is connected to the network. This section explains necessary
settings you need to specify to prevent unauthorized access before using a printer/multifunction machine connected
to the network.
Security Measures to Prevent Unauthorized Access from the External Network
Assigning a Private IP Address(P. 204)
Using Firewall to Restrict Transmission(P. 205)
Specifying the SSL Encrypted Communication (P. 205)
Setting PIN to Manage Information Stored in the Printer(P. 205)
Assigning a Private IP Address
An IP address is a numerical label assigned to each device participating in a computer network. A "global IP address" is
used for the communication connecting to the Internet, and a "private IP address" is used for the communication
within a local area network, such as a LAN in the company. If a global IP address is assigned, your printer/
multifunction machine is open to the public and can be accessed via the Internet. Thus, the risk of information leakage
due to unauthorized access from external network increases. On the other hand, if a private IP address is assigned,
your printer/multifunction machine is closed to a local area network and can be accessed by only users on your local
area network, such as a LAN in the company.
Global IP Address
Can be accessed from the users within a local area
network
Private IP Address
Can be accessed from the users within a local area network
Basically, assign a private IP address to your printer/multifunction machine. Make sure to conrm the IP address,
assigned to the printer/multifunction machine you are using, is a private IP address or not. A private IP address is
found in one of the following ranges.
Ranges for Private IP addresses
●From 10.0.0.0 to 10.255.255.255
●From 172.16.0.0 to 172.31.255.255
●From 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.255
For information on how to conrm the IP address, see Setting IPv4 Address(P. 154) .
●If a global IP address is assigned to a printer/multifunction machine, you can create a network environment
to reduce the risk of unauthorized access by installing security software, such as a rewall that prevents
Security
204
access from the external networks. If you want to assign a global IP address to and use a printer/
multifunction machine, contact your network administrator.
Using Firewall to Restrict Transmission
A rewall is a system that prevents unauthorized access from the external networks and protects against attacks/
intrusions to a local area network. You can use a rewall on your network environment to block access from the
external network that appears to be dangerous, by restricting communication from specied IP address of the
external network. The function installed to a Canon printer/multifunction machine enables you to set up the IP
address lter. For information on how to set up an IP address lter, see Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall
Rules(P. 219) .
Specifying the SSL Encrypted Communication
For information on the SSL Encrypted Communication, see Implementing Robust Security Features(P. 234) , and
on the procedures to specify, see Enabling SSL Encrypted Communication for the Remote UI(P. 235) .
Setting PIN to Manage Information Stored in the Printer
If a malicious third party attempts to gain unauthorized access to a printer/multifunction machine, setting PIN to
information stored in the machine will reduce the risk of information leakage. Canon printer/multifunction machine
enables you to protect various type of information by setting PIN.
Setting PIN to Each Function
●Setting PIN for Using Remote UI
For more information, see Setting a Remote UI PIN(P. 216) .
●Setting PIN for the System Manager Settings
For more information, see Setting the System Manager ID(P. 207) .
Listed above are some examples of security measures for preventing unauthorized access. For more information on
the other security measures, see Security(P. 202) and take necessary security measures for preventing
unauthorized access to suit your environment.
Security
205
Setting Access Privileges
0W20-041
Protect the machine from unauthorized access by only allowing users with access privileges to use the machine.
Access privileges are set separately for system administrators, general users, and the Remote UI. When privileges are
set, the user must enter an ID and PIN to print or change settings.
Department ID accounts are divided into two types: System Manager ID, which is intended exclusively for
Administrators, and Department ID for general users. A System Manager ID can be dened as an account with full
access privileges, while a user Department ID is an account for print management. And by setting a Remote UI Access
PIN, you can restrict use of the Remote UI.
System Manager ID
System Manager ID is an account with full access privileges. If you specify a System Manager ID, you need to
log on to the machine using the System Manager ID information in order to access <Network Settings> or
<System Management Settings>. Set the System Manager ID when you need different access privilege levels for
Administrators and general users. Only one System Manager ID can be registered.
Setting the System Manager ID(P. 207)
Department ID (Department ID Management)
You can specify access privileges for a user (or group of users) by registering a Department ID. You can register
multiple Department IDs. If a user tries to operate the machine when Department IDs are enabled, a logon
screen is displayed, and the user must enter their own Department ID and PIN to use the machine. Also, the
details of the past use of the machine can be collected for each Department ID, which helps manage the
machine.
Setting the Department ID Management(P. 209)
Remote UI PIN (Remote UI Access PIN)
This is a PIN for using the Remote UI. Only users who know the PIN can access the Remote UI.
Setting a Remote UI PIN(P. 216)
Security
206
Setting the System Manager ID
0W20-042
This is a PIN for using the Remote UI. Only users who know the PIN can access the Remote UI. You can also set a PIN
for the System Manager ID. If this ID is enabled, you can access <Network Settings> and <System Management
Settings> only when the System Manager ID and PIN have been entered correctly. The System Manager ID settings
information is critical to the security of the machine, so make sure that only Administrators know the System Manager
ID and PIN.
1Press .
2Use / to select <System Management Settings>, and press .
If the System Manager ID has already been set
●If the logon screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN using the numeric keys, and then press .
Logging on to the Machine(P. 34)
3Select <System Manager Information Settings> <System Manager ID and PIN>.
4Specify the System Manager ID and PIN.
●Specify the <System Manager ID>, and then specify the <System Manager PIN>.
●Enter a number of up to seven digits using the numeric keys, and press .
●When <PIN (Conrm)> is displayed, enter the PIN once again to conrm.
●You cannot register an ID or PIN that consists only of zeros, such as "00" or "0000000".
●To cancel the System Manager ID and PIN settings, clear the information you entered in and press
with the elds blank.
Setting the System Manager Name
1Select <System Manager Name>, and press .
2Enter up to 32 characters for the System Manager Name, select <Apply>, and press . Entering
Text(P. 32)
Security
207
●Be sure to remember the PIN that you have set. If you have forgotten the PIN, contact your local authorized
Canon dealer or the Canon help line.
Conguring settings via the Remote UI
●Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Click [Settings/Registration] [System
Management] [Security Settings] [Edit] and specify the necessary settings on the displayed screen.
●By using the Remote UI, you can register a variety of information, including contact information,
Administrator comments, the installation location of the machine, as well as to the settings that you can
register by using the operation panel. The registered information can be viewed on the [Device Information]
page of the Remote UI. Checking System Manager Information(P. 278)
Logging on to the machine
●If you try to access <Network Settings> or <System Management Settings>
when only the System Manager ID is enabled, the following logon screen is
displayed:
●You must also enter the System Manager ID and PIN to log on using the
Remote UI in System Manager mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 270)
LINKS
Setting Access Privileges(P. 206)
Setting the Department ID Management(P. 209)
Security
208
Setting the Department ID Management
0W20-043
You can control access to the machine by using multiple IDs for multiple users or groups. If a user tries to operate the
machine when Department ID Management is enabled, a logon screen is displayed, and the user must enter their own
Department ID and PIN to use the machine. Department ID Management provides recorded details of the past use of
the machine for each Department ID. To congure Department ID Management, register department IDs as necessary
and then enable Department ID Management function. Additional settings are required if you want to enable
Department ID Management for printing from a computer.
Registering/Editing Department ID and PIN(P. 209)
Enabling the Department ID Management(P. 211)
Setting the Department ID Management for Printing from the Computer(P. 213)
Blocking Jobs When Department ID Is Unknown(P. 214)
Registering/Editing Department ID and PIN
Register a Department ID and set a PIN for it. Up to 300 Department IDs can be registered.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote
UI(P. 270)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Department ID Management] and register or edit Department IDs.
Security
209
Registering a Department ID
1Click [Register New Department].
2Specify the required settings and click [OK].
[Department ID]
Enter a number of up to seven digits for the Department ID.
[Set PIN]
To set a PIN, select the check box and enter a number of up to seven digits both in the [PIN] and
[Conrm] text boxes.
Select the check box for [Black & White Print] under [Restrict Functions] to make it impossible to print
with the machine.
Editing the settings of the registered Department ID
1Click the corresponding text link under [Department ID] to edit.
2Change the settings as necessary and click [OK].
Deleting a Department ID
●Click [Delete] on the right of the Department ID you want to delete click [OK].
Security
210
[Department ID Page Total]
●You can check the total number of printed pages for each Department ID.
●If you want to return the counts to zero, click the corresponding text link under [Department ID] and click
[Clear Count] [OK]. If you want to return the counts of all Department IDs to zero, click [Clear All Counts]
[OK].
Enabling the Department ID Management
After you register as many Department IDs as necessary, enable Department ID Management.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote
UI(P. 270)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Department ID Management] [Edit].
Security
211
4Select the [Department ID Management] check box and click [OK].
[Department ID Management]
Select the check box to enable Department ID Management. If you do not want to use Department ID
Management, clear the check box.
●For information on the [Allow Print Jobs with Unknown IDs] check box, see Blocking Jobs When
Department ID Is Unknown(P. 214) .
Using the operation panel
●You can also switch Department ID Management On/Off by pressing on the operation panel.
Department ID Management On/Off(P. 338)
Logging on to the machine
●When you try to operate the machine when Department ID Management is
enabled, the following logon screen is displayed:
Security
212
Setting the Department ID Management for Printing from the Computer
If you want to enable Department ID Management for printing from a computer, you need to specify settings by using
the printer driver you already installed on the computer. Specify the Department ID and PIN as necessary.
●To perform the following procedure, log on to your computer with an administrator account.
1Open the printer folder. Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 474)
2Right-click your printer icon and click [Printer properties] or [Properties].
3Click the [Device Settings] tab and specify the required settings.
1Select the [Use Department ID Management] check box and click [Settings] on the right of it.
2Specify the settings as necessary and click [OK].
Security
213
[Allow PIN Settings]
Select the check box to enable the PIN setting.
[Department ID]
Enter a number of up to seven digits for the Department ID.
[PIN]
Enter a number of up to seven digits for the PIN if it is set for the Department ID.
[Verify]
Click to verify that the correct ID and PIN are entered. This function is not available if the machine and
the computer are connected via a USB or WSD (Web Services on Devices) port.
[Conrm Department ID/PIN When Printing]
Select the check box to display the [Conrm Department ID/PIN] pop-up screen each time you print
from a computer.
[Authenticate Department ID/PIN at Device]
Select the check box if the machine and the computer are connected via a USB or WSD port.
3Click [OK].
Logging on to the machine
●When you try to print from a computer when Department ID
Management is enabled, the following pop-up screen is displayed
(unless the [Conrm Department ID/PIN When Printing] check box is
cleared):
Blocking Jobs When Department ID Is Unknown
The factory default settings are such that even when Department ID Management is enabled, you can print from a
computer without entering an ID and PIN. If you want to change this so that printing is not possible unless an ID and
PIN are entered, use the following procedure.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote
UI(P. 270)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
Security
214
Setting a Remote UI PIN
0W20-044
You can set a PIN for access to the Remote UI. All users use a common PIN.
●When Department ID Management is enabled, setting here is not required. Setting the Department ID
Management(P. 209)
1Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote
UI(P. 270)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Security Settings] [Remote UI Settings].
4Click [Edit].
Security
216
5Select the [Use Remote UI Access PIN] check box and specify the PIN.
[Use Remote UI Access PIN]
If you select this check box, you must enter a PIN to access the Remote UI.
[Set/Change PIN]
To set a PIN, select the check box and enter a number of up to seven digits both in the [PIN] and [Conrm]
text boxes.
6Click [OK].
Using the operation panel
●You can also set a Remote UI Access PIN by pressing on the operation panel. Remote UI
Settings(P. 341)
If Remote UI settings are initialized
●The Remote UI Access PIN is also initialized. After an initialization, reset the PIN. Initializing Menu(P. 423)
LINKS
Setting Access Privileges(P. 206)
Setting the System Manager ID(P. 207)
Security
217
Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls
0W20-045
Without proper security, unauthorized third parties can access computers and other communication devices that are
connected to a network. To prevent this unauthorized access, specify the settings for packet lter, a feature that
restricts communication to devices with specied IP addresses or MAC addresses.
Security
218
Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Rules
0W20-046
You can either limit communication to only devices with specied IP addresses, or block devices with specied IP
addresses but permit other communications. You can specify a single IP address or a range of IP addresses.
●Up to 16 IP addresses (or ranges of IP addresses) can be specied for both IPv4 and IPv6.
●The packet lters described in this section control communications over TCP, UDP, and ICMP.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote
UI(P. 270)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Security Settings] [IP Address Filter].
4Click [Edit] for the lter type that you want to use.
Security
219
[IPv4 Address: Outbound Filter]
Select to restrict sending data from the machine to a computer by specifying IPv4 addresses.
[IPv4 Address: Inbound Filter]
Select to restrict receiving data from the machine to a computer by specifying IPv4 addresses.
[IPv6 Address: Outbound Filter]
Select to restrict sending data from the machine to a computer by specifying IPv6 addresses.
[IPv6 Address: Inbound Filter]
Select to restrict receiving data from the machine to a computer by specifying IPv6 addresses.
5Specify the settings for packet ltering.
●Select the default policy to allow or reject the communication of other devices with the machine, and then
specify IP addresses for exceptions.
1Select the [Use Filter] check box and click the [Reject] or [Allow] radio button for the [Default Policy].
[Use Filter]
Select the check box to restrict communication. Clear the check box to disable the restriction.
Security
220
[Default Policy]
Select the precondition to allow or reject the communication of other devices with the machine.
[Reject]
Select to pass communication packets only when they are sent to or received from
devices whose IP addresses are entered in [Exception Addresses]. Communications
with other devices are prohibited.
[Allow]
Select to block communication packets when they are sent to or received from
devices whose IP addresses are entered in [Exception Addresses]. Communications
with other devices are permitted.
2Specify address exceptions.
●Enter the IP address (or the range of IP addresses) in the [Address to Register] text box and click
[Add].
Check for entry errors
●If IP addresses are incorrectly entered, you may be unable to access the machine from the Remote UI,
in which case you need to set <IPv4 Address Filter> or <IPv6 Address Filter> to <Off>. IPv4 Address
Filter(P. 339) IPv6 Address Filter(P. 339)
Entry form for IP addresses
Description Example
Entering a single address
IPv4:
Delimit numbers with periods. 192.168.0.10
IPv6:
Delimit alphanumeric characters with
colons.
fe80::10
Specifying a range of addresses Insert a hyphen between the addresses. 192.168.0.10-192.168.0.20
Specifying a range of addresses with a prex Enter the address, followed by a slash and
a number indicating the prex length.
192.168.0.32/27
fe80::1234/64
When [Reject] is selected for an outbound lter
●Outgoing multicast and broadcast packets cannot be ltered.
Deleting an IP address from exceptions
●Select an IP address and click [Delete].
3Click [OK].
6Restart the machine.
●Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
Security
221
Specifying MAC Addresses for Firewall Rules
0W20-047
You can limit communication to only devices with specied MAC addresses, or block devices with specied MAC
addresses but permit other communications. Up to 32 MAC addresses can be specied.
●This function is unavailable when the machine is connected to a wireless LAN.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote
UI(P. 270)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Security Settings] [MAC Address Filter].
4Click [Edit] for a lter type.
Security
223
[Outbound Filter]
Select to restrict sending data from the machine to a computer by specifying MAC addresses.
[Inbound Filter]
Select to restrict receiving data from the machine to a computer by specifying MAC addresses.
5Specify the settings for packet ltering.
●Select the precondition (default policy) to allow or reject the communication of other devices with the
machine, and then specify MAC addresses for exceptions.
1Select the [Use Filter] check box and click the [Reject] or [Allow] radio button for the [Default Policy].
[Use Filter]
Select the check box to restrict communication. Clear the check box to disable the restriction.
[Default Policy]
Select the precondition to allow or reject other devices to communicate with the machine.
[Reject]
Select to pass communication packets only when they are sent to or received from
devices whose MAC addresses are entered in [Exception Addresses].
Communications with other devices are prohibited.
[Allow]
Select to block communication packets when they are sent to or received from
devices whose MAC addresses are entered in [Exception Addresses].
Communications with other devices are permitted.
2Specify address exceptions.
Security
224
●Enter the MAC address in the [Address to Register] text box and click [Add].
●You do not need to delimit the address with hyphens or colons.
Check for entry errors
●If MAC addresses are incorrectly entered, you may become unable to access the machine from the
Remote UI, in which case you need to set <MAC Address Filter> to <Off>. MAC Address
Filter(P. 340)
When [Reject] is selected for an outbound lter
●Outgoing multicast and broadcast packets cannot be ltered.
Deleting a MAC address from exceptions
●Select a MAC address and click [Delete].
3Click [OK].
6Restart the machine.
●Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
Using the operation panel
●You can also enable or disable MAC address ltering by pressing on the operation panel. MAC
Address Filter(P. 340)
LINKS
Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Rules(P. 219)
Security
225
Changing Port Numbers
0W20-048
Ports serve as endpoints for communicating with other devices. Typically, conventional port numbers are used for
major protocols, but devices that use these port numbers are vulnerable to attacks because these port numbers are
well-known. To enhance security, your Network Administrator may change the port numbers. When a port number has
been changed, the new number must be shared with the communicating devices, such as computers and servers.
Specify the port number settings depending on the network environment.
●To change the port number for proxy server, see Setting a Proxy(P. 228) .
1Press .
2Use / to select <Network Settings>, and press .
●If the logon screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN using the numeric keys, and then press .
Logging on to the Machine(P. 34)
3Select <TCP/IP Settings> <Port Number Settings>.
4Select a port, and press .
Learning more about the ports
●<LPD>/<RAW>/<WSD Multicast Discovery> Conguring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions(P. 165)
●<HTTP> Disabling HTTP Communication(P. 232)
●<SNMP> Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP(P. 191)
●<Multicast Discovery> Conguring Settings for Device Management Software(P. 196)
5Enter the port number using the numeric keys, and press .
6Restart the machine.
●Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
Security
226
Setting a Proxy
0W20-049
A proxy (or HTTP proxy server) refers to a computer or software that carries out HTTP communication for other
devices, especially when communicating with resources outside the network, such as when browsing Web sites. The
client devices connect to the outside network through the proxy server, and do not communicate directly to the
resources outside. Setting a proxy not only facilitates management of trac between in-house and outside networks
but also blocks unauthorized access and consolidates anti-virus protection for enhanced security. When you use
Google Cloud Print to print over the Internet, you can enhance security by setting a proxy. When setting a proxy, make
sure that you have the necessary proxy information, including the IP address, port number, and a user name and
password for authentication.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote
UI(P. 270)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Network Settings] [TCP/IP Settings].
4Click [Edit] in [Proxy Settings].
Security
228
5Select the [Use Proxy] check box and specify the required settings.
[Use Proxy]
Select the check box to use the specied proxy server when communicating with an HTTP server.
[HTTP Proxy Server Address]
Enter the address of the proxy server. Specify the IP address or host name depending on the environment.
[HTTP Proxy Server Port Number]
Change the port number as necessary. Enter a number between 1 and 65535.
[Use Proxy within Same Domain]
Select the check box to also use the specied proxy server for communication with devices in the same
domain.
[Use Proxy Authentication]
To enable authentication by the proxy server, select the check box and enter up to 24 alphanumeric
characters for the user name in the [User Name] text box.
[Set/Change Password]
To set or change the password for the proxy authentication, when it is enabled, select the check box and
enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for the new password in the [Password] text box.
6Click [OK].
LINKS
Using Google Cloud Print(P. 452)
Security
229
Restricting the Machine's Functions
0W20-04A
Some of the functions of the machine may rarely be used or provide opportunities for misuse. For security purposes,
the machine can be set to limit its capabilities by partially or completely disabling these functions.
Restricting USB Functions
Restricting USB Functions(P. 231)
Disabling HTTP Communication and Remote Management
Disabling HTTP Communication(P. 232)
Disabling Remote UI(P. 233)
Security
230
Restricting USB Functions
0W20-04C
You can disable the USB port for computer connection located on the back side of the machine.
1Press .
2Use / to select <System Management Settings>, and press .
●If the logon screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN using the numeric keys, and then press .
Logging on to the Machine(P. 34)
3Select <Use as USB Device>, and press .
4Select <Off>, and press .
<Off>
Disables the USB port of the machine.
<On>
Enables the USB port of the machine.
5Restart the machine.
●Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
Security
231
Disabling HTTP Communication
0W20-04E
HTTP is used for communications over the network, such as when you access the machine via the Remote UI. If you
are using a USB connection or are otherwise not using HTTP, you can disable HTTP to block malicious third-party
intrusions via the unused HTTP port.
Disabling HTTP disables some of the network capabilities, such as the Remote UI, WSD printing., and printing
with Google Cloud Print.
1Press .
2Use / to select <Network Settings>, and press .
●If the logon screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN using the numeric keys, and then press .
Logging on to the Machine(P. 34)
3Select <TCP/IP Settings> <Use HTTP>.
4Select <Off>, and press .
<Off>
Disables HTTP communication.
<On>
Enables HTTP communication.
LINKS
Using Remote UI(P. 269)
Changing Port Numbers(P. 226)
Conguring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions(P. 165)
Using Google Cloud Print(P. 452)
Security
232
Disabling Remote UI
0W20-04F
The Remote UI is useful because the machine settings can be specied by using a Web browser on a computer. To use
the Remote UI, the machine must be connected to a computer over the network. If the machine is connected to a
computer via USB, or if you do not need to use the Remote UI, you might want to disable the Remote UI to reduce the
risk of having your machine controlled remotely over the network by malicious third parties.
1Press .
2Use / to select <System Management Settings>, and press .
●If the logon screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN using the numeric keys, and then press .
Logging on to the Machine(P. 34)
3Select <Remote UI Settings> <Use Remote UI>.
4Select <Off>, and press .
<Off>
Disables the Remote UI.
<On>
Enables the Remote UI.
5Restart the machine.
●Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
LINKS
Using Remote UI(P. 269)
Disabling HTTP Communication(P. 232)
Security
233
Implementing Robust Security Features
0W20-04H
Authorized users may incur unanticipated losses from attacks by malicious third parties, such as sning, spoong,
and tampering of data as it ows over a network. To protect your important and valuable information from these
attacks, the machine supports the following features to enhance security and secrecy.
SSL Encrypted Communication
SSL is a protocol for encryption for data sent over a network and is often used for communication via a Web
browser or an e-mail application. SSL enables secure network communication when you access the machine
from a computer via the Remote UI. Enabling SSL Encrypted Communication for the Remote UI(P. 235)
IPSec Communication
While SSL only encrypts data used on a specic application, such as a Web browser or an e-mail application,
IPSec encrypts the whole (or payloads of) IP packets. This enables IPSec to offer a more versatile security system
than SSL. Conguring IPSec Settings(P. 239)
IEEE 802.1X Authentication
IEEE 802.1X is a standard and mechanism for blocking unauthorized access to the network by collectively
managing user authentication information. If a device tries to connect to the 802.1X network, the device must
go through user authentication in order to prove that the connection is made by an authorized user.
Authentication information is sent to and checked by a RADIUS server, which permits or rejects communication
to the network depending on the authentication result. If authentication fails, a LAN switch (or an access point)
blocks access from the outside of the network. The machine can connect to an 802.1X network as a client
device. Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication(P. 248)
LINKS
Conguring Settings for Key Pairs and Digital Certicates(P. 253)
Security
234
Enabling SSL Encrypted Communication for the Remote
UI
0W20-04J
You can encrypt communication between the machine and a Web browser on the computer by using Secure Sockets
Layer (SSL). SSL is a mechanism for encrypting data sent or received over the network. SSL must be enabled when the
Remote UI is used for specifying settings for IPSec (Pre-Shared Key Method), IEEE 802.1X authentication (TTLS/PEAP),
or SNMPv3. To use SSL for the Remote UI, you need to set a key pair and enable the SSL function. Generate or install
the key pair for SSL before enabling SSL ( Conguring Settings for Key Pairs and Digital Certicates(P. 253) ).
1Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote
UI(P. 270)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Network Settings] [TCP/IP Settings].
Security
235
4Click [Key and Certicate] in [SSL Settings].
5Click [Register Default Key] on the right of the key pair you want to use.
Viewing details of a certicate
●You can check the details of the certicate or verify the certicate by clicking the corresponding text link
under [Key Name], or the certicate icon. Verifying Key Pairs and Digital Certicates(P. 266)
6Enable SSL for the Remote UI.
1Click [Security Settings] [Remote UI Settings].
Security
236
2Click [Edit].
3Select the [Use SSL] check box and click [OK].
7Restart the machine.
●Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
Using the operation panel
●You can also enable or disable SSL encrypted communication by pressing on the operation panel. Use
SSL(P. 338)
Security
237
Starting the Remote UI with SSL
●If you try to start the Remote UI when SSL is enabled, a security alert may be displayed regarding the
security certicate. In this case, check that the correct URL is entered in the address eld, and then proceed
to display the Remote UI screen. Starting Remote UI(P. 270)
LINKS
Generating Key Pairs(P. 254)
Using CA-issued Key Pairs and Digital Certicates(P. 262)
Conguring IPSec Settings(P. 239)
Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication(P. 248)
Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP(P. 191)
Security
238
Conguring IPSec Settings
0W20-04K
Internet Protocol Security (IPSec or IPsec) is a protocol suite for encrypting data transported over a network, including
Internet networks. While SSL only encrypts data used on a specic application, such as a Web browser or an e-mail
application, IPSec encrypts either whole IP packets or the payloads of IP packets, offering a more versatile security
system. The IPSec of the machine works in transport mode, in which the payloads of IP packets are encrypted. With
this feature, the machine can connect directly to a computer that is in the same virtual private network (VPN). Check
the system requirements and set the necessary conguration on the computer before you congure the machine.
System Requirements
IPSec that is supported by the machine conforms to RFC2401, RFC2402, RFC2406, and RFC4305.
Operating system Windows Vista/7/8/Server 2003/Server 2008/Server 2012
Connection mode Transport mode
Key exchange protocol
IKEv1 (main mode)
Authentication method
●Pre-shared key
●Digital signature
Hash algorithm
(and key length)
●HMAC-SHA1-96
●HMAC-SHA2 (256 bits or 384 bits)
Encryption algorithm
(and key length)
●3DES-CBC
●AES-CBC (128 bits, 192 bits, or 256 bits)
Key exchange algorithm/group (and key
length)
Die-Hellman (DH)
●Group 1 (768 bits)
●Group 2 (1024 bits)
●Group 14 (2048 bits)
ESP
Hash algorithm HMAC-SHA1-96
Encryption algorithm
(and key length)
●3DES-CBC
●AES-CBC (128 bits, 192 bits, or 256 bits)
Hash algorithm/encryption algorithm (and
key length) AES-GCM (128 bits, 192 bits, or 256 bits)
AH Hash algorithm HMAC-SHA1-96
IPSec functional restrictions
●IPSec supports communication to a unicast address (or a single device).
●The machine cannot use both IPSec and DHCPv6 at the same time.
●IPSec is unavailable in networks in which NAT or IP masquerade is implemented.
Security
239
Using IPSec with IP address lter
●IP address lter settings are applied before the IPSec policies.
Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Rules(P. 219)
Conguring IPSec Settings
Before using IPSec for encrypted communication, you need to register security policies (SP). A security policy consists
of the groups of settings described below. Up to 10 policies can be registered. After registering policies, specify the
order in which they are applied.
Selector
Selector denes conditions for IP packets to apply IPSec communication. Selectable conditions include IP
addresses and port numbers of the machine and the devices to communicate with.
IKE
IKE congures the IKEv1 that is used for key exchange protocol. Note that instructions vary depending on the
authentication method selected.
[Pre-Shared Key Method]
A key of up to 24 alphanumeric characters can be shared with the other devices. Enable SSL for the Remote UI
before specifying this authentication method ( Enabling SSL Encrypted Communication for the Remote
UI(P. 235) ).
[Digital Signature Method]
The machine and the other devices authenticate each other by mutually verifying their digital signatures.
Generate or install the key pair beforehand ( Using CA-issued Key Pairs and Digital Certicates(P. 262) ).
AH/ESP
Specify the settings for AH/ESP, which is added to packets during IPSec communication. AH and ESP can be used
at the same time. You can also select whether or not to enable PFS for tighter security.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote
UI(P. 270)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Security Settings] [IPSec Settings].
Security
240
4Click [Edit].
5Select the [Use IPSec] check box and click [OK].
●If you want the machine to only receive packets that match one of the security policies that you dene in the
steps below, clear the [Receive Non-Policy Packets] check box.
6Click [Register New Policy].
Security
241
7Specify the Policy Settings.
1In the [Policy Name] text box, enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for a name that is used for
identifying the policy.
2Select the [Enable Policy] check box.
8Specify the Selector Settings.
[Local Address]
Click the radio button for the type of IP address of the machine to apply the policy.
[All IP Addresses] Select to use IPSec for all IP packets.
Security
242
[IPv4 Address] Select to use IPSec for all IP packets that are sent to or from the IPv4 address of the
machine.
[IPv6 Address] Select to use IPSec for all IP packets that are sent to or from an IPv6 address of the
machine.
[Remote Address]
Click the radio button for the type of IP address of the other devices to apply the policy.
[All IP Addresses] Select to use IPSec for all IP packets.
[All IPv4 Addresses] Select to use IPSec for all IP packets that are sent to or from IPv4 addresses of the
other devices.
[All IPv6 Addresses] Select to use IPSec for all IP packets that are sent to or from IPv6 addresses of the
other devices.
[IPv4 Manual Settings] Select to specify a single IPv4 address or a range of IPv4 addresses to apply IPSec.
Enter the IPv4 address (or the range) in the [Addresses to Set Manually] text box.
[IPv6 Manual Settings] Select to specify a single IPv6 address or a range of IPv6 addresses to apply IPSec.
Enter the IPv6 address (or the range) in the [Addresses to Set Manually] text box.
[Addresses to Set Manually]
If [IPv4 Manual Settings] or [IPv6 Manual Settings] is selected for [Remote Address], enter the IP address to
apply the policy. You can also enter a range of addresses by inserting a hyphen between the addresses.
Entering IP addresses
Description Example
Entering a single address IPv4:
Delimit numbers with periods.
192.168.0.10
IPv6:
Delimit alphanumeric characters with colons.
fe80::10
Specifying a range of addresses Insert a hyphen between the addresses. 192.168.0.10-192.168.0.20
[Subnet Settings]
When manually specifying IPv4 address, you can express the range by using the subnet mask. Enter the
subnet mask using periods to delimit numbers (example:"255.255.255.240").
[Prex Length]
Specifying the range of IPv6 addresses manually also allows you to specify the range using prexes. Enter a
range between 0 and 128 as the prex length.
[Local Port]/[Remote Port]
If you want to create separate policies for each protocol, such as HTTP or RAW, enter the appropriate port
number for the protocol to determine whether to use IPSec.
IPSec is not applied to the following packets
●Loopback, multicast, and broadcast packets
●IKE packets (using UDP on port 500)
●ICMPv6 neighbor solicitation and neighbor advertisement packets
9Specify the IKE Settings.
Security
243
[IKE Mode]
The mode used for the key exchange protocol is displayed. The machine supports the main mode, not the
aggressive mode.
[Authentication Method]
Select [Pre-Shared Key Method] or [Digital Signature Method] for the method used when authenticating the
machine. You need to enable SSL for the Remote UI before selecting [Pre-Shared Key Method] ( Enabling
SSL Encrypted Communication for the Remote UI(P. 235) ). You need to generate or install a key pair
before selecting [Digital Signature Method] ( Conguring Settings for Key Pairs and Digital
Certicates(P. 253) ).
[Valid for]
Specify how long a session lasts for IKE SA (ISAKMP SA). Enter the time in minutes.
[Authentication]/[Encryption]/[DH Group]
Select an algorithm from the drop-down list. Each algorithm is used in the key exchange.
[Authentication] Select the hash algorithm.
[Encryption] Select the encryption algorithm.
[DH Group] Select the Die-Hellman group, which determines the key strength.
Using a pre-shared key for authentication
1Click the [Pre-Shared Key Method] radio button for [Authentication Method] and then click [Shared Key
Settings].
2Enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for the pre-shared key and click [OK].
3Specify the [Valid for] and [Authentication]/[Encryption]/[DH Group] settings.
Security
244
Using a key pair and preinstalled CA certicates for authentication
1Click the [Digital Signature Method] radio button for [Authentication Method] and then click [Key and
Certicate].
2Click [Register Default Key] on the right of a key pair you want to use.
Viewing details of a key pair or certicate
●You can check the details of the certicate or verify the certicate by clicking the corresponding text
link under [Key Name], or the certicate icon. Verifying Key Pairs and Digital Certicates(P. 266)
3Specify the [Valid for] and [Authentication]/[Encryption]/[DH Group] settings.
10 Specify the IPSec Network Settings.
[Use PFS]
Select the check box to enable Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS) for IPSec session keys. Enabling PFS enhances
the security while increasing the load on the communication. Make sure that PFS is also enabled for the other
devices.
[Specify by Time]/[Specify by Size]
Set the conditions for terminating a session for IPSec SA. IPSec SA is used as a communication tunnel. Select
either or both of the check boxes as necessary. If both check boxes are selected, the IPSec SA session is
terminated when either of the conditions has been satised.
[Specify by Time] Enter a time in minutes to specify how long a session lasts.
[Specify by Size] Enter a size in megabytes to specify how much data can be transported in a session.
Security
245
[Select Algorithm]
Select the [ESP], [ESP (AES-GCM)], or [AH (SHA1)] check box(es) depending on the IPSec header and the
algorithm used. AES-GCM is an algorithm for both authentication and encryption. If [ESP] is selected, also
select algorithms for authentication and encryption from the [ESP Authentication] and [ESP Encryption] drop-
down lists.
[ESP Authentication] To enable the ESP authentication, select [SHA1] for the hash algorithm. Select [Do Not
Use] if you want to disable the ESP authentication.
[ESP Encryption] Select the encryption algorithm for ESP. You can select [NULL] if you do not want to
specify the algorithm, or select [Do Not Use] if you want to disable the ESP encryption.
[Connection Mode]
The connection mode of IPSec is displayed. The machine supports transport mode, in which the payloads of
IP packets are encrypted. Tunnel mode, in which whole IP packets (headers and payloads) are encapsulated
is not available.
11 Click [OK].
●If you need to register an additional security policy, return to step 6.
12 Arrange the order of policies listed under [Registered IPSec Policies].
●Policies are applied from one at the highest position to the lowest. Click [Up] or [Down] to move a policy up or
down the order.
Editing a policy
●Click the corresponding text link under [Policy Name] for the edit screen.
Deleting a policy
●Click [Delete] on the right of the policy name you want to delete click [OK].
13 Restart the machine.
●Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
Security
246
Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication
0W20-04L
The machine can connect to an 802.1X network as a client device. A typical 802.1X network consists of a RADIUS server
(authentication server), LAN switch (authenticator), and client devices with authentication software (supplicants). If a
device tries to connect to the 802.1X network, the device must go through user authentication in order to prove that
the connection is made by an authorized user. Authentication information is sent to and checked by a RADIUS server,
which permits or rejects communication to the network depending on the authentication result. If authentication fails,
a LAN switch (or an access point) blocks access from the outside of the network.
Select the authentication method from the options below. If necessary, install or register a key pair or CA certicate
before conguring IEEE 802.1X authentication ( Using CA-issued Key Pairs and Digital Certicates(P. 262) ).
TLS
The machine and the authentication server authenticate each other by mutually verifying their certicates. A
key pair issued by a certication authority (CA) is required for the client authentication (when authenticating the
machine). For the server authentication, a CA certicate installed via the Remote UI can be used in addition to a
CA certicate preinstalled in the machine. The TLS method cannot be used with TTLS or PEAP at the same time.
TTLS
This authentication method uses a user name and password for the client authentication and a CA certicate for
the server authentication. MSCHAPv2 or PAP can be selected as the internal protocol. TTLS can be used with
PEAP at the same time. Enable SSL for the Remote UI before conguring this authentication method (
Enabling SSL Encrypted Communication for the Remote UI(P. 235) ).
PEAP
The required settings are almost the same as those of TTLS. MS-CHAPv2 is used as the internal protocol. Enable
SSL for the Remote UI before conguring this authentication method ( Enabling SSL Encrypted
Communication for the Remote UI(P. 235) ).
1Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote
UI(P. 270)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
Security
248
3Click [Network Settings] [IEEE 802.1X Settings].
4Click [Edit].
5Select the [Use IEEE 802.1X] check box, enter the login name in the [Login Name] text
box, and specify the required settings.
Security
249
[Use IEEE 802.1X]
Select the check box to enable IEEE 802.1X authentication.
[Login Name]
Enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for a name (EAP identity) that is used for identifying the user.
Setting TLS
1Select the [Use TLS] check box and click [Key and Certicate].
2Click [Register Default Key] on the right of the key pair you want to use for the client authentication.
Viewing details of a key pair or certicate
●You can check the details of the certicate or verify the certicate by clicking the corresponding text
link under [Key Name], or the certicate icon. Verifying Key Pairs and Digital Certicates(P. 266)
Setting TTLS/PEAP
1Select the [Use TTLS] or [Use PEAP] check box.
Security
250
Internal protocol for TTLS
●You can select MSCHAPv2 or PAP. If you want to use PAP, click the [PAP] radio button.
2Click [Change User Name/Password].
●To specify a user name other than the login name, clear the [Use Login Name as User Name] check
box. Select the check box if you want to use the login name as the user name.
3Set the user name/password and click [OK].
[User Name]
Enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for the user name.
Security
251
[Change Password]
To set or change the password, select the check box and enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for the
new password both in the [Password] and [Conrm] text boxes.
6Click [OK].
7Restart the machine.
●Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
Using the operation panel
●You can also enable or disable IEEE 802.1X authentication by pressing on the operation panel. IEEE
802.1X Settings(P. 299)
LINKS
Conguring Settings for Key Pairs and Digital Certicates(P. 253)
Security
252
Conguring Settings for Key Pairs and Digital
Certicates
0W20-04R
In order to encrypt communication with a remote device, an encryption key must be sent and received over an
unsecured network beforehand. This problem is solved by public-key cryptography. Public-key cryptography ensures
secure communication by protecting important and valuable information from attacks, such as sning, spoong, and
tampering of data as it ows over a network.
Key Pair
A key pair consists of a public key and a secret key, both of which are required for encrypting or
decrypting data. Because data that has been encrypted with one of the key pair cannot be
returned to its original data form without the other, public-key cryptography ensures secure
communication of data over the network. Up to ve key pairs, including the preinstalled pairs,
can be registered ( Using CA-issued Key Pairs and Digital Certicates(P. 262) ). For SSL
encrypted communication, a key pair can be generated for the machine ( Generating Key
Pairs(P. 254) ).
CA Certicate
Digital certicates including CA certicates are similar to other forms of identication, such as
driver's licenses. A digital certicate contains a digital signature, which enables the machine to
detect any spoong or tampering of data. It is extremely dicult for third parties to abuse
digital certicates. A digital certicate that contains a public key of a certication authority (CA)
is referred to as a CA certicate. CA certicates are used for verifying the device the machine is
communicating with for features such as printing with Google Cloud Print or IEEE 802.1X
authentication. Up to 67 CA certicates can be registered, including the 62 certicates that are
preinstalled in the machine ( Using CA-issued Key Pairs and Digital Certicates(P. 262) ).
◼Key and Certicate Requirements
The certicate contained in a key pair generated with the machine conforms to X.509v3. If you install a key pair or a CA
certicate from a computer, make sure that they meet the following requirements:
Format ●Key pair: PKCS#12*1
●CA certicate: X.509v1 or X.509v3, DER (encoded binary)
File extension
●Key pair: ".p12" or ".pfx"
●CA certicate: ".cer"
Public key algorithm
(and key length) RSA (512 bits, 1024 bits, 2048 bits, or 4096 bits)
Certicate signature algorithm SHA1-RSA, SHA256-RSA, SHA384-RSA*2, SHA512-RSA*2, MD5-RSA, or MD2-RSA
Certicate thumbprint algorithm SHA1
*1 Requirements for the certicate contained in a key pair are pursuant to CA certicates.
*2 SHA384-RSA and SHA512-RSA are available only when the RSA key length is 1024 bits or more.
●The machine does not support use of a certicate revocation list (CRL).
Security
253
Generating Key Pairs
0W20-04S
A key pair can be generated with the machine when it is required for encrypted communication via Secure Sockets
Layer (SSL). You can use SSL when accessing the machine via the Remote UI. Up to ve key pairs, including the
preinstalled pairs, can be registered. Self-signed certicates are used with key pairs generated in "Network
Communication". With a "Key and Certicate Signing Request (CSR)", you can apply for a CA-issued digital certicate
for the key pair generated by the machine.
Generate Network Communication Key(P. 254)
Generate Key and Certicate Signing Request (CSR)(P. 257)
Generate Network Communication Key
1Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote
UI(P. 270)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Security Settings] [Key and Certicate Settings].
Security
254
4Click [Generate Key].
Deleting a registered key pair
●Click [Delete] on the right of the key pair you want to delete click [OK].
●A key pair cannot be deleted if it is currently used for some purpose, such as when "SSL" or "IEEE 802.1X",
is displayed under [Key Usage]. In this case, disable the function or replace the key pair before deleting it.
5Select [Network Communication] and click [OK].
6Specify settings for the key and certicate.
Security
255
[Key Settings]
[Key Name]
Enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for naming the key pair. Set a name that will be easy for you to
nd later in a list.
[Signature Algorithm]
Select the signature algorithm from the drop-down list.
[Key Algorithm]
RSA is used for generating a key pair. Select the key length from the drop-down list. The larger the
number for the key length, the slower the communication. However, the security is tighter.
[512-bit] cannot be selected for the key length, if [SHA384] or [SHA512] is selected for [Signature
Algorithm].
[Certicate Settings]
[Validity Start Date (YYYY/MM/DD)]
Enter the validity start date of the certicate in the range between 01/01/2000 and31/12/2037, in the
order of: year, month, day.
[Validity End Date (YYYY/MM/DD)]
Enter the validity end date of the certicate in the range between 01/01/2000 and31/12/2037, in the
order of: year, month, day. A date earlier than [Validity Start Date (YYYY/MM/DD)] cannot be set.
[Country/Region]
Click the [Select Country/Region] radio button and select the country/region from the drop-down list.
You can also click the [Enter Internet Country Code] radio button and enter a country code, such as "US"
for the United States.
[State]/[City]
Enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for the location as necessary.
[Organization]/[Organization Unit]
Enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for the organization name as necessary.
[Common Name]
Enter up to 48 alphanumeric characters for the common name of the certicate as necessary. "Common
Name" is often abbreviated as "CN."
7Click [OK].
Security
256
●Keys for network communication may take approximately 10 to 15 minutes to generate.
●After a key pair is generated, it is automatically registered to the machine.
Generate Key and Certicate Signing Request (CSR)
1Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote UI(P. 270)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Security Settings] [Key and Certicate Settings].
4Click [Generate Key].
Security
257
Deleting a registered key pair
●Click [Delete] on the right of the key pair you want to delete click [OK].
●A key pair cannot be deleted if it is currently used for some purpose, such as when "SSL" or "IEEE 802.1X",
is displayed under [Key Usage]. In this case, disable the function or replace the key pair before deleting it.
5Select [Key and Certicate Signing Request (CSR)] and click [OK].
6Specify settings for the key and certicate.
[Key Settings]
Security
258
[Key Name]
Enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for naming the key pair. Set a name that will be easy for you to
nd later in a list.
[Signature Algorithm]
Select the signature algorithm from the drop-down list.
[Key Algorithm]
RSA is used for generating a key pair. Select the key length from the drop-down list. The larger the
number for the key length, the slower the communication. However, the security is tighter.
[512-bit] cannot be selected for the key length, if [SHA384] or [SHA512] is selected for [Signature
Algorithm].
[Certicate Signing Request (CSR) Settings]
[Country/Region]
Click the [Select Country/Region] radio button and select the country/region from the drop-down list.
You can also click the [Enter Internet Country Code] radio button and enter a country code, such as "US"
for the United States.
[State]/[City]
Enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for the location as necessary.
[Organization]/[Organization Unit]
Enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for the organization name as necessary.
[Common Name]
Enter up to 48 alphanumeric characters for the common name of the certicate as necessary. "Common
Name" is often abbreviated as "CN."
7Click [OK].
●Key and Certicate Signing Request (CSR) may take approximately 10 to 15 minutes to generate.
8Click [Store in File].
●A dialog box for storing the le appears. Choose where to store the le and click [Save].
➠The Key and Certicate Signing Request (CSR) le is stored on the computer.
9Attach the stored le and submit the application to the certication authority.
Security
259
◼Register the digital certicate issued by the certication authority.
You cannot use the key pair generated by the Certicate Signing Request (CSR) until the certicate is registered. Once
the certication authority has issued the digital certicate, register it using the procedure below.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote
UI(P. 270)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Security Settings] [Key and Certicate Settings].
4Click [Key Name] or [Certicate] for the certicate to be registered.
5Click [Register Certicate].
6Click [Browse], specify the le for the certicate signing request, and click [Register].
Security
260
Using CA-issued Key Pairs and Digital Certicates
0W20-04U
Key pairs and digital certicates can be obtained from a certication authority (CA) for use with the machine. You can
store and then register these les by using the Remote UI. Make sure that the key pair and the certicate satisfy the
requirements of the machine ( Key and Certicate Requirements(P. 253) ). Up to 5 key pairs (including the
preinstalled ones) can be registered, and up to 67 CA certicates (including the 62 preinstalled ones) can be registered.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote
UI(P. 270)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Security Settings] [Key and Certicate Settings] or [CA Certicate Settings].
●Click [Key and Certicate Settings] to install a key pair, or [CA Certicate Settings] to install a CA certicate.
Security
262
4Click [Register Key and Certicate] or [Register CA Certicate].
Deleting a registered key pair or CA certicate
●Click [Delete] on the right of the key pair or CA certicate you want to delete click [OK]. You cannot
delete the preinstalled CA certicates.
●A key pair cannot be deleted if it is currently used for some purpose, such as when "[SSL]" or "[IEEE
802.1X]" is displayed under [Key Usage]. In this case, disable the function or replace the key pair before
deleting it. The preinstalled CA certicate cannot be deleted.
Disabling or enabling the preinstalled CA certicates
●Click [Disable] on the right of the preinstalled CA certicate you want to disable. To enable the certicate
again, click [Enable] on the right of the certicate.
5Click [Install].
Deleting a key pair or CA certicate
●Click [Delete] on the right of the le you want to delete, and then click [OK].
6Click [Browse], specify the le to install, and click [Start Installation].
Security
263
●The key pair or CA certicate is installed in the machine.
7Register the key pair or CA certicate.
Registering a key pair
1Click [Register] on the right of the key pair you want to register.
2Enter the name of the key pair and password, and then click [OK].
[Key Name]
Enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for the name of the key pair to be registered.
[Password]
Enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for the password of the private key set for the le to be
registered.
Registering a CA certicate
Click [Register] on the right of the CA certicate you want to register.
Security
264
Verifying Key Pairs and Digital Certicates
0W20-04W
Once key pairs and CA certicates are registered, you can view their detailed information or verify them for validity
and signature.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote
UI(P. 270)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Security Settings] [Key and Certicate Settings] or [CA Certicate Settings].
●Click [Key and Certicate Settings] to verify a key pair, or [CA Certicate Settings] to verify a CA certicate.
4Click the icon for the key pair or certicate that you want to verify.
Security
266
Using Remote UI
Using Remote UI ............................................................................................................................................. 269
Starting Remote UI ........................................................................................................................................... 270
Remote UI Screens ............................................................................................................................................ 272
Managing Documents and Checking the Machine Status .............................................................................. 275
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI ...................................................................................................... 279
Saving/Loading Registered Data ...................................................................................................................... 281
Saving Registered Data ................................................................................................................................ 282
Loading Registered Data .............................................................................................................................. 284
Using Remote UI
268
Using Remote UI
0W20-04X
Using a Web browser to operate the machine remotely, you can check the documents waiting to be printed or the
status of the machine. You can also make some settings for the machine. You can do this without leaving your desk,
making system management easier.
Functions of the Remote UI
Managing Documents and Checking the Machine Status(P. 275)
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 279)
Saving/Loading Registered Data(P. 281)
Basics of the Remote UI
Starting Remote UI(P. 270)
Remote UI Screens(P. 272)
System Requirements
The following environment is required to use the Remote UI. In addition, set the Web browser to enable
Cookies.
Windows
●Windows Vista/7/8
●Microsoft Internet Explorer 9.0 or later
Mac
●Mac OS X 10.5.8 or later (except for Classic environment)
●Safari 5.0.6 or later
Using Remote UI
269
Starting Remote UI
0W20-04Y
To operate remotely, you need to input the IP address of the machine into a Web browser and start the Remote UI.
Check the IP address set to the machine in advance ( Viewing Network Settings(P. 161) ). If you have any
questions, ask your Network Administrator.
1Start the Web browser.
2Enter "http://(the IP address of the machine)/" in the address eld, and press the
[ENTER] key.
●If you want to use an IPv6 address, enclose the IPv6 address with brackets (example: http://
[fe80::2e9e:fcff:fe4e:dbce]/).
If a security alert is displayed
●A security alert may be displayed when the Remote UI communication is encrypted ( Enabling SSL
Encrypted Communication for the Remote UI(P. 235) ). When certicate settings or SSL settings have no
errors, continue browsing the Web site.
3Log on to the Remote UI.
When the Department ID Management is disabled
Select [System Manager Mode] or [General User Mode].
[System Manager Mode]
You can perform all the Remote UI operations and settings. Enter the appropriate ID in [System Manager
ID] and PIN in [System Manager PIN] ( Setting the System Manager ID(P. 207) ). If [System Manager
ID] is not set, you do not need to input anything.
[General User Mode]
Using Remote UI
270
You can check the status of documents or the machine, and you can also change some of the settings. If
you wish to delete your print documents, enter the user name of the documents in [User Name]. The user
name is automatically set to print documents based on information such as your computer name or
computer logon name.
[Remote UI Access PIN]
If [Remote UI Access PIN] is displayed, enter the PIN ( Setting a Remote UI PIN(P. 216) ).
When the Department ID Management is enabled
Enter the appropriate ID in [Department ID] and PIN in [PIN] ( Setting the Department ID
Management(P. 209) ).
4Click [Log In].
●Portal Page (main page) will be displayed. Remote UI Screens(P. 272)
Using Remote UI
271
Remote UI Screens
0W20-050
This section describes the typical screens of the Remote UI.
Portal Page (Main Page)(P. 272)
[Status Monitor/Cancel] Page(P. 273)
[Settings/Registration] Page(P. 274)
Portal Page (Main Page)
[Log Out]
Logs off from the Remote UI. The Login page will be displayed.
[Mail to System Manager]
Displays a window for creating an e-mail to the system manager specied in [System Manager Information]
under [System Management].
Refresh Icon
Refreshes the currently displayed page.
Device Basic Information
Displays the current status of the machine and error information. If an error has occurred, the link to the
Error Information page will be displayed.
Consumables Information
Displays paper information and the amount remaining in the toner cartridge.
Using Remote UI
272
Support Link
Displays the support link specied in [Device Information] under [System Management].
[Status Monitor/Cancel]
Displays [Status Monitor/Cancel] page. You can use this page to check the current printing status, cancel
print processing, and view a history of print jobs.
[Settings/Registration]
Displays [Settings/Registration] page. When you have logged on in System Manager Mode, you can change
the settings items and save/load the registered data. Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 279)
[Status Monitor/Cancel] Page
[To Portal]
Returns to Portal Page (main page).
Menu
Click an item, and the content is displayed in the right page. Managing Documents and Checking the
Machine Status(P. 275)
Breadcrumb Trail
Indicates the series of pages you opened to display the currently displayed page. You can check what page is
currently displayed.
Refresh Icon
Refreshes the currently displayed page.
Top Icon
Moves the scroll box up to the top of the page when the page is scrolled down.
Using Remote UI
273
[Settings/Registration] Page
[To Portal]
Returns to Portal Page (main page).
Menu
Click an item, the content is displayed in the right page. Setting Up Menu Options from Remote
UI(P. 279)
Breadcrumb Trail
Indicates the series of pages you opened to display the currently displayed page. You can check what page is
currently displayed.
Top Icon
Moves the scroll box up to the top of the page when the page is scrolled down.
System Management Settings
●You can only set [System Management Settings] when you have logged on in System Manager Mode.
●When you have logged on in General User Mode, only [System Management] will be displayed.
Using Remote UI
274
Managing Documents and Checking the Machine
Status
0W20-051
Checking Current Status of Print Documents(P. 275)
Checking History of Documents(P. 276)
Checking Error Information(P. 276)
Checking Consumables(P. 276)
Checking Device Specications(P. 277)
Checking System Manager Information(P. 278)
Checking Print Total Counter(P. 278)
●As for document le name, up to 256 characters are displayed depending on the type of character. The
printed application name may be added to the le name.
Checking Current Status of Print Documents
The list of the documents currently printing or waiting to be printed is displayed.
Log on to the Remote UI ( Starting Remote UI(P. 270) ) [Status Monitor/Cancel] [Job Status]
You can delete a document job by clicking [Cancel].
●Regardless of the Department ID Management setting, all the print documents currently printing and
waiting to be printed will be listed.
●If you entered your user name when you logged on in General User Mode, your user name will only
be displayed on the documents that you printed.
●Click [Job Number] on the paused documents and secure documents to display detailed information.
You can check the user name and the page count of the printed document.
Using Remote UI
275
Checking History of Documents
The history of print is displayed up to 128 jobs.
Log on to the Remote UI ( Starting Remote UI(P. 270) ) [Status Monitor/Cancel] [Job Log]
Checking Error Information
When an error occurs, this page will be displayed by clicking the message displayed under [Error Information] on
Portal Page (main page). Portal Page (Main Page)(P. 272)
Log on to the Remote UI ( Starting Remote UI(P. 270) ) [Status Monitor/Cancel] [Error
Information]
Checking Consumables
Paper size and paper type for the paper source, toner cartridge model number, etc. are displayed. You can also click
[Check Consumables Details] in the Portal Page (main page) to display the screen for checking consumables.
Using Remote UI
276
Log in to the Remote UI ( Starting Remote UI(P. 270) ) [Status Monitor/Cancel]
[Consumables]
Click [Access Purchasing Site] to display the page for purchasing consumables.
When [Access Purchasing Site] is not displayed
On the operation panel, set <Display Consumables Purchase Button (RUI)> to <On>.
Display Consumables Information (RUI/Toner Status)(P. 342)
Checking Device Specications
Information including maximum print speed and machine's hardware features is displayed.
Log on to the Remote UI ( Starting Remote UI(P. 270) ) [Status Monitor/Cancel] [Device
Features]
Using Remote UI
277
Checking System Manager Information
Information about the machine and the system manager is displayed. This information is set in [System Management]
on the [Settings/Registration] page. System Management Settings(P. 337)
Log on to the Remote UI ( Starting Remote UI(P. 270) ) [Status Monitor/Cancel] [Device
Information]
Checking Print Total Counter
The total number of pages that have been printed is displayed.
Log on to the Remote UI ( Starting Remote UI(P. 270) ) [Status Monitor/Cancel] [Check
Counter]
LINKS
Remote UI Screens(P. 272)
Using Remote UI
278
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI
0W20-052
You can change the various machine settings by using the Remote UI. Most of the settings can be set also on the
machine, but some settings can only be set using the Remote UI.
●Some settings can only be changed when you have logged on in System Manager Mode.
1Start the Remote UI. Starting Remote UI(P. 270)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click the menu item you want to set, and click [Edit].
●For more information about the settings menu, see each item below
Menu items Referents
Preferences
Using Remote UI
279
Menu items Referents
Paper Settings Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 50)
Display Settings Preferences(P. 302)
Timer Settings Timer Settings(P. 307)
Sound Volume Control Volume Settings(P. 302)
Function Settings
Common Settings Common Settings(P. 311)
Printer Settings Printer Settings(P. 313)
Output Report Settings Printing Reports and Lists(P. 409)
System Management Settings
System Management System Management Settings(P. 337)
Department ID Management Setting the Department ID Management(P. 209)
Network Settings Network(P. 131)
Security Settings Security(P. 202)
Import/Export Saving/Loading Registered Data(P. 281)
Initialize Setting Information Initializing Menu(P. 423)
LINKS
Remote UI Screens(P. 272)
Using Remote UI
280
Saving/Loading Registered Data
0W20-053
Menu options data that has been registered in the machine can be saved in your computer (export). Data that is saved
on your computer can also be registered in the machine (import). Data exported from this machine can be imported to
another machine of the same model. So you can easily copy a variety of settings data to multiple machines. To use
these features, it is required that you have logged on in System Manager Mode.
Saving Registered Data(P. 282)
Loading Registered Data(P. 284)
Do not turn OFF the machine until the export/import process is complete
●It may take a few minutes to complete the process. If the machine is turned OFF during the process, it may
result in damage to data or the machine.
Do not operate the machine during the export/import process
●Before exporting/importing, check that no operation such as printing documents is currently processing.
Settings that cannot be imported/exported
●See Setting Menu List(P. 287) .
Import/export using the operation panel
●Using USB memory, settings can be imported and exported from the Settings menu in the operation panel.
Using a USB Memory Device to Save/Load Registered Data(P. 417)
Using Remote UI
281
Saving Registered Data
0W20-054
You can export machine settings data and save them in your computer. It is recommended that you regularly back up
important settings.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote
UI(P. 270)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Import/Export] [Export].
4Set the encryption password.
Using Remote UI
282
[Encryption Password]
Enter an encryption password up of up to 32 alphanumeric characters. Enter the same password in
[Conrm]. To export the data, you must set an encryption password.
●The password is required when exported data is imported.
5Click [Start Exporting].
6Follow the on-screen instructions to specify the location where the exported setting
data is saved.
●The setting data will be saved.
LINKS
Remote UI Screens(P. 272)
Setting Menu List(P. 287)
Using Remote UI
283
Loading Registered Data
0W20-055
Load (import) data that was exported from the machine. You can also import settings from another machine if it is the
same model as your machine.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote
UI(P. 270)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Import/Export] [Import].
4Specify the le to import, and enter the password.
Using Remote UI
284
[File Path]
Either click [Browse] and select the le, or if the le's save destination is known, enter it in [File Path] directly.
[Decryption Password]
Enter the password set when the settings were exported.
5Click [Start Importing].
6Click [OK].
●The selected settings data is loaded into the machine.
7Click [OK].
●The machine automatically restarts.
LINKS
Remote UI Screens(P. 272)
Setting Menu List(P. 287)
Using Remote UI
285
Setting Menu List
Setting Menu List ........................................................................................................................................... 287
Paper Settings (LBP252dw) ............................................................................................................................... 288
Direct Connection .............................................................................................................................................. 289
Network Settings .............................................................................................................................................. 290
Output Reports .................................................................................................................................................. 301
Preferences ........................................................................................................................................................ 302
Timer Settings ................................................................................................................................................... 307
Common Settings .............................................................................................................................................. 311
Printer Settings ................................................................................................................................................. 313
Adjustment/Maintenance ................................................................................................................................. 332
System Management Settings .......................................................................................................................... 337
Setting Menu List
286
Setting Menu List
0W20-056
There are various settings in this machine. You can adjust each of the settings in detail. Access these settings by
pressing on the operation panel.
●You can print the setting menu in list form to check the current settings:
User Data List/System Manager Data List(P. 411)
Setting Menu List
287
Paper Settings
0W20-05J
You can specify the paper size and type for each paper source. You can also register
custom paper sizes and limit the paper sizes that will be displayed. Specifying
Paper Size and Type(P. 50)
Asterisks (*)
●Settings marked with an asterisk (*) are only available when the optional paper feeder (drawer 2) is attached.
Multi-Purpose Tray
Drawer 1
Drawer 2*
Register Custom Paper
Select Frequently Used Paper Sizes
Setting Menu List
288
Network Settings
0W20-057
All the settings about the network are listed with short descriptions. Default settings
are marked with a dagger ( ).
Asterisks (*)
●Settings marked with an asterisk (*) cannot be imported or exported.
Select Wired/Wireless LAN(P. 290)
Wireless LAN Settings(P. 290)
Enable Direct Connection(P. 292)
TCP/IP Settings(P. 292)
SNMP Settings(P. 298)
Dedicated Port Settings(P. 298)
Waiting Time for Connection at Startup(P. 299)
Ethernet Driver Settings(P. 299)
IEEE 802.1X Settings(P. 299)
Device Settings Management On/Off(P. 300)
Initialize Network Settings(P. 300)
Select Wired/Wireless LAN
When switching the machine from Wireless LAN to Wired LAN, you need to specify the setting. Conversely, when
switching the machine from Wired LAN to Wireless LAN, you do not need to specify this setting (You can switch using
the following <Wireless LAN Settings>). Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN(P. 134)
Wired LAN
Wireless LAN
Wireless LAN Settings
Specify settings for connecting the machine to a wireless LAN. You can also view the current settings or specify the
setting for saving power consumption.
WPS Push Button Mode
Select to automatically congure a wireless connection by using the button on a WPS wireless router. Setting
Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode(P. 138)
WPS PIN Code Mode
Select to congure a wireless connection by entering a PIN code for a WPS wireless router. Setting Up
Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode(P. 140)
Setting Menu List
290
SSID Settings
Select to congure a wireless connection by specifying information including an SSID or a network key by
inputting manually from the operation panel.
Select Access Point
Wireless LAN routers that can access the machine are automatically located, so you can select from the list.
You must manually enter a network key, such as a WEP key or a PSK. Setting Up Connection by Selecting
a Wireless Router(P. 143)
Enter Manually
Select to congure a wireless connection by manually entering an SSID. By using this method, you can specify
authentication and encryption settings in detail. Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed
Settings(P. 146)
Security Settings
None
WEP
Open System
Select WEP Key: 1/2/3/4
Edit WEP Key
Shared Key
Select WEP Key: 1/2/3/4
Edit WEP Key
WPA/WPA2-PSK
Auto
AES-CCMP
Power Save Mode
Select whether or not the machine enters Power Save Mode based on signals emitted from the wireless router.
Off
On
<Network Settings> <Wireless LAN Settings> Read the displayed
message <Power Save Mode> Select <Off> or <On>
Connection Information
Select to view the current wireless LAN settings. Viewing Network Settings(P. 161)
MAC Address
Wireless LAN Status
Latest Error Information
Channel
SSID Settings
Security Settings
Power Save Mode
Setting Menu List
291
Enable Direct Connection *
Set whether to connect directly. By enabling this function, connecting directly with the machine is possible even in an
environment without an access point or wireless LAN router.
Off
On
<Network Settings> <Enable Direct Connection> Select <Off> or <On>
Restart the machine
Setting <Enable Direct Connection> to <On> prevents use of a wired LAN or any wireless LAN other than Direct
Connection.
TCP/IP Settings
Specify settings for using the machine in a TCP/IP network, such as IP address settings.
IPv4 Settings
Specify settings for using the machine in an IPv4 network.
IP Address Settings
Congure the IP address, which is used for identifying devices, such as computers and printers, on a TCP/IP
network. Setting IPv4 Address(P. 154)
Auto Acquire
Select Protocol
Off
DHCP
Auto IP
Off
On
Manually Acquire
IP Address: 0.0.0.0
Subnet Mask: 0.0.0.0
Gateway Address: 0.0.0.0
Check Settings
Auto Acquire
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Gateway Address
Setting Menu List
292
PING Command
Select to check that the machine is connected to a computer over a network. Testing the Network
Connection(P. 156)
DNS Settings
Specify settings for Domain Name System (DNS), which provides a host name for IP address resolutions.
Conguring DNS(P. 181)
DNS Server Settings
Primary DNS Server: 0.0.0.0
Secondary DNS Server: 0.0.0.0
DNS Host Name/Domain Name Settings
Host Name
Domain Name
DNS Dynamic Update Settings
Off
On
DNS Dynamic Update Interval
0 to 24 to 48 (hr.)
mDNS Settings
Specify settings for using DNS functions without DNS servers. Conguring DNS(P. 181)
Off
On
mDNS Name
DHCP Option Settings
If DHCP is enabled, use these settings to select whether to use the DHCP optional functions to acquire the
DNS server address or the domain name. Conguring DNS(P. 181)
Acquire Host Name
Off
On
DNS Dynamic Update
Off
On
Acquire DNS Server Address
Off
On
Acquire Domain Name
Off
On
Acquire WINS Server Address
Off
On
Setting Menu List
293
IPv6 Settings
Specify settings for using the machine in an IPv6 network.
Use IPv6
Enable or disable IPv6 in the machine. You can also view the current settings. Setting IPv6
Addresses(P. 157)
Off
On
Check Settings
Link-Local Address
Prex Length
Stateless Address Settings
Enable or disable stateless addresses. Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 157)
Off
On
Check Settings
Stateless Address
Prex Length
Use DHCPv6
Enable or disable the stateful address that is acquired via DHCPv6. Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 157)
Off
On
Check Settings
Stateful Address
Prex Length
DNS Settings
Specify settings for Domain Name System (DNS), which provides a host name for IP address resolutions.
Conguring DNS(P. 181)
DNS Host Name/Domain Name Settings
Use IPv4 Host/Domain
Off
Host Name
Domain Name
On
DNS Dynamic Update Settings
Setting Menu List
294
Off
On
Register Manual Address
Off
On
Register Stateful Address
Off
On
Register Stateless Address
Off
On
DNS Dynamic Update Interval
0 to 24 to 48 (hr.)
mDNS Settings
Specify settings for using DNS functions without DNS servers. Conguring DNS(P. 181)
Off
On
Use Same mDNS Name as IPv4
Off
mDNS Name
On
DHCP Option Settings
If DHCP is enabled, use these settings to select whether to use the DHCP optional functions to acquire the
DNS server address or the domain name. Conguring DNS(P. 181)
Acquire DNS Server Address
Off
On
Acquire Domain Name
Off
On
WINS Settings
Specify settings for Windows Internet Name Service (WINS), which provides a NetBIOS name for IP address
resolutions in a mixed network environment of NetBIOS and TCP/IP. Conguring WINS(P. 186)
WINS Resolution
Off
On
WINS Server Address: 0.0.0.0
LPD Settings
Enable or disable LPD, a printing protocol that can be used on any hardware platform or operating system. You
can also set the reception timeout period after which printing is canceled if print data reception is interrupted.
Conguring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions(P. 165)
LPD Print Settings
Setting Menu List
295
Off
On
RX Timeout
1 to 5 to 60 (min.)
RAW Settings
Enable or disable RAW, a Windows specic printing protocol. You can also set the reception timeout period after
which printing is canceled if print data reception is interrupted. Conguring Printing Protocols and WSD
Functions(P. 165)
RAW Print Settings
Off
On
RX Timeout
1 to 5 to 60 (min.)
WSD Settings
Enable or disable automatic browsing and acquiring information for the printer by using the WSD protocol that
is available on Windows Vista/7/8/Server 2008/Server 2012. Conguring Printing Protocols and WSD
Functions(P. 165)
WSD Print Settings
Use WSD Print
Off
On
Use WSD Browsing
Off
On
Use Multicast Discovery
Off
On
Use HTTP
Enable or disable HTTP, which is required for communications with a computer, such as when using the Remote
UI, WSD printing, or printing with Google Cloud Print. Disabling HTTP Communication(P. 232)
Off
On
IPP Print Settings
Forward data to the machine and congure print settings via the Internet.
Use IPP Printing
Select whether to print using IPP.
Off
On
Setting Menu List
296
<Network Settings> <TCP/IP Settings> <IPP Print Settings> <Use IPP
Printing> Select <On> or <Off>
Use SSL
Select whether to perform encryption by SSL when printing using IPP.
Off
On
<Network Settings> <TCP/IP Settings> <IPP Print Settings> <Use
SSL> Select <On> or <Off>
Port Number Settings
Change port numbers for protocols according to the network environment. Changing Port Numbers(P. 226)
LPD
1 to 515 to 65535
RAW
1 to 9100 to 65535
WSD Multicast Discovery
1 to 3702 to 65535
HTTP
1 to 80 to 65535
Multicast Discovery
1 to 427 to 65535
SNMP
1 to 161 to 65535
MTU Size
Select the maximum size of packets the machine sends or receives. Changing the Maximum Transmission
Unit(P. 179)
1300
1400
1500
Setting Menu List
297
SNMP Settings
Specify the settings for monitoring and controlling the machine from a computer running SNMP-compatible software.
Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP(P. 191)
SNMPv1 Settings
Enable or disable SNMPv1. When enabling SNMPv1, specify a community name and access privileges to
Management Information Base(MIB) objects.
Off
On
<Network Settings> <SNMP Settings> <SNMPv1 Settings> Select
<Off> or <On> Restart the machine
SNMPv3 Settings
Enable or disable SNMPv3. Use the Remote UI to specify detailed settings that are applied when SNMPv3 is
enabled.
Off
On
<Network Settings> <SNMP Settings> <SNMPv3 Settings> Select
<Off> or <On> Restart the machine
Acquire Printer Management Information from Host
Enable or disable the monitoring of printer management information from a networked computer running
SNMP-compatible software.
Off
On
<Network Settings> <SNMP Settings> <Acquire Printer Management
Information from Host> Select <Off> or <On> Restart the machine
Dedicated Port Settings
Enable or disable the dedicated port. The dedicated port is used when printing and when browsing or specifying the
machine settings over the network.
Setting Menu List
298
Off
On
<Network Settings> <Dedicated Port Settings> Select <Off> or
<On> Restart the machine
Waiting Time for Connection at Startup
Specify a wait time for connecting to a network. Select the setting depending on the network environment. Setting a
Wait Time for Connecting to a Network(P. 180)
0 to 300 (sec.)
Ethernet Driver Settings
Select the Ethernet type (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T) and the communication mode of Ethernet (half-duplex/
full-duplex). You can also view the MAC address for wired LAN.
MAC Address
Check the MAC address of the machine, which is a number unique to each communication device. Viewing
the MAC Address for Wired LAN(P. 162)
Auto Detect
Select whether to automatically detect or manually select the communication mode and the Ethernet type.
Conguring Ethernet Settings(P. 177)
Off
Communication Mode
Half Duplex
Full Duplex
Ethernet Type
10BASE-T
100BASE-TX
1000BASE-T
On
IEEE 802.1X Settings *
Enable or disable IEEE 802.1X authentication. Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication(P. 248)
Off
On
Setting Menu List
299
<Network Settings> <IEEE 802.1X Settings> Select <Off> or <On>
Restart the machine
Device Settings Management On/Off
Specify whether to manage data in the machine such as settings data by using an imageWARE Enterprise
Management Console plug-in. For details of the imageWARE Enterprise Management Console, contact your local
authorized Canon dealer.
Off
On
<Network Settings> <Device Settings Management On/Off> Select <Off> or
<On>
Initialize Network Settings
Select to return the Network Settings to the factory defaults. Initialize Menu(P. 345)
Setting Menu List
300
Output Reports
0W20-089
You can check the condition of consumables and the machine settings by printing
reports and lists. Printing Reports and Lists(P. 409)
Asterisks (*)
Reports and lists marked with an asterisk (*) are only available for the LBP252dw.
Print List
Consumables Status Report
User Data List
System Manager Data List
Department ID Management Report
IPSec Policy List
PCL Font List
PS Font List *
Setting Menu List
301
Preferences
0W20-058
All the settings about the sound volume and display are listed with short descriptions.
Default settings are marked with a dagger ( ).
Asterisks (*)
Settings marked with an asterisk (*) have different defaults depending on the country or region of purchase.
Volume Settings(P. 302)
Display Settings(P. 303)
Volume Settings
Adjust the volume of a notication beep the machine generates when a key is pressed on the operation panel, printing
is complete, etc.
Entry Tone
Select whether the machine beeps when a key is pressed on the operation panel.
Off
On
<Preferences> <Volume Settings> <Entry Tone> Select <Off> or
<On>
Invalid Entry Tone
Select whether the machine beeps when an invalid settings value is entered, such as when a user is trying to
enter a number unavailable for a setting.
Off
On
<Preferences> <Volume Settings> <Invalid Entry Tone> Select
<Off> or <On>
Setting Menu List
302
Restock Supplies Tone
Select whether the machine beeps when the toner cartridge is almost empty.
Off
On
<Preferences> <Volume Settings> <Restock Supplies Tone> Select
<Off> or <On>
Job Done Tone
Select whether the machine beeps when printing is complete.
Off
On
<Preferences> <Volume Settings> <Job Done Tone> Select <Off>
or <On>
Energy Saver Alert
Select whether the machine beeps when the machine enters or wakes from sleep mode.
Off
On
<Preferences> <Volume Settings> <Energy Saver Alert> Select
<Off> or <On>
Display Settings
Brightness
Adjust the brightness of the display to suit the installation location of the machine.
Five Levels
Setting Menu List
303
<Preferences> <Display Settings> <Brightness> Use / to
adjust the brightness
Contrast
Adjust the contrast (difference in brightness between light and dark areas) of the display to suit the installation
location of the machine.
Seven Levels
<Preferences> <Display Settings> <Contrast> Use / to
adjust the contrast
Invert Screen Colors
Select <On> to invert the display colors. Select <On> if the display is hard to view even after the brightness was
adjusted in <Brightness>.
Off
On
<Preferences> <Display Settings> <Invert Screen Colors> Select
<Off> or <On>
Millimeter/Inch Entry Switch
Select the unit of measurement.
Millimeter
Inch
<Preferences> <Display Settings> <Millimeter/Inch Entry
Switch> Select <Millimeter> or <Inch>
Message Display Time
Specify the interval in seconds at which two different messages are alternately displayed.
1 to 2 to 5 (sec.)
Setting Menu List
304
<Preferences> <Display Settings> <Message Display Time> Enter a
number for the interval
Scrolling Speed
Adjust the speed for scrolling the screen by selecting from three levels.
Slow
Standard
Fast
<Preferences> <Display Settings> <Scrolling Speed> Select the
speed
Cursor Movement Type
Congure how the cursor moves after a character is entered on the screen. Select <Auto> to automatically move
the cursor to the right of the entered character after approximately 1 second. Select <Manual> to manually
move the cursor to the right of the entered character.
Auto
Manual
<Preferences> <Display Settings> <Cursor Movement Type> Select
<Auto> or <Manual>
Language*
Select the display language used for the display, reports, and lists.
English ,Japanese, French, Spanish, German, Italian, Dutch, Finnish, Portuguese, Norwegian, Swedish,
Danish, Slovene, Czech, Hungarian, Russian, Turkish, Greek, Estonian, Romanian, Slovak, Croatian,
Bulgarian, Catalan, Polish, Chinese (Simplied), Chinese (Traditional), Korean, Latvian, Lithuanian, Arabic
<Preferences> <Display Settings> <Language> Select a
language
Remote UI Language*
Select the display language used for the Remote UI screens.
Setting Menu List
305
English , Japanese, French, Spanish, German, Italian, Dutch, Finnish, Portuguese, Norwegian, Swedish,
Danish, Czech, Hungarian, Russian, Turkish, Polish, Chinese (Simplied), Chinese (Traditional), Korean
<Preferences> <Display Settings> <Remote UI Language> Select a
language
Setting Menu List
306
Timer Settings
0W20-059
All the settings about the timer are listed with short descriptions. Default settings are
marked with a dagger ( ).
Asterisks (*)
●Settings marked with "*1" may be unavailable or have different defaults depending on the country or region
of purchase.
●Settings marked with "*2" cannot be imported or exported.
Date/Time Settings(P. 307)
Auto Reset Time(P. 309)
Auto Sleep Time(P. 309)
Auto Shutdown Time(P. 309)
Date/Time Settings
Specify date and time settings, including the date format and the 12- or 24-hour clock display setting. The date and
time that are printed on each report and list are determined by these settings.
Date Format *1
Select the date format (order of year, month, and day).
YYYY MM/DD
MM/DD/YYYY
DD/MM YYYY
<Timer Settings> <Date/Time Settings> <Date Format> Select the
date format
Time Format
Select the 12- or 24-hour clock display setting.
12 Hour (AM/PM)
24 Hour
Setting Menu List
307
<Timer Settings> <Date/Time Settings> <Time Format> Select the
display setting
Current Date/Time Settings *2
Set the current date and time. Use / to move the cursor, and / to specify the date and time or
switch between <AM>/<PM>.
●Set <Time Zone> before setting the current date and time. If the <Time Zone> setting is changed, the
current date and time are also changed accordingly.
<Timer Settings> <Date/Time Settings> <Current Date/Time
Settings> Set the date and time <Apply>
●The current date and time cannot be changed for 1 hour after daylight saving time is in effect.
Time Zone
Select the time zone. If the time zone setting is changed, the values set in <Current Date/Time Settings> are also
changed accordingly.
(UTC-12:00) International Date Line West to (UTC) Coordinated Universal Time to (UTC+14:00) Christmas
Island
UTC
●Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) is the primary time standard by which the world regulates clocks
and time. The correct UTC time zone setting is required for Internet communications.
<Timer Settings> <Date/Time Settings> <Time Zone> Select a time
zone
Setting Menu List
308
Daylight Saving Time Settings *1
Enable or disable daylight saving time. If daylight saving time is enabled, specify the dates from which and to
which daylight saving time is in effect.
Off
On
Start: Month, Week, Day
End: Month, Week, Day
<Timer Settings> <Date/Time Settings> <Daylight Saving Time
Settings> Select a month and day
Auto Reset Time
If a key is not pressed for a specied period of time, the screen and the settings are initialized to display the default
screen (Auto Reset). Specify the interval at which the Auto Reset is performed. Select <0> to disable the Auto Reset
function. The Auto Reset is not performed in the following cases:
●The setting menu is displayed.
●The machine is processing data, such as when printing documents.
●An error message is displayed and the Error indicator is blinking (However, Auto Reset is performed when the error
does not prevent the user from continuing to use a function.)
0 (Auto Reset is disabled.)
1 to 2 to 9 (min.)
<Timer Settings> <Auto Reset Time> Set the Auto Reset time
Auto Sleep Time
If the machine has not been operated or has had no data to print for a specied period of time, the machine enters
sleep mode to save energy consumption (Auto Sleep). Specify the period of time after which auto sleep is performed.
Auto Sleep is not performed when the setting menu is displayed. We recommend using the factory default settings to
save the most power. Entering Sleep Mode(P. 62)
3 to 60 (min.)
Auto Shutdown Time
Set a timer to automatically shut down the machine after the specied period of idle time has elapsed since the
machine entered the sleep mode. Setting Auto Shutdown Time(P. 66)
Setting Menu List
309
0 (Auto Shutdown is disabled.)
1 to 4 to 8 (hr.)
Setting Menu List
310
Common Settings
0W20-05A
All the settings for paper feed method are listed with short descriptions.Default
settings are marked with a dagger ( ).
Asterisks (*)
●Settings marked with an asterisk (*) are only available when the optional paper feeder (drawer 2) is attached.
Switch Paper Feed Method
Specify this setting when you print a document on paper with logos. To print on paper with logos, you need to change
how the paper loaded in the paper source is facing depending on whether you are performing 1- or 2-sided printing.
However, if you change the setting to <Print Side Priority>, you can use just the same way of paper loading (which side
up or down) both for 1- and 2-sided printing (the logo side face up when using the paper drawer, or the logo side face
down when using the multi-purpose tray). For more information, see Loading Preprinted Paper(P. 46) .
Multi-Purpose Tray
Speed Priority
Print Side Priority
Drawer 1
Speed Priority
Print Side Priority
Drawer 2 *
Speed Priority
Print Side Priority
<Common Settings> <Switch Paper Feed Method> Select the paper
source Select <Speed Priority> or <Print Side Priority>
Paper Sources
Select the paper source that you want to change the setting for.
Setting Menu List
311
<Speed Priority>
When using paper that has been preprinted with a logo, you need to change how it is facing when you
perform 1-sided and 2-sided printing.
We recommend selecting <Speed Priority> if you do not need to consider which side to print on.
<Print Side Priority>
To print on a specic side of paper, you do not need to ip over paper in the paper source whether 1- or 2-
sided printing is selected.
●If <Print Side Priority> is set for a paper source that is loaded with paper you cannot use for 2-sided
printing ( Paper(P. 440) ), <Speed Priority> is applied to the paper source instead. In this case, you need
to load the paper in the same way as when <Speed Priority> is selected ( Loading Preprinted
Paper(P. 46) ).
●1-sided printing speed may be slower when <Print Side Priority> is selected.
Setting Menu List
312
Printer Settings
0W20-05E
All the settings about the printer are listed with short descriptions. Default settings
are marked with a dagger ( ).
Asterisks (*)
●Settings marked with "*1" are only available when the optional paper feeder (drawer 2) is attached.
●Settings marked with "*2" are only available for the LBP252dw.
Priority of settings
●If a print setting is specied both from the printer driver and the operation panel of the machine, the
specication from the printer driver overrides that from the operation panel. The specication from the
operation panel becomes effective in some specic cases, such as when you are printing from UNIX or other
operating system on which printer drivers for the machine are not available.
Availability of settings
●All the printer settings described in this section, except for <Paper Size Override> ( Paper Size
Override(P. 315) ), are only available for PS/PCL printing. Specifying these settings is unnecessary, for
example, when you print using the UFR II printer driver.
Action When Free Paper Size Mismatch(P. 313)
Copies(P. 314)
2-Sided Printing(P. 315)
Default Paper(P. 315)
Paper Size Override(P. 315)
Print Quality(P. 315)
Layout(P. 317)
Auto Error Skip(P. 319)
Timeout(P. 320)
Personality(P. 320)
UFR II(P. 320)
PCL(P. 321)
PS(P. 326)
XPS(P. 328)
Imaging(P. 331)
Action When Free Paper Size Mismatch
In the case where the paper size for a paper source is set to <Free Size> under <Free Size>, specify the operation to be
performed by the machine when the size of the loaded paper and the paper size setting in the printer driver are rather
different from each other.
Setting Menu List
313
Multi-Purpose Tray
Force Output
Display Error
Drawer 1
Force Output
Display Error
Drawer 2 *1
Force Output
Display Error
<Printer Settings> <Action When Free Paper Size Mismatch> Select the
paper source Select <Force Output> or <Display Error>
Paper Sources
Select the paper source for which you want to specify the operation.
<Force Output>
Perform printing even when the paper size setting in the printer driver and the size of the loaded paper are
rather different.
<Display Error>
Display an error message and do not perform printing when the paper size setting in the printer driver and
the size of the loaded paper are rather different.
●If the settings in the printer driver do not match the size and type of the loaded paper, a paper jam or
printing error may occur.
Copies
Set the number of copies to print.
1 to 99
Setting Menu List
314
<Printer Settings> <Copies> Set the number of copies to print
2-Sided Printing
Select whether to make 2-sided printouts.
Off
On
<Printer Settings> <2-Sided Printing> Select <Off> or <On>
Default Paper
Use this item to specify the paper size and type. Paper(P. 440)
<Printer Settings> <Default Paper> Select the paper size Select the
paper type
Paper Size Override
Select whether to switch between printing on A4 and LTR size paper if one of these paper sizes is loaded but the other
is not. Conguring Printer Settings on the Machine(P. 108)
Off
On
●Most print settings such as setting for number of copies or 1-sided/2-sided printing can be made from
the printer driver or an application software ( Basic Printing Operations(P. 70) ), but the setting for
<Paper Size Override> is required to be made on the machine.
Print Quality
You can change settings related to print quality.
Setting Menu List
315
Density
Adjust the toner density. Adjusting Print Density(P. 405)
Density
17 Levels
Fine Adjust
High
17 Levels
Medium
17 Levels
Low
17 Levels
●The settings specied for <Density> are disabled when <Toner Save> is enabled.
Toner Save
You can save toner consumption. Select <On> when you want to check the layout or other appearance
characteristics before proceeding to nal printing of a large job.
Off
On
<Printer Settings> <Print Quality> <Toner Save> Select <Off> or
<On>
Resolution
Specify the resolution to be used for print data processing.
1200 dpi
600 dpi
<Printer Settings> <Print Quality> <Resolution> Select <1200 dpi>
or <600 dpi>
Barcode Adjustment Mode
If bar codes printed with this machine cannot be read, set this item. The improvement effect is weakest with
<Mode 1> and strongest with <Mode 3>.
Off
Mode 1
Setting Menu List
316
Mode 2
Mode 3
<Printer Settings> <Print Quality> <Barcode Adjustment
Mode> Select the mode
●Print density will be lighter when you select stronger improvement.
●When printing from the computer, the setting in the printer driver takes precedence. When the
setting of [Graphics Mode] in the printer driver is changed to [UFR II Mode] and [Barcode Adjustment
Mode] is changed to [Printer Default], the setting in the operation panel takes precedence.
●When you set this item to one of <Mode 1> to <Mode 3>, <Special Printing Mode A> is automatically
set to <Off>. Special Printing Mode A(P. 334)
Layout
Specify the page layout settings such as binding position and margin values.
Binding Location
If you are binding the printouts with a binding tool such as a stapler, use this item to specify whether to bind on
the long or short edge. Specify the setting of this item in combination with <Gutter>, which species the binding
margin to apply to the binding position.
Long Edge
Short Edge
<Printer Settings> <Layout> <Binding Location> Select <Long
Edge> or <Short Edge>
<Long Edge>
Specify this to bind on the long edge of paper.
Setting Menu List
317
<Short Edge>
Specify this to bind on the short edge of paper.
Gutter
Shift the print position to adjust the binding margin to apply to the binding edge specied by <Binding
Location>. The value "00.0" exerts no effect on the binding margin.
-50.0 to 00.0 to +50.0 (mm)
<Printer Settings> <Layout> <Gutter> Specify the binding
margin
Entering the setting value
Specify the print position shift direction and shift width. Whether the setting value is a "+" or "-" value
determines the binding edge along which to adjust the binding margin. You can adjust the binding margin in
units of 0.5 mm. Use / to move the cursor, and / to switch between "+" / "-" and to increase or
decrease the value.
Setting Value Long Edge Short Edge
A value with a "+" sign Left edge of paper Top edge of paper
A value with a "-" sign Right edge of paper Bottom edge of paper
Offset Short Edge/Offset Long Edge
Irrespective of the paper source, you can shift the print position in units of 0.5 mm for all print jobs.
-50.0 to 00.0 to +50.0 (mm)
Setting Menu List
318
<Printer Settings> <Layout> Select the combination of adjustment direction
and printing side Specify the offset value
<Offset Short Edge (Front)>/<Offset Long Edge (Front)>
Shifts the print position on the side of paper facing up.
<Offset Short Edge (Back)>/<Offset Long Edge (Back)>
Shifts the print position on the side of paper facing down.
Entering the setting value
For <Offset Short Edge (Front)>/<Offset Short Edge (Back)>, specify a value with a "+" sign to shift the print
position in the left-to-right direction. For <Offset Long Edge (Front)>/<Offset Long Edge (Back)>, specify a
value with a "+" sign to shift the print position in the up-to-down direction. To shift in the reverse direction,
specify a value with a "-" sign. Use / to move the cursor, and / to switch between "+" / "-" and
to increase or decrease the value.
<Offset Short Edge (Front)>
<Offset Short Edge (Back)>
<Offset Long Edge (Front)>
<Offset Long Edge (Back)>
Auto Error Skip
Printing stops if a certain error occurs in the process. However, if you set this item to <On>, the certain error will be
skipped and printing can continue. Normally, set this item to <Off>.
Off
On
<Printer Settings> <Auto Error Skip> Select <Off> or <On>
Setting Menu List
319
Timeout
Set the time period after which the current print job is automatically canceled in the case of a print data reception
interruption.
5 to 15 to 300 (sec.)
<Printer Settings> <Timeout> Set the time period
Personality *2
Specify the mode in which the machine should operate when the format of document data is unknown.
Auto
PS
PCL
XPS
<Printer Settings> <Personality> Select the Personality mode
UFR II
You can change the settings that become effective when printing from the UFR II printer driver.
Halftones
You can select the printing method to reproduce halftones (the intermediate range between the lighter and
darker areas of an image) for optimal image quality. For each document, you can make settings by type of
image.
Text
Resolution
Color Tone
Gradation
High Resolution
Graphics
Resolution
Color Tone
Gradation
High Resolution
Image
Setting Menu List
320
Resolution
Color Tone
Gradation
High Resolution
<Printer Settings> <UFR II> <Halftones> Select the type of image
Select the halftone reproduction method
Type of image
Select the object for which to change the setting. <Text> represents letters and characters, <Graphics>
represents lines and gures, and <Image> represents photos and images.
<Resolution>
Produces a ne print with clear edges of text. It is suitable for printing characters and ne lines.
<Color Tone>
Produces a sharp print with strong contrast of lightness and darkness. It is suitable for printing image data
such as photo image data.
<Gradation>
Produces a print with smooth gradation or smooth edges. It is suitable for printing gures or graphs
containing gradation areas.
<High Resolution>
As compared to <Resolution>, this produces a ner print but quality stability is slightly lower. It is suitable to
obtain a print of character data or ne line data or CAD data with sharp edges.
PCL
Specify the PCL printing settings such as page layout and print quality.
Paper Save
Select whether to save paper by not outputting blank pages in documents. By selecting <On>, the machine will
not output blank pages. To output all your document data when printing, including any blank pages that you
have inserted in your document, select <Off>.
Off
On
Setting Menu List
321
<Printer Settings> <PCL> <Paper Save> Select <Off> or <On>
Orientation
Select <Portrait> (vertical orientation) or <Landscape> (horizontal orientation) for the page orientation.
Portrait
Landscape
<Printer Settings> <PCL> <Orientation> Select <Portrait> or
<Landscape>
Font Number
Specify the font to use by selecting a corresponding font ID number. You can print the PCL font list with font
samples from the operation panel. PCL Font List(P. 414)
0 to 54
<Printer Settings> <PCL> <Font Number> Select the font number
Point Size
Set the font size in points, adjustable in 0.25 increments. You can specify this setting only when a proportionally-
spaced scalable font is selected in <Font Number>.
4.00 to 12.00 to 999.75 (point)
<Printer Settings> <PCL> <Point Size> Specify the point size
Pitch
Set the font pitch, or cpi (characters per inch), adjustable in 0.01 increments. You can specify this setting only
when a xed-pitch scalable font or a bitmap font is selected in <Font Number>.
0.44 to 10.00 to 99.99 (cpi)
Setting Menu List
322
<Printer Settings> <PCL> <Pitch> Specify the pitch value
Form Lines
Set the number of lines printed on one page from 5 to 128. This setting is automatically changed according to
the settings specied in <Default Paper Size> and <Orientation>.
5 to 64 to 128 (lines)
<Printer Settings> <PCL> <Form Lines> Specify the number of
lines
Character Code
Select the character code that is most suited for the computer you send print data from. The specied setting is
ignored when the character code is controlled by the font specied in <Font Number>.
DESKTOP
ISO4
ISO6
ISO11
ISO15
ISO17
ISO21
ISO60
ISO69
ISOL1
ISOL2
ISOL5
ISOL6
LEGAL
MATH8
MCTEXT
MSPUBL
PC775
PC8
PC850
PC852
PC8DN
PC8TK
PC1004
PIFONT
PSMATH
PSTEXT
ROMAN8
VNINTL
VNMATH
VNUS
WIN30
WINBALT
WINL1
WINL2
WINL5
<Printer Settings> <PCL> <Character Code> Select the character
code
Custom Paper
Select whether to set a custom paper size. Select <On> to set the dimensions of the paper in <X dimension> and
<Y dimension>.
Setting Menu List
323
Off
On
<Printer Settings> <PCL> <Custom Paper> Select <Off> or
<On>
Unit of Measure
Select the unit of measurement to use to set a custom paper size.
Millimeters
Inches
<Printer Settings> <PCL> <Unit of Measure> Select <Millimeters>
or <Inches>
X dimension
Specify the horizontal dimension (short edge) of the custom paper.
77 to 216 (mm)
<Printer Settings> <PCL> <X dimension> Specify the dimension
Y dimension
Specify the vertical dimension (long edge) of the custom paper.
127 to 356 (mm)
<Printer Settings> <PCL> <Y dimension> Specify the dimension
Append CR to LF
Select whether to append a carriage return (CR) when the machine receives a line feed code (LF). If <Yes> is
selected, the print position moves to the beginning of the next line when the machine receives an LF code. If
<No> is selected, the print position moves to the next line, just under the received LF code.
Setting Menu List
324
Yes
No
<Printer Settings> <PCL> <Append CR to LF> Select <Yes> or <No>
Enlarge A4 Print Width
Select whether to expand the width of the printable area of A4 size paper in portrait orientation to that of LTR
size.
Off
On
<Printer Settings> <PCL> <Enlarge A4 Print Width> Select <Off> or
<On>
Halftones
You can select the printing method to reproduce halftones (the intermediate range between the lighter and
darker areas of an image) for optimal image quality. For each document, you can make settings by type of
image.
Text
Resolution
Color Tone
Gradation
High Resolution
Graphics
Resolution
Color Tone
Gradation
High Resolution
Image
Setting Menu List
325
Resolution
Color Tone
Gradation
High Resolution
<Printer Settings> <PCL> <Halftones> Select the type of image
Select the halftone reproduction method
Type of image
Select the object for which to change the setting. <Text> represents letters and characters, <Graphics>
represents lines and gures, and <Image> represents photos and images.
<Resolution>
Produces a ne print with clear edges of text. It is suitable for printing characters and ne lines.
<Color Tone>
Produces a sharp print with strong contrast of lightness and darkness. It is suitable for printing image data
such as photo image data.
<Gradation>
Produces a print with smooth gradation or smooth edges. It is suitable for printing gures or graphs
containing gradation areas.
<High Resolution>
As compared to <Resolution>, this produces a ner print but quality stability is slightly lower. It is suitable to
obtain a print of character data or ne line data or CAD data with sharp edges.
PS *2
Specify the PS printing settings such as page layout and print quality.
Job Timeout
This setting enables you to specify the amount of time before a job times out. If a job has not nished within the
set time limit, the job automatically cancels.
0 to 3600 (sec.)
Setting Menu List
326
<Printer Settings> <PS> <Job Timeout> Specify the seconds for job
timeout
Print PS Errors
This setting determines whether an error page is printed when an error is encountered.
Off
On
<Printer Settings> <PS> <Print PS Errors> Select <Off> or
<On>
Halftones
You can select the printing method to reproduce halftones (the intermediate range between the lighter and
darker areas of an image) for optimal image quality. For each document, you can make settings by type of
image.
Text
Resolution
Gradation
High Resolution
Graphics
Resolution
Gradation
High Resolution
Image
Resolution
Gradation
High Resolution
<Printer Settings> <PS> <Halftones> Select the type of image
Select the halftone reproduction method
Setting Menu List
327
Type of image
Select the object for which to change the setting. <Text> represents letters and characters, <Graphics>
represents lines and gures, and <Image> represents photos and images.
<Resolution>
Produces a ne print with clear edges of text. It is suitable for printing characters and ne lines.
<Gradation>
Produces a print with smooth gradation or smooth edges. It is suitable for printing gures or graphs
containing gradation areas.
<High Resolution>
As compared to <Resolution>, this produces a ner print but quality stability is slightly lower. It is suitable to
obtain a print of character data or ne line data or CAD data with sharp edges.
Grayscale Conversion
You can select ways to convert color values to a grayscale value when you print color print data.
sRGB
NTSC
Uniform RGB
●This section describes the settings to convert the color data into grayscale data.
●This setting is invalid for black-and-white data.
<Printer Settings> <PS> <Grayscale Conversion> Specify the
grayscale conversion
XPS *2
You can change settings for XPS les.
Halftones
You can select the printing method to reproduce halftones (the intermediate range between the lighter and
darker areas of an image) for optimal image quality. For each document, you can make settings by type of
image.
Text
Resolution
Gradation
High Resolution
Setting Menu List
328
Graphics
Resolution
Gradation
High Resolution
Image
Resolution
Gradation
High Resolution
<Printer Settings> <XPS> <Halftones> Select the type of
image Select the halftone reproduction method
Type of image
Select the object for which to change the setting. <Text> represents letters and characters, <Graphics>
represents lines and gures, and <Image> represents photos and images.
<Resolution>
Produces a ne print with clear edges of text. It is suitable for printing characters and ne lines.
<Gradation>
Produces a print with smooth gradation or smooth edges. It is suitable for printing gures or graphs
containing gradation areas.
<High Resolution>
As compared to <Resolution>, this produces a ner print but quality stability is slightly lower. It is suitable to
obtain a print of character data or ne line data or CAD data with sharp edges.
Grayscale Conversion
Specify the type of grayscale conversion of color print data.
Text
sRGB
NTSC
Uniform RGB
Graphics
sRGB
NTSC
Setting Menu List
329
Uniform RGB
Image
sRGB
NTSC
Uniform RGB
<Printer Settings> <XPS> <Grayscale Conversion> Select the type
of image Select the type of grayscale conversion
Type of image
Select the object for which to change the setting. <Text> represents letters and characters, <Graphics>
represents lines and gures, and <Image> represents photos and images.
<sRGB>
Color data is converted to monochrome with emphasis on color differences so that a smooth gradation is
achieved.
<NTSC>
Color data is converted to monochrome so that the resulting image looks like a television picture (of the
NTSC system).
<Uniform RGB>
Color data is converted to monochrome so that R, G, and B are uniformly converted to the same gray level.
Compressed Image Output
As time passes after a print job starts, image quality may decrease depending on the print data. Specify how the
machine is to behave when image quality has signicantly decreased.
Output
Display Error
<Printer Settings> <XPS> <Compressed Image Output> Select
<Output> or <Display Error>
Setting Menu List
330
<Output>
The machine continues the print job regardless of the degree of decrease in image quality.
<Display Error>
When image quality has signicantly decreased, the machine displays an error message and stops the print
job.
Imaging
Make settings for JPEG and TIFF image les that you can print by AirPrint.
Halftones
You can select the printing method to reproduce halftones (the intermediate range between the lighter and
darker areas of an image) for optimal image quality.
Gradation
Error Diffusion
<Printer Settings> <Imaging> <Halftones> Select the halftone
reproduction method
<Gradation>
Prints images with ne gradation, such as digital camera images, with a smooth nish.
<Error Diffusion>
Prints images with small text or ne lines with a clear nish.
Setting Menu List
331
Adjustment/Maintenance
0W20-05F
All the settings about adjustment and maintenance are listed with short descriptions.
Default settings are marked with a dagger ( ).
Asterisks (*)
Settings marked with an asterisk (*) are only available when the optional paper feeder (drawer 2) is attached.
Display Timing for Cartridge Preparation Notication (P. 332)
Printer Density(P. 332)
Toner Save(P. 333)
Adjust Print Position(P. 333)
Special Processing(P. 334)
Clean Fixing Assembly(P. 336)
Display Timing for Cartridge Preparation Notication
Set the display timing for the message notifying you that the amount remaining in the toner cartridge is low.
Auto
Custom
1 to 20 to 99 (%)
<Adjustment/Maintenance> <Display Timing for Cartridge Preparation Notication>
<Custom> Enter toner level
Printer Density
Adjust the toner density to be used for printing. Adjusting Print Density(P. 405)
Nine Levels
<Adjustment/Maintenance> <Printer Density> Use / to adjust the
toner density
Setting Menu List
332
Toner Save
You can save toner when performing Report Print.
Off
On
<Adjustment/Maintenance> <Toner Save> Select <Off> or <On>
Adjust Print Position
For each paper source, you can adjust the print position. You can adjust the print position in the range -5.0 to +5.0 mm
in vertical direction, and in the range -3.0 to +3.0 mm in horizontal direction, both in increments of 0.1 mm.
Adjusting Print Position(P. 407)
Multi-Purpose Tray
Adjust Vertically (Front Side)
-0.20 to 0.00 to +0.20 (") or -5.0 to 0.0 to +5.0 (mm)
Adjust Horizontally (Front Side)
-0.12 to 0.00 to +0.12 (") or -3.0 to 0.0 to +3.0 (mm)
Adjust Vertically (Back Side)
-0.20 to 0.00 to +0.20 (") or -5.0 to 0.0 to +5.0 (mm)
Adjust Horizontally (Back Side)
-0.12 to 0.00 to +0.12 (") or -3.0 to 0.0 to +3.0 (mm)
Drawer 1
Adjust Vertically (Front Side)
-0.20 to 0.00 to +0.20 (") or -5.0 to 0.0 to +5.0 (mm)
Adjust Horizontally (Front Side)
-0.12 to 0.00 to +0.12 (") or -3.0 to 0.0 to +3.0 (mm)
Adjust Vertically (Back Side)
-0.20 to 0.00 to +0.20 (") or -5.0 to 0.0 to +5.0 (mm)
Adjust Horizontally (Back Side)
-0.12 to 0.00 to +0.12 (") or -3.0 to 0.0 to +3.0 (mm)
Drawer 2 *
Adjust Vertically (Front Side)
-0.20 to 0.00 to +0.20 (") or -5.0 to 0.0 to +5.0 (mm)
Adjust Horizontally (Front Side)
-0.12 to 0.00 to +0.12 (") or -3.0 to 0.0 to +3.0 (mm)
Adjust Vertically (Back Side)
-0.20 to 0.00 to +0.20 (") or -5.0 to 0.0 to +5.0 (mm)
Adjust Horizontally (Back Side)
-0.12 to 0.00 to +0.12 (") or -3.0 to 0.0 to +3.0 (mm)
Setting Menu List
333
Special Processing
If the print results are not satisfactory, the following settings may improve the quality of the printouts.
Special Printing Mode A
Streaks may appear on printouts depending on the paper type or the environmental conditions. In this case,
setting this item may solve the problem. The improvement effect is weakest with <Mode 1> and strongest with
<Mode 4>.
Off
Mode 1
Mode 2
Mode 3
Mode 4
<Adjustment/Maintenance> <Special Processing> <Special Printing Mode
A>
●When printing from the computer, the setting in the printer driver takes precedence. When the
setting of [Graphics Mode] in the printer driver is changed to [UFR II Mode], the setting in the
operation panel takes precedence. Smudges Appear on Printouts(P. 378)
●This item cannot be set when <Barcode Adjustment Mode> is set to one of <Mode 1> to <Mode 3>.
Barcode Adjustment Mode(P. 316)
●Print density will be lighter when you select stronger improvement. It may also result in less sharp
edges and rougher details.
●If the problem cannot be solved in spite of this item having been set, set <Special Printing Mode D> to
<On>. Special Printing Mode D(P. 336)
Special Printing Mode U
Toner smudges and splatters may appear around printed characters, graphics, etc. depending on the paper
type or the environmental conditions (more specically when you print on heavy paper or use the machine in an
environment with low humidity). In this case, setting this item to <On> may solve the problem.
Off
On
<Adjustment/Maintenance> <Special Processing> <Special Printing Mode
U> <On>
Setting Menu List
334
When you set this item to <On>, print quality may be lower depending on the paper type or the
operating environment (more specically when you print on thin paper or use the machine in an
environment with high humidity).
Special Printing Mode V
If the printed paper curls when you are using paper having absorbed moisture, set this item. The improvement
effect is stronger with <Mode 2> than with <Mode 1>.
Off
Mode 1
Mode 2
<Adjustment/Maintenance> <Special Processing> <Special Printing Mode V>
Select the mode
Printing speed becomes slower when you select stronger improvement.
Special Printing Mode B
Streaks may appear on printouts immediately after you replace the toner cartridge or when you print for the
rst time after a long time. In this case, setting this item may solve the problem. The improvement effect is
weakest with <Mode 1> and strongest with <Mode 3>.
Off
Mode 1
Mode 2
Mode 3
<Adjustment/Maintenance> <Special Processing> <Special Printing Mode
B> Select the mode
Setting Menu List
335
Printing speed becomes slower when you select stronger improvement.
Special Printing Mode D
Streaks may appear on printouts depending on the paper type or the environmental conditions. Setting this
item to <On> may solve the problem. Also, setting this item to <On> will reduce the operating noise during
printing.
Off
On
<Adjustment/Maintenance> <Special Processing> <Special Printing Mode
D> <On>
If you set this item to <On>, the printing speed becomes slower.
Clean Fixing Assembly
Clean the xing unit after a toner cartridge is replaced or if black streaks appear on printouts. Fixing Unit(P. 394)
Setting Menu List
336
System Management Settings
0W20-08H
All the settings about System Management Settings are listed with short descriptions.
Default settings are marked with a dagger ( ).
Asterisks (*)
●Settings marked with "*1" cannot be imported or exported.
●Settings marked with "*2" have different defaults depending on the country or region of purchase.
●Settings marked with "*3" are only available for the LBP252dw.
Network Settings(P. 337)
System Manager Information Settings(P. 337)
Device Information Settings(P. 338)
Department ID Management On/Off(P. 338)
Security Settings(P. 338)
Select Country/Region(P. 340)
Remote UI Settings(P. 341)
Display Job Log(P. 341)
Use as USB Device(P. 342)
Enable Product Extended Survey Program(P. 342)
Display Consumables Information (RUI/Toner Status)(P. 342)
Google Cloud Print Settings(P. 343)
Notify to Check Paper Settings(P. 343)
Import/Export of Settings(P. 343)
Secure Print Settings(P. 343)
PDL Selection (Plug and Play)(P. 344)
Update Firmware(P. 345)
Initialize Key and Certicate(P. 345)
Initialize Menu(P. 345)
Initialize All Data/Settings(P. 346)
Network Settings
See Network Settings(P. 290) .
System Manager Information Settings
Specify the ID or PIN exclusively for Administrators who have access privileges to <Network Settings> and <System
Management Settings>. ID is <System Manager ID> and PIN is <System Manager PIN>. You can also register the name
of an Administrator. Setting the System Manager ID(P. 207)
System Manager ID and PIN
Enter a number of up to seven digits for the System Manager ID and PIN.
Setting Menu List
337
System Manager ID
System Manager PIN
System Manager Name
Enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters for the name of an Administrator.
Device Information Settings
Enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters for the name and the installation location to identify the machine.
Device Name
Location
<System Management Settings> <Device Information Settings> Select
<Device Name> or <Location> Enter <Device Name> or <Location> ( Entering
Text(P. 32) )
Department ID Management On/Off
Select whether to use the Department ID Management, a feature that uses IDs as user accounts to specify access
privileges and maintain information on how the machine is used. Setting the Department ID Management(P. 209)
Off
On
<System Management Settings> <Department ID Management On/
Off> Select <Off> or <On>
Security Settings
Enable or disable settings for encrypted communication via SSL or IPSec, as well as settings for IP address or MAC
address packet ltering.
Use SSL *1
Select whether to use SSL encrypted communication. Enabling SSL Encrypted Communication for the
Remote UI(P. 235)
Off
On
Setting Menu List
338
<System Management Settings> <Security Settings> <Use SSL>
Select <Off> or <On> Restart the machine
Use IPSec *1
Select whether to perform encrypted communication by establishing a virtual private network (VPN) via IPSec.
Conguring IPSec Settings(P. 239)
Off
On
<System Management Settings> <Security Settings> <Use IPSec>
Select <Off> or <On> Restart the machine
IPv4 Address Filter
Enable or disable settings for ltering packets sent to or received from devices with specied IPv4 addresses.
Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Rules(P. 219)
Outbound Filter
Off
On
Inbound Filter
Off
On
<System Management Settings> <Security Settings> <IPv4 Address
Filter> Select <Outbound Filter> or <Inbound Filter> Select <Off> or
<On> Restart the machine
IPv6 Address Filter
Enable or disable settings for ltering packets sent to or received from devices with specied IPv6 addresses.
Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Rules(P. 219)
Outbound Filter
Off
On
Inbound Filter
Off
On
Setting Menu List
339
<System Management Settings> <Security Settings> <IPv6 Address
Filter> Select <Outbound Filter> or <Inbound Filter> Select <Off> or
<On> Restart the machine
MAC Address Filter
Enable or disable settings for ltering packets sent to or received from devices with specied MAC addresses.
Specifying MAC Addresses for Firewall Rules(P. 223)
Outbound Filter
Off
On
Inbound Filter
Off
On
<System Management Settings> <Security Settings> <MAC Address
Filter> Select <Outbound Filter> or <Inbound Filter> Select <Off> or
<On> Restart the machine
Select Country/Region *1 *2
Specify the country or region where the machine is used. The default setting may vary depending on the setting
selected at initial power-on.
Austria (AT)
Belarus (BY)
Belgium (BE)
Czech Republic (CZ)
Denmark (DK)
Egypt (EG)
Finland (FI)
France (FR)
Germany (DE)
Greece (GR)
Hungary (HU)
Ireland (IE)
Italy (IT)
Jordan (JO)
Luxembourg (LU)
Netherlands (NL)
Norway (NO)
Poland (PL)
Portugal (PT)
Russia (RU)
Saudi Arabia (SA)
Slovenia (SI)
South Africa (ZA)
Spain (ES)
Sweden (SE)
Switzerland (CH)
Ukraine (UA)
Great Britain (GB)
Other
Setting Menu List
340
<System Management Settings> <Select Country/Region> Select a country
or region
Remote UI Settings *1
Congure settings for using the Remote UI. Using the Remote UI allows you to congure machine settings from a Web
browser.
Use Remote UI
Select whether to use the Remote UI. Using the Remote UI allows you to congure machine settings from a
Web browser. Disabling Remote UI(P. 233)
Off
On
Remote UI Access Security Settings
Set whether a PIN is required for accessing the Remote UI. Set a PIN of up to 7 digits. All users use a common
PIN. Setting a Remote UI PIN(P. 216)
Off
On
Remote UI Access PIN
<System Management Settings> <Remote UI Settings> <Remote UI Access
Security Settings> <On> Enter PIN <Apply> PIN (Conrm) <Apply>
Display Job Log
Select whether to display the printing logs on the display of the machine.
Off
On
<System Management Settings> <Display Job Log> Select <Off> or
<On> Restart the machine
Setting Menu List
341
Use as USB Device
Enable or disable the USB port that is used for connecting the machine to a computer. Restricting USB
Functions(P. 231)
Off
On
Enable Product Extended Survey Program
Enable or disable the Product Extended Survey Program (a program for the machine usage survey).
Off
On
<System Management Settings> <Enable Product Extended Survey
Program> Select <Off> or <On> Restart the machine
Display Consumables Information (RUI/Toner Status)
Set whether to display a button in the Remote UI or Toner Status for accessing the Web site for purchasing toner
cartridges. Also set whether to use Toner Status.
Display Consumables Purchase Button (RUI)
Off
On
Toner Status Settings
Off
On
Displ. Consmbls. Purchase Btn.
Off
On
<System Management Settings> <Display Consumables Information (RUI/Toner
Status)> Specify the settings
Setting Menu List
342
<Display Consumables Purchase Button (RUI)>
Select <Off> to prevent a button that accesses sites for purchasing toner cartridges from being displayed in
the Remote UI.
<Toner Status Settings>
If you do not want to use the toner cartridge level notication tool, select <Off>. To prevent a button that
accesses sites for purchasing toner cartridges from being displayed in the toner cartridge level notication
tool, select <On> and then <Off>.
Google Cloud Print Settings
Enable or disable Google Cloud Print. Changing Google Cloud Print Settings(P. 452)
Enable Google Cloud Print
Off
On
Google Cloud Print Registration Status
Notify to Check Paper Settings
Specify whether to display a message prompting you to check paper settings when loading the paper drawer into the
machine.
Off
On
<System Management Settings> <Notify to Check Paper Settings> Select
<Off> or <On> Restart the machine
Import/Export of Settings *1
You can use a USB memory device to import and export settings data. Using a USB Memory Device to Save/Load
Registered Data(P. 417)
Import
Export
Secure Print Settings *3
Enable or disable Secure Print. Printing via Secure Print(P. 112)
Off
Setting Menu List
343
On
Secure Print Deletion Time
10 to 30 to 240 (min.)
PDL Selection (Plug and Play)
Select a page description language so that the machine is detected as a printer that is compatible with that language
when it is connected to a computer by using Plug and Play.
Network *1
Select a page description language so that the machine is detected as a printer that is compatible with that
language when it is detected over the network.
UFR II
UFR II (V4)
PCL5
PCL6
PS *3
USB
Select a page description language so that the machine is detected as a printer that is compatible with that
language when it is connected to a computer via USB.
UFR II
UFR II (V4)
PCL5
PCL6
PS *3
<System Management Settings> <PDL Selection (Plug and Play)> Select
<Network> or <USB> Select a page description language Restart the machine
<UFR II>
Detects and connects the machine as a UFR II printer.
<UFR II (V4)>
Detects and connects the machine as a UFR II printer that is compatible with XML Paper Specication (XPS).
<PCL5>
Detects and connects the machine as a PCL5 printer.
Setting Menu List
344
<PCL6>
Detects and connects the machine as a PCL6 printer.
<PS>
Detects and connects the machine as a PS printer.
Update Firmware *1
Select how to install the rmware update according to the environment of the machine.
●<Via PC>
Select to manually install the rmware update available on the Canon Web site yourself. For instructions
on how to install the update, see the instruction manual available on the Web site. When the machine uses
a wireless LAN, update with <Via PC> below or use a USB cable to connect.
●<Via Internet>
Select to automatically install the rmware update without using a computer. Follow the on-screen
instructions to perform the update. The machine must be connected to the Internet.
●<Version Information>
Select to check details for the current rmware.
Via PC
Via Internet
Version Information
Initialize Key and Certicate *1
Select to restore [Key and Certicate Settings] and [CA Certicate Settings] to the factory defaults. Initializing Key
and Certicate(P. 425)
Initialize Menu *1
Select to restore the settings listed below to the factory defaults. You can restore all the settings listed below at once,
or you can restore individual settings separately. Initializing Menu(P. 423)
Preferences
Timer Settings
Common Settings
Printer Settings
System Management Settings
Initialize All
System Management Settings
Select to restore the System Management Settings to the factory defaults. You can restore all the System
Management Settings at once. Initializing Menu(P. 423)
Network Settings
System Manager Information Settings
Device Information Settings
Enable Product Extended Survey Program
Information for Purchasing Consumables
Google Cloud Print Settings
Setting Menu List
345
Department ID Management On/Off
Display Job Log
Use as USB Device
Notify to Check Paper Settings
Secure Print Settings *3
PDL Selection (Plug and Play)
Initialize All
Initialize All Data/Settings
Initializes the area where data including logs and settings are stored. Perform this as necessary, for example in
such cases as when you want to dispose of the machine after erasing all usage logs. When initializing is
complete, the machine restarts automatically.
<System Management Settings> <Initialize All Data/Settings> <Yes>
●To use the machine after initializing, it is necessary to specify all settings again from scratch.
Setting Menu List
346
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................................................. 348
Clearing Jams ..................................................................................................................................................... 350
When an Error Message Appears ..................................................................................................................... 357
When an Error Code Appears ............................................................................................................................ 366
Common Problems ............................................................................................................................................ 368
Installation/Settings Problems ..................................................................................................................... 369
Printing Problems ......................................................................................................................................... 373
When You Cannot Print Properly ...................................................................................................................... 376
Printing Results Are Not Satisfactory ............................................................................................................ 378
Paper Creases or Curls ................................................................................................................................. 385
Paper Is Fed Incorrectly ................................................................................................................................ 387
When a Problem Cannot Be Solved .................................................................................................................. 388
Troubleshooting
347
Troubleshooting
0W20-05K
When a problem occurs, check this chapter to nd out solutions before contacting Canon.
◼Paper Jams
If a paper jams, see Clearing Jams(P. 350) to remove the jammed paper.
◼A Message or Error Code Appears
If the screen displays a message or error code (three digits), see the following sections.
When an Error Message Appears(P. 357)
When an Error Code Appears(P. 366)
◼Common Problems
If you suspect that the machine is malfunctioning, see the following sections before contacting Canon.
Common Problems(P. 368)
Installation/Settings Problems(P. 369)
Printing Problems(P. 373)
◼Printing Results are Not Satisfactory
If printing results are not satisfactory, see When You Cannot Print Properly(P. 376) .
◼When a Problem Cannot Be Solved
If a problem persists, see When a Problem Cannot Be Solved(P. 388) to nd out where to contact.
Troubleshooting
348
Troubleshooting
349
Clearing Jams
0W20-05L
If a paper jam occurs, <Paper jammed.> is displayed on the screen*. Press to display simple solutions. If it is
dicult to understand the procedures on the display, see the following sections to clear jams.
*If the solution is not displayed, press and then select <Error Information/Notication> to display the
solution.
●<Remove paper from MP tray.>
Paper Jams in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 350)
●<Open Drawer 1.>
<Open Drawer 2.>
Paper Jams in the Paper Drawer(P. 351)
●<Open the upper rear cover.>
Paper Jams in the Back Side(P. 352)
●<Open the front cover.>
Paper Jams inside the Machine(P. 353)
●<Pull out Drawer 1.>
Paper Jams at the Duplex Transport Guide(P. 355)
When removing the jammed paper, do not turn OFF the machine
●Turning OFF the machine deletes the data that is being printed.
If paper tears
●Remove all the paper fragments to prevent them from becoming jammed.
If paper jams repeatedly
●Tap the paper stack on a at surface to even the edges of the paper before loading it into the machine.
●Check that the paper is appropriate for the machine. Paper(P. 440)
●Check that no jammed paper fragments remain in the machine.
Do not forcibly remove the jammed document or paper from the machine
●Forcibly removing the paper may damage parts. If you are not able to remove the paper,contact your local
authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line. When a Problem Cannot Be Solved(P. 388)
Paper Jams in the Multi-Purpose Tray
If there is paper loaded in the tray, remove it rst. If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily, do not forcibly pull it
out, but follow the procedure for a different paper jam location indicated by the message.
Troubleshooting
350
1Gently pull out the paper.
2When the screen shown below is displayed, use / to select <Yes>, and press .
Paper Jams in the Paper Drawer
If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily, do not forcibly pull it out, but follow the procedure for a different
paper jam location indicated by the message.
1Pull out the paper drawer.
●Make sure to hold the paper drawer with both hands, and pull it out gently. Otherwise, you may damage
the paper drawer by dropping it, if it slides out too easily.
2Gently pull out the paper.
●When the optional paper feeder(drawer 2) is attached, gently pull out the paper in the same way.
Troubleshooting
351
3Set the paper drawer.
●When you insert the paper drawer with <Notify to Check Paper Settings> set to <On>, a conrmation screen
is displayed. Notify to Check Paper Settings(P. 343)
4When the screen shown below is displayed, use / to select <Yes>, and press .
Paper Jams in the Back Side
Do not forcibly remove jammed paper from the machine. If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily, proceed to
the next step.
1Remove the jammed paper inside the upper rear cover.
1Open the upper rear cover.
2Gently pull out the paper.
3Close the upper rear cover.
2Remove the jammed paper in the duplex unit.
1Open the lower rear cover.
Troubleshooting
352
2Gently pull out the paper.
3Close the lower rear cover.
3When the screen shown below is displayed, use / to select <Yes>, and press .
Paper Jams inside the Machine
Do not forcibly remove jammed paper from the machine. If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily, proceed to
the next step.
1Gently pull out the paper.
2Open the front cover while holding down on the button.
Troubleshooting
353
3Remove the toner cartridge.
4Hold the green knob and raise the transport guide.
●Keep holding the transport guide until returning it back to position in step 6.
5Gently pull out the paper.
●Pull out the paper while holding it as horizontally as possible to prevent unxed toner from falling.
6Gently return the transport guide back to position.
7Hold the green knob, and open the roller cover.
8Gently pull out the paper.
Troubleshooting
354
9Gently return the roller cover back to position.
10 Install the toner cartridge.
●Fully push it in until it cannot go any further.
11 Close the front cover.
Paper Jams at the Duplex Transport Guide
If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily, do not forcibly pull it out, but follow the procedure for a different
paper jam location indicated by the message.
1Pull out the paper drawer.
●Make sure to hold the paper drawer with both hands, and pull it out gently. Otherwise, you may damage
the paper drawer by dropping it, if it slides out too easily.
2Hold the green knob and push down the duplex transport guide.
Troubleshooting
355
3Gently pull out the paper.
4Holding the left and right side handles of the duplex transfer guide, return the guide
back to position.
●Fully close the guide until it clicks.
5Set the paper drawer.
●When you insert the paper drawer with <Notify to Check Paper Settings> set to <On>, a conrmation screen
is displayed. Notify to Check Paper Settings(P. 343)
6When the screen shown below is displayed, use / to select <Yes>, and press .
Troubleshooting
356
When an Error Message Appears
0W20-08A
When you encounter an operation problem such as when a print processing error occurs or the memory becomes full,
a message appears on the screen. Find out more information about messages in the following list.
Cannot analyze the authentication server certicate.
The authentication server certicate may be invalid, or the certicate may be in a format that the
printer does not support.
●Check the authentication server certicate.
Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication(P. 248)
Cannot nd the access point.
When automatic setting with WPS was attempted, a wireless router could not be detected within a
specic period of time.
●Connect again paying attention to the time limit.
Setting Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode(P. 138)
Setting Up Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode(P. 140)
An SSID or network key of a wireless router was entered manually, but the entry was incorrect.
●Check the SSID and network key, and enter the correct ones again.
Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 150)
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 146)
A wireless router could not be detected due to setting problems of the network to be connected.
●Check whether the machine is properly installed and ready to connect to the network.
Installation/Settings Problems(P. 369)
●If the problem persists, check the security settings of the wireless router.
Cart. end of lifetime. Rplcmt. recommended.
The toner cartridge has reached the end of its lifetime.
●Replacement of the toner cartridge is recommended.
How to Replace Toner Cartridges(P. 400)
Change the authentication password.
The password has expired.
●Set a new password.
Troubleshooting
357
Check the authentication settings.
The authentication method set on the machine does not match the authentication method set on the
RADIUS server.
●Check that the same authentication method is set on this machine and the RADIUS server, and set the
correct authentication method.
Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication(P. 248)
Could not connect using Access Point Mode.
Connection in Access Point Mode failed due to an error.
●Wait a few moments and try again. If you still cannot connect, try switching the machine off briey.
Make Direct Connection (Access Point Mode)(P. 125)
Could not connect using the wireless LAN.
Wireless LAN communication failed due to an error.
●Wait for a while, and set again. If you still cannot get connection, turn OFF the machine and then restart it.
Could not connect using the wireless LAN.
A connection failed due to an error while setting wireless LAN connection.
●Restart the machine and set again.
●If the problem persists even after restarting the machine, check whether the machine is properly installed
and ready to connect to the network.
Installation/Settings Problems(P. 369)
●If the problem persists even after checking the wireless LAN connection, check the security settings of the
wireless router.
Could not connect using WPS.
When automatic setting with WPS was attempted, the connection failed due to an error.
●Wait for a while, and set again. If the problem persists, check whether the wireless router supports WPS.
If WPS is supported:
Check whether the machine is properly installed and ready to connect to the network.
Installation/Settings Problems(P. 369)
If WPS is not supported:
Set using another connecting method.
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 136)
Troubleshooting
358
Could not connect. Check the PSK settings.
The network key (PSK) of a wireless router to be connected is not set to the machine correctly.
●Check the network key (PSK) of the wireless router, and set it to the machine again.
Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 150)
Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 143)
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 146)
●If the problem persists even after checking the network key, check whether the machine is properly
installed and ready to connect to the network.
Installation/Settings Problems(P. 369)
Could not connect. Max connections to access point reached
You tried to connect to a wireless LAN router to which the maximum possible number of devices are
already connected.
●Decrease the number of devices connected to the wireless LAN router (the number of clients). For the
maximum number of devices that can be connected to a wireless LAN
router, see the instruction manual for the router or contact the manufacturer of the router.
Could not detect any connections from wireless devices.
It was not possible to detect any mobile device within the predetermined length of time.
●Connect again paying attention to the time limit.
Make Direct Connection (Access Point Mode)(P. 125)
Could not perform cleaning.
Paper jammed during cleaning.
●Remove the jammed paper, set paper correctly, and perform cleaning again.
Clearing Jams(P. 350)
Fixing Unit(P. 394)
The amount remaining in toner cartridge required for cleaning the xing unit is insucient.
●Cleaning requires sucient toner cartridge remaining. Replace the toner cartridge, and perform the
cleaning again.
Replacing Toner Cartridges(P. 396)
Could not perform Open System auth. Check WEP settings.
The authentication method of the machine is set to <Open System>, but that of a wireless router is set to
"Shared Key."
Troubleshooting
359
●Connect again by manually changing the WEP authentication method to <Shared Key>.
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 146)
The MAC address of the machine is rejected because the MAC address lter is set at a wireless router.
●Set the wireless router to permit the MAC address of the machine and your computer. For more
information about how to set, see the instruction manuals for your networking devices or contact your
manufacturer. To check the MAC address of the machine, press select <Network
Settings> <Wireless LAN Settings> <Connection Information>.
Viewing the MAC Address for Wired LAN(P. 162)
Could not perform Shared Key auth. Check WEP settings.
The network key (the WEP key) of a wireless router to be connected is not set to the machine correctly.
●Check the network key (the WEP key) of the wireless router, and set it to the machine again.
Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 150)
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 146)
●Connect again by selecting a wireless router or by manually changing the WEP authentication method to
<Open System>.
Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 143)
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 146)
The authentication method of the machine is set to <Shared Key>, but that of the wireless router is set to
"Open System."
●Change the WEP authentication method to "Shared Key" at the wireless router, and connect again. For
more information about how to change, see the instruction manuals for your networking devices or
contact your manufacturer.
Direct Connection terminated.
Connection between the machine and the mobile device was terminated.
●Reestablish Direct Connection.
Make Direct Connection (Access Point Mode)(P. 125)
Insert the toner cartridge.
The toner cartridge is not set or properly set.
●Properly set the toner cartridge.
How to Replace Toner Cartridges(P. 400)
Error. Non-Canon cart. not cov'd by warranty. Amount in cart. cannot be
displ. correctly. Close: Press OK
A toner cartridge may not be installed correctly or may be faulty.
Troubleshooting
360
●Re-install the toner cartridge. If re-installing the toner cartridge fails to clear the error message, the toner
cartridge may be faulty. Contact the store where you purchased the toner cartridge or consult the Canon
Customer Help Center.
How to Replace Toner Cartridges(P. 400)
The toner cartridge used may not be a genuine Canon product.
●Only genuine Canon toner cartridges should be used as replacement toner cartridges.
Consumables(P. 443)
Google Cloud Print not avail. Server auth err
Server authentication for Cloud Print failed. Or, acquisition of information for registration failed.
●Check whether the date and time settings are correctly specied.
Date/Time Settings(P. 307)
Google Cloud Print not avail. Server comm err
Cloud Print is unavailable due to an error.
●Check whether the machine is correctly connected to a wireless LAN or wired LAN.
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 136)
Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 135)
●A port that is used for Cloud Print may be blocked by a rewall or other protection. Check whether the
5222 port is available with your computer.
●If a proxy server is used on the network, check whether the proxy settings on the machine and the server
are correct. For details, contact your Network Administrator.
Setting a Proxy(P. 228)
Incorrect number of characters/invalid characters entered.
The network key (the WPA/WPA2-PSK or WEP key) of a wireless router is not entered correctly.
●Check the network key (the WPA/WPA2-PSK or WEP key) of the wireless router, and set it to the machine
again. For more information about how to check the network key, see the instruction manuals for your
networking devices or contact your manufacturer.
Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 150)
Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 143)
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 146)
Mem. full. Check error w/ Status Monitor key.
The memory became full of print data that could not be printed due to errors.
●For the documents with errors, select <Skip Error> or cancel printing of those documents.
Canceling Prints(P. 75)
Troubleshooting
361
Memory full. Process secure print jobs.
Memory became full of secured documents that were not printed.
●Print the secured documents that are stored in memory.
Printing via Secure Print(P. 112)
No Paper
Paper is not loaded in the paper drawer or the multi-purpose tray.
●Load the paper.
Loading Paper(P. 35)
Paper on which reports or lists can be printed is not loaded.
●Reports or lists can be printed on A4 or Letter size paper. Load A4 or Letter size paper and set its size. Also,
set the paper type to <Plain>, <Plain L>, <Recycled>, <Color>, or <Heavy 1> depending on the loaded
paper.
Loading Paper(P. 35)
Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 50)
No reply from the destination.
A network cable may be disconnected, or there may be a problem in a switch.
●Check the status of the network cables and switches.
No response from host.
The machine is not connected to a network correctly.
●Check the machine and network settings, and connect again.
Connecting to a Network(P. 132)
Non-Canon cart. not covered by warranty. Amount in cart. cannot be displ.
correctly. Close: Press OK
The toner cartridge used may not be a genuine Canon product.
●Only genuine Canon toner cartridges should be used as replacement toner cartridges.
Consumables(P. 443)
Troubleshooting
362
Paper jammed.
Paper jams.
●Remove the jammed paper, and print again (Printing may resume automatically).
Clearing Jams(P. 350)
Prepare a cartridge.
The toner cartridge needs to be replaced soon.
●Shake the toner cartridge to evenly distribute the toner inside the toner cartridge. It is recommended to
replace the toner cartridge when printing a large volume of documents.
Using Up Toner(P. 398)
How to Replace Toner Cartridges(P. 400)
Printing is restricted.
Printing is disabled in the Department ID Management.
●Log on with a Department ID for which printing is not disabled. For the Department ID and PIN, contact
your Administrator.
Setting the Department ID Management(P. 209)
Set the correct authentication information.
The client authentication information (key pair and certicate, user name and password, or CA
certicate) is not set correctly.
●Check the specied authentication method and authentication information (key pair and certicate, user
name and password, and CA certicate).
Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication(P. 248)
Verifying Key Pairs and Digital Certicates(P. 266)
Set the information necessary for authentication.
The IEEE 802.1X authentication has not been congured correctly.
●Congure the IEEE 802.1X correctly from the Remote UI.
Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication(P. 248)
Size/Settings Mismatch
The paper size setting on the operation panel does not match the loaded paper size.
Troubleshooting
363
●Match the paper size setting specied in <Paper Settings> and the size of the paper that is actually loaded.
To use the loaded paper
Change the setting of <Paper Settings> to match the loaded paper size.
Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 50)
If printing from a computer, check whether the paper size setting in the printer driver matches the loaded
paper size.
To load paper without changing the settings
Load the paper with the size that is set to <Paper Settings>.
Loading Paper(P. 35)
●Check that the paper guides in the paper drawer are set in the correct position.
Loading Paper(P. 35)
The authentication server certicate has expired.
The server certicate sent from the RADIUS server has expired.
●Check the valid period of the server certicate on the RADIUS server.
Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication(P. 248)
The authentication server certicate is incorrect.
There is no CA certicate registered in the printer that is compatible
with the authentication server certicate.
●Check that there is a CA certicate registered in the printer that is compatible with the authentication
server certicate.
Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication(P. 248)
The drawer paper guide may not be set to the correct position. Adjust the
guide to the size of the loaded paper.
The paper guides in the paper drawer are not set correctly.
●Set the paper guides in the paper drawer correctly.
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 37)
The WEP key is not set correctly. Check the WEP settings.
The network key (the WEP key) of a wireless router to be connected is not set to the machine correctly.
●Check the network key (the WEP key) of the wireless router, and set it to the machine again.
Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 150)
Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 143)
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 146)
Troubleshooting
364
The authentication method of the machine is set to <Shared Key>, but that of the wireless router is set to
"Open System."
●Connect again by selecting a wireless router or by manually changing the WEP authentication method to
<Open System>.
Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 143)
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 146)
●Change the WEP authentication method to "Shared Key" at the wireless router, and connect again. For
more information about how to change, see the instruction manuals for your networking devices or
contact your manufacturer.
Use Remote UI to set info. necessary for authentication.
The IEEE 802.1X settings are incorrect.
●Check whether [Login Name] is set correctly.
●Check whether the [Use TLS], [Use TTLS], or [Use PEAP] check box is selected.
●If using TLS, check whether a key pair is registered.
●If using TTLS or PEAP, check whether a user name and password are set correctly.
Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication(P. 248)
Troubleshooting
365
When an Error Code Appears
0W20-08C
If printing is not successful due to an error, the print log screen displays an error code consisting of three digits. Check
the following to nd out causes and solutions for each error code.
#037
Memory is full.
●If a print job is queued, wait until the job is completed and try printing again.
●To print a document with many pages, divide it into multiple sections.
#099
Printing was canceled.
●When you cancel an operation, this error code is displayed, but this is not abnormal. Try printing
documents again as necessary.
#701
Authentication failed because an incorrect Department ID or PIN was entered when the Department ID
Management was activated.
●Enter the correct Department ID and PIN.
Continuing operating without entering a Department ID was attempted even though unknown-ID jobs
(functions that permit operations without a Department ID and PIN) were disabled in the Department ID
Management.
●Enable unknown-ID jobs in System Manager Mode in Remote UI.
Blocking Jobs When Department ID Is Unknown(P. 214)
#852
The machine turns OFF for some reason.
●Check whether the power plug is inserted into an outlet rmly.
Troubleshooting
366
#853
A document could not be printed because its data size exceeded the machine's maximum processing
capability.
●The machine may not be able to print documents with many pages. Print a reduced number of pages at a
time, or print when no print job is queued or no document is being printed. If you are still unable to print,
check the document data for any defects.
Printing was canceled from the computer.
●If you cancel an operation when the print data is being sent to the machine from a computer, this error
code is displayed, but this is not abnormal. Print again as necessary.
A secured document that had been left unprinted was deleted.
●If the secured document is not printed within a specic period of time (30 minutes by default), it is deleted
from memory. Send the secured document again, and print it within the period.
Printing via Secure Print(P. 112)
Printing using Secure Print was attempted when Secure Print was restricted.
●When <Secure Print Settings> is set to <Off>, you cannot use Secure Print. Set the setting to <On> and
print again.
Printing via Secure Print(P. 112)
●Print without using Secure Print.
Basic Printing Operations(P. 70)
You tried to print a le that is either corrupted or not supported.
●Check the le and try again.
Basic Printing Operations(P. 70)
#861
A document could not be printed because a printer driver that was not intended for this machine was
used.
●Print again by using the printer driver for this machine.
Basic Printing Operations(P. 70)
A document could not be printed due to a defect in its data.
●Check the document data for any defects.
#863
An error occurred when printing from a computer.
●Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON. After the restart is complete, try
printing again.
Troubleshooting
367
Common Problems
0W20-05S
If you encounter problems when using the machine, check the items in this section before contacting us. If the
problems persist, contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.
Check the Following
Is the machine turned ON? Is the power cord connected?
●If the machine is turned ON but does not respond, turn it OFF, check whether the power cord is connected
correctly, and turn it back ON. For information connecting the power cord, see "Getting Started".
Manuals Included with the Machine(P. 456)
Are the LAN cable and USB cable connected correctly?
●Check whether these cables are connected correctly.
Parts and Their Functions(P. 16)
Is sleep mode activated?
●If you leave the machine unattended for a specic period of time, it enters sleep mode for power
conservation, not allowing you to operate it.
To cancel sleep mode, press .
Is any message displayed on the screen?
●If a problem occurs, a message is displayed.
When an Error Message Appears(P. 357)
If a problem persists even after checking
Click the link that corresponds to the problem.
Installation/Settings Problems(P. 369)
Printing Problems(P. 373)
Troubleshooting
368
Installation/Settings Problems
0W20-05U
See Common Problems(P. 368) also.
Problems with the Wireless/Wired LAN Connection(P. 369)
Problem with the USB Connection(P. 372)
Problem with the Print Server(P. 372)
Problems with the Wireless/Wired LAN Connection
The wireless LAN and wired LAN cannot be connected at the same time.
●The wireless LAN and wired LAN cannot be connected at the same time. The following can be used at the
same time: a USB cable and a wireless LAN, or a USB cable and a wired LAN.
Remote UI is not displayed.
●Are <Use HTTP> and <Use Remote UI> set to <On>?
Disabling HTTP Communication(P. 232)
Disabling Remote UI(P. 233)
●If the machine is connected to a wireless LAN, check that the Wi-Fi indicator is lit and the IP address is set
correctly, and then start the Remote UI again.
Operation Panel(P. 24)
Viewing Network Settings(P. 161)
●If the machine is connected to a wired LAN, check that the cable is connected rmly and the IP address is set
correctly, and then start the Remote UI again.
Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 135)
Viewing Network Settings(P. 161)
●Are you using a proxy server? If so, add the machine's IP address to the [Exceptions] list (addresses that do
not use the proxy server) in the Web browser's proxy settings dialog.
●Is communication not limited by the rewall on your computer? If IP addresses are or an MAC address is
incorrectly entered, the Remote UI cannot be displayed. In that case, you need to use the operation panel to
set <IPv4 Address Filter>, <IPv6 Address Filter>, or <MAC Address Filter> to <Off>.
Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls(P. 218)
IPv4 Address Filter(P. 339)
IPv6 Address Filter(P. 339)
MAC Address Filter(P. 340)
A connection to a network cannot be established.
●The IP address may not be set correctly. Set the IP address again.
Setting IP Addresses(P. 153)
●When you connect the machine to a computer via wireless LAN, check whether the machine is properly
installed and ready to connect to the network.
When the machine cannot connect to the wireless LAN(P. 370)
Troubleshooting
369
You are unsure of the set IP address.
Viewing Network Settings(P. 161)
The connection method cannot be switched between a wired LAN and a
wireless LAN.
●Did you select a wired LAN or a wireless LAN on the operation panel on the machine as well? This selection is
required to have the machine switch to your selection.
Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN(P. 134)
You are unsure of the SSID or the network key of the wireless router to be
connected. The SSID is not displayed on the screen.
●Check whether the SSID can be found on the wireless router or package box.
●Check the SSID or the network key of the wireless router by using Canon MF/LBP Wireless Setup Assistant.
Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 150)
The SSID of the wireless router to be connected is not displayed in the access
point list.
●Check whether the SSID is correct.
Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 150)
●If the SSID of the wireless router is hidden (using a stealth mode*), set the SSID to be visible on the wireless
router.
* A mode that disables the SSID auto-detection of other devices.
●Check whether the machine is properly installed and ready to connect to the network.
When the machine cannot connect to the wireless LAN(P. 370)
The machine dials up to an unintended connection destination (if a dialup
router is connected to a network).
●If a dialup router does not need to pass broadcast packets, set the dialup router so that the broadcast
packets will not pass. If the dialup router needs to pass broadcast packets, check whether the settings are
correct.
●If a DNS server is located in an external network, set the IP address to be connected, not the host name, even
if connecting to the devices that are on the network that is connected to the machine.
●If a DNS server is located on a network that is connected to the machine and the information about the
devices that are connected to an external network is registered to the DNS server, check whether the settings
are correct.
When the machine cannot connect to the wireless LAN
Check the status of your computer.
●Have the settings of the computer and the wireless router been completed?
●Are the cables of the wireless router (including the power cord and LAN cable)
correctly plugged in?
Troubleshooting
370
●Is the wireless router turned on?
If the problem persists even after checking the above:
●Turn off the devices, and then turn them on again.
●Wait for a while, and try again to connect to the network.
Check whether the machine is turned ON.
●If the machine is turned ON, turn it OFF, and then turn it back ON.
Check the installation site of the machine and the wireless router.
●Is the machine too far from the wireless router?
●Are there any obstacles such as walls between the machine and the wireless router?
●Are there any appliances such as microwave ovens or digital cordless phones that
emit radio waves near the machine?
Perform one of the following settings again.
Setting Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode(P. 138)
Setting Up Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode(P. 140)
Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 143)
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 146)
When you need to manually set up the connection
If the wireless router is set as described below, manually enter all the required information for the wireless LAN
connection ( Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 146) ).
●ANY connection refusal* is activated.
●The WEP key that was automatically generated (hexadecimal) is selected.
●The stealth mode is activated.
* A function in which the wireless router refuses the connection if the SSID on the device to be connected is set to "ANY"
or is blank.
When you need to change the settings of the wireless router
If the wireless router is set as described below, change the settings of the router.
●The MAC address packet ltering is set.
Troubleshooting
371
●When only IEEE 802.11n is used for the wireless communication, WEP is selected or the WPA/WPA2
encryption method is set to TKIP.
Problem with the USB Connection
Cannot communicate.
●Change the USB cable. If you are using a long USB cable, replace it with a short one.
●If you are using a USB hub, connect the machine directly to your computer using a USB cable.
Problem with the Print Server
You cannot nd the print server to connect to.
●Are the print server and computer connected correctly?
●Is the print server running?
●Do you have user rights to connect to the print server? If you are not sure, contact the server administrator.
●Is [Network discovery] enabled? (Windows Vista/7/8/Server 2008/Server 2012)
Enabling [Network discovery](P. 474)
You cannot connect to a shared printer.
●On the network, does the machine appear among the printers of the print server? If it is not displayed,
contact the network or server administrator.
Displaying Shared Printers in the Print Server(P. 475)
Troubleshooting
372
Printing Problems
0W20-05W
See Common Problems(P. 368) also.
Printing results are not satisfactory. Paper creases or curls.
When You Cannot Print Properly(P. 376)
You cannot print.
●Can you print a Windows test page? If you can print a Windows test page, there is no problem with the
machine or the printer driver. Check the print settings of your application.
Printing a Test Page in Windows(P. 476)
If you cannot print a test page, check the following according to your environment.
Wireless LAN connection
●Check the connection status (signal strength) of the wireless LAN.
Viewing Network Settings(P. 161)
If the connection is poor, try the following.
●Change the channel of your wireless LAN router. If you have more than one router, set the channels to be
at least ve channels apart.
●If you can change the radio output power of your wireless LAN router, raise the output power.
●If your computer is connected to a wireless LAN, are the computer and this machine using the same
wireless LAN router SSID? If they are different, reset the wireless LAN connection settings of this machine.
Viewing Network Settings(P. 161)
Checking the SSID to Which Your Computer Is Connected(P. 480)
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 136)
When you reset wireless LAN connection settings
●As the wireless LAN router, select the one with the SSID to which the computer is connected.
●Have you selected the correct port? If there is no port to use, create a port.
Checking the Printer Port(P. 478)
Conguring Printer Ports(P. 168)
●Is communication not limited by the rewall on your computer? If IP addresses are incorrectly entered,
you will be not able to access the machine. In that case, you need to use the operation panel to set <IPv4
Address Filter> or <IPv6 Address Filter> to <Off>.
Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls(P. 218)
IPv4 Address Filter(P. 339)
IPv6 Address Filter(P. 339)
●Disable security software and other resident software.
●Reinstall the printer driver in accordance with the Printer Driver Installation Guide.
●Can you print from other computers on the network? If you also cannot print from other computers,
contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.
Troubleshooting
373
Wired LAN connection
●Have you selected the correct port? If there is no port to use, create a port.
Checking the Printer Port(P. 478)
Conguring Printer Ports(P. 168)
●Is communication not limited by the rewall on your computer? If IP addresses are or an MAC address is
incorrectly entered, you will be not able to access the machine. In that case, you need to use the operation
panel to set <IPv4 Address Filter>, <IPv6 Address Filter>, or <MAC Address Filter> to <Off>.
Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls(P. 218)
IPv4 Address Filter(P. 339)
IPv6 Address Filter(P. 339)
MAC Address Filter(P. 340)
●Disable security software and other resident software.
●Reinstall the printer driver in accordance with the Printer Driver Installation Guide.
●Can you print from other computers on the network? If you also cannot print from other computers,
contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.
USB connection
●Have you selected the correct port? If there is no port to use or you are not sure, reinstall the printer driver
in accordance with the Printer Driver Installation Guide. When you reinstall the printer driver, the correct
port is created automatically.
Checking the Printer Port(P. 478)
●Is bidirectional communication enabled? Enable bidirectional communication, and restart the computer.
Checking Bidirectional Communication(P. 479)
●Disable security software and other resident software.
●Connect to another USB port on the computer.
●Can you print from a USB connection to another computer? If you also cannot print from other computers,
contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.
Via print server
●Can you print from the print server? If you can print from the print server, check the connection between
the print server and your computer.
Problem with the Print Server(P. 372)
●Disable security software and other resident software.
●Reinstall the printer driver in accordance with the Printer Driver Installation Guide.
●Can you print from other computers via the print server? If you also cannot print from other computers,
contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.
Printing seems to be slow. * (LBP252dw)
●Disabling Secure Print is recommended if you are not using it.
Changing the Valid Time Period for Secured Documents(P. 115)
* When the free space in memory is running low, the processing speed of the machine becomes slow, just as a computer
does. There is nothing abnormal.
You cannot print with Google Cloud Print.
Using Google Cloud Print(P. 452)
Troubleshooting
374
It takes a long time before printing starts.
●Did you print to narrow width paper? After you print to narrow width paper, the machine may cool itself to
maintain the print quality. As a result, it may take some time before the next job is printed. Wait until the
machine is ready to print. Printing will resume when the temperature inside the machine has fallen.
A blank sheet is output (nothing is printed).
●Did you pull the sealing tape out when loading the toner cartridge? If you did not pull it out, remove the
toner cartridge, pull the sealing tape out, and reload the toner cartridge.
How to Replace Toner Cartridges(P. 400)
Troubleshooting
375
When You Cannot Print Properly
0W20-05X
If printing results are not satisfactory, or paper creases or curls, try the following solutions. If the problems persist,
contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.
Smudge Marks Appear on the
Bottom Edge of Printouts(P. 378)
Smudges Appear on
Printouts(P. 378)
Toner Smudges and Splatters
Appear(P. 379)
Afterimages Appear in Blank
Areas(P. 380)
Printouts Are Faded(P. 380) A Portion of the Page Is Not
Printed(P. 381)
Streaks Appear/Printing is
Uneven(P. 381)
White Spots Appear(P. 382) Black Spots Appear(P. 382)
Troubleshooting
376
Printing Results Are Not Satisfactory
0W20-05Y
Dirt inside the machine may affect printing results. Perform care and cleaning to the machine rst.
Cleaning the Machine(P. 392)
Smudge Marks Appear on the Bottom Edge of Printouts
Are you using appropriate paper?
●Check the supported paper types and replace with an appropriate type.Also, specify the paper size and
type settings properly.
Paper(P. 440)
Loading Paper(P. 35)
Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 50)
Do you print data without margins?
●This symptom occurs if a margin is set to none in the printer driver. The marginal areas within the rst 5
mm from the respective edges of paper are not printable (for envelopes, the top and bottom marginal
areas within the rst 10 mm from the top/bottom edge are not printable). Make sure to have margins
around the document to print.
[Finishing] tab [Advanced Settings] [Expand Print Region and Print] [Off]
Smudges Appear on Printouts
Are you using appropriate paper?
●Check usable paper, and replace with appropriate paper.
Paper(P. 440)
Loading Paper(P. 35)
Troubleshooting
378
Do streaks appear on printouts depending on the paper type or the operating
environment?
●Change the setting for [Special Print Adjustment A]. The improvement effect is weakest with [Mode 1] and
strongest with [Mode 4]. Try the adjustment starting with [Mode 1].
Setting in the Printer Driver
[Finishing] tab [Advanced Settings] [Special Print Adjustment A] Select the mode
Specifying Settings in the Setting Menu of the Operation Panel
Special Printing Mode A(P. 334)
●When printing from the computer, the setting in the printer driver takes precedence. When the setting of
[Graphics Mode] in the printer driver is changed to [UFR II Mode], the setting in the operation panel takes
precedence.
●This item cannot be set when <Barcode Adjustment Mode> is set to one of <Mode 1> to <Mode 3>.
Barcode Adjustment Mode(P. 316)
●Print density will be lighter when you select stronger improvement. It may also result in less sharp edges
and rougher details.
●If the problem cannot be solved in spite of this item having been set, set <Special Printing Mode D> to
<On>. Special Printing Mode D(P. 336)
Do streaks appear immediately after you replace the toner cartridge or when
you print for the rst time after a long time?
●Change the setting for <Special Printing Mode B>. The improvement effect is weakest with <Mode 1> and
strongest with <Mode 3>. Try the adjustment starting with <Mode 1>.
Special Printing Mode B(P. 335)
●Printing speed becomes slower when you select stronger improvement.
Toner Smudges and Splatters Appear
Do smudges appear on printouts depending on the paper type or the
environmental conditions (more specically when you print on heavy paper or
use the machine in an environment with low humidity)?
●Set <Special Printing Mode U> to <On>.
Special Printing Mode U(P. 334)
Troubleshooting
379
●When you set this item to <On>, print quality may be lower depending on the paper type or the operating
environment (more specically when you print on thin paper or use the machine in an environment with
high humidity).
Are you using appropriate paper?
●Check usable paper, and replace with appropriate paper.
Paper(P. 440)
Loading Paper(P. 35)
Afterimages Appear in Blank Areas
Are you using appropriate paper?
●Check usable paper, and replace with appropriate paper.
Paper(P. 440)
Loading Paper(P. 35)
Is it time to replace the toner cartridge?
●Materials inside the toner cartridge may have deteriorated. Replace the toner cartridge.
How to Replace Toner Cartridges(P. 400)
Printouts Are Faded
Is the amount remaining in toner cartridge running low?
●Remove the toner cartridge, shake it ve or six times gently to evenly distribute the toner inside the
cartridge, and then reload it into the machine.
Using Up Toner(P. 398)
Troubleshooting
380
Are you using appropriate paper?
●Check usable paper, and replace with appropriate paper. Also, specify the paper size and type settings
properly.
Paper(P. 440)
Loading Paper(P. 35)
Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 50)
A Portion of the Page Is Not Printed
Do the paper guides align with the edges of the paper?
●If the paper guides are too loose or too tight, part of a document may not be printed.
Loading Paper(P. 35)
Do you print data without margins?
●This symptom occurs if a margin is set to none in the printer driver. The marginal areas within the rst 5
mm from the respective edges of paper are not printable (for envelopes, the top and bottom marginal
areas within the rst 10 mm from the top/bottom edge are not printable). Make sure to have margins
around the document to print.
[Finishing] tab [Advanced Settings] [Expand Print Region and Print] [Off]
Streaks Appear/Printing is Uneven
Have you cleaned the xing unit?
●Clean the xing unit.
Fixing Unit(P. 394)
Troubleshooting
381
Is the amount remaining in toner cartridge running low?
●Remove the toner cartridge, shake it ve or six times gently to evenly distribute the toner inside the
cartridge, and then reload it into the machine.
Using Up Toner(P. 398)
Is it time to replace the toner cartridge?
●Materials inside the toner cartridge may have deteriorated. Replace the toner cartridge.
How to Replace Toner Cartridges(P. 400)
White Spots Appear
Are you using paper that has absorbed moisture?
●Replace with appropriate paper.
Loading Paper(P. 35)
Are you using appropriate paper?
●Check usable paper, and replace with appropriate paper.
Paper(P. 440)
Loading Paper(P. 35)
Is it time to replace the toner cartridge?
●Materials inside the toner cartridge may have deteriorated. Replace the toner cartridge.
How to Replace Toner Cartridges(P. 400)
Black Spots Appear
Troubleshooting
382
Have you cleaned the xing unit?
●Clean the xing unit.
Fixing Unit(P. 394)
Reverse Side of Paper is Smudged
Have you loaded paper that is smaller than the size of the print data?
●Check to make sure that the paper size matches the size of the print data.
Have you cleaned the xing unit?
●Clean the xing unit.
Fixing Unit(P. 394)
Printed Barcode Cannot Be Read
Are you using a small barcode or a barcode consisting of thick lines?
●Enlarge the barcode.
●If the direction of lines in the barcode is perpendicular to the paper output direction, turn the image 90
degrees to make the lines parallel to the paper output direction.
●If the problem persists even after performing the above operation, change the mode by using [Barcode
Adjustment Mode]. The improvement effect is weakest with [Mode 1] and strongest with [Mode 3]. Try the
adjustment starting with [Mode 1].
Setting in the Printer Driver
[Finishing] tab [Advanced Settings] [Barcode Adjustment Mode] Select the mode
Specifying Settings in the Setting Menu of the Operation Panel
Barcode Adjustment Mode(P. 316)
Troubleshooting
383
●Print density will be lighter when you select stronger improvement.
●When printing from the computer, the setting in the printer driver takes precedence. When the setting
of [Graphics Mode] in the printer driver is changed to [UFR II Mode] and [Barcode Adjustment Mode] is
changed to [Printer Default], the setting in the operation panel takes precedence.
●When you set [Barcode Adjustment Mode] to one of [Mode 1] to [Mode 3], [Special Print Adjustment A]
is automatically set to [Off].
Troubleshooting
384
Paper Creases or Curls
0W20-060
Paper Creases
Is paper loaded correctly?
●If paper is not loaded below the load limit line or the load limit guide or is loaded obliquely, it may crease.
Loading Paper(P. 35)
Are you using paper that has absorbed moisture?
●Replace with appropriate paper.
Loading Paper(P. 35)
Are you using appropriate paper?
●Check usable paper, and replace with appropriate paper.
Paper(P. 440)
Loading Paper(P. 35)
Paper Curls
Are you using paper that has absorbed moisture?
●Replace with appropriate paper.
Loading Paper(P. 35)
●When the current setting of <Paper Type> is <Plain>, change it to <Plain L>
Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 50)
●Change the setting for <Special Printing Mode V>. The improvement effect is stronger with <Mode 2> than
with <Mode 1>. First try the adjustment with <Mode 1>.
Troubleshooting
385
Special Printing Mode V(P. 335)
Printing speed becomes slower when you select stronger improvement.
Are you using appropriate paper?
●Check usable paper, and replace with appropriate paper. Also, specify the paper size and type settings
properly.
Paper(P. 440)
Loading Paper(P. 35)
Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 50)
Troubleshooting
386
Paper Is Fed Incorrectly
0W20-061
Paper Is Not Fed/Two or More Sheets Are Fed Together
Is paper loaded correctly?
●Fan the paper stack thoroughly so that paper is not stuck together.
●Check whether paper is loaded correctly.
Loading Paper(P. 35)
●Check whether the number of sheets of paper loaded is appropriate and whether the appropriate paper is
used.
Paper(P. 440)
Loading Paper(P. 35)
●Check whether mixed sizes and types of paper are loaded together.
Printouts Are Skewed
Do the paper guides align with the edges of the paper?
●If the paper guides are too loose or too tight, the printouts are skewed.
Loading Paper(P. 35)
Troubleshooting
387
When a Problem Cannot Be Solved
0W20-062
If you cannot solve a problem by referring to the information in this chapter, contact your local authorized Canon
dealer or the Canon help line.
●Do not disassemble or repair the machine yourself
If you disassemble or repair the machine yourself, it may not be covered by warranty.
◼When Contacting Canon
When contacting us, have the following information ready:
●Product name (LBP252dw / LBP251dw)
●Dealer where you purchased the machine
●Details about your problem (such as what you did and what happened as a result)
●Serial number (10 alphanumeric characters long, found on the label on the back side of the machine)
Checking the serial number from the operation panel
You can also check by <Device Status> <Serial Number>.
Troubleshooting
388
Maintenance
Maintenance ..................................................................................................................................................... 390
Cleaning the Machine ....................................................................................................................................... 392
Exterior ......................................................................................................................................................... 393
Fixing Unit .................................................................................................................................................... 394
Replacing Toner Cartridges .............................................................................................................................. 396
Using Up Toner ............................................................................................................................................. 398
How to Replace Toner Cartridges ................................................................................................................. 400
Relocating the Machine .................................................................................................................................... 402
Maintaining and Improving Print Quality ....................................................................................................... 404
Adjusting Print Density ................................................................................................................................. 405
Adjusting Print Position ................................................................................................................................ 407
Printing Reports and Lists ................................................................................................................................ 409
Consumables Status Report ......................................................................................................................... 410
User Data List/System Manager Data List ..................................................................................................... 411
Department ID Management Report ............................................................................................................ 412
IPSec Policy List ............................................................................................................................................ 413
PCL Font List ................................................................................................................................................. 414
PS Font List (LBP252dw) ................................................................................................................................ 415
Viewing the Counter Value ............................................................................................................................... 416
Using a USB Memory Device to Save/Load Registered Data ........................................................................... 417
Saving Registered Data to a USB Memory Device ......................................................................................... 418
Loading Registered Data from a USB Memory Device .................................................................................. 420
Initializing Settings ........................................................................................................................................... 422
Initializing Menu ........................................................................................................................................... 423
Initializing Key and Certicate ...................................................................................................................... 425
Maintenance
389
Maintenance
0W20-063
This chapter describes upkeep of the machine, including how to clean the machine and initialize settings.
◼Basic Cleaning Cleaning the Machine(P. 392)
●The machine becomes dirty, see Exterior(P. 393) .
●Streaks appear on printouts, see Fixing Unit(P. 394) .
◼Replacing Toner Cartridges Replacing Toner Cartridges(P. 396)
●If you want to use all of the toner, see Using Up Toner(P. 398) .
●How to replace toner cartridges, see How to Replace Toner
Cartridges(P. 400) .
◼Relocating the Machine
●Relocating the machine for maintenance or an oce move, see Relocating
the Machine(P. 402) .
◼Managing Print Quality Maintaining and Improving Print Quality(P. 404)
●If you want to adjust the toner density to be used for printing, see Adjusting Print Density(P. 405) .
●If you want to adjust the print position, see Adjusting Print Position(P. 407) .
◼Printing Reports and Lists
●Printing out lists of settings or the like , see Printing Reports and Lists(P. 409) .
◼Checking the Total Pages Printed by the Machine
If you want to check the total page number of printouts , see Viewing the Counter Value(P. 416) .
Maintenance
390
Cleaning the Machine
0W20-064
Regularly clean the machine to prevent deterioration in printing quality and to ensure that you use it safely and easily.
Carefully read the safety instructions before you start cleaning. Maintenance and Inspections(P. 9)
Where to Clean
Exterior of the machine and ventilation slots
Exterior(P. 393)
Internal xing unit
Fixing Unit(P. 394)
Maintenance
392
Exterior
0W20-065
Regularly wipe the exterior of the machine, especially around the ventilation slots, to keep the machine in good
condition.
1Turn OFF the machine, and unplug the power cord from the AC power outlet.
●When you turn OFF the machine, data that is waiting to be printed is deleted.
2Clean the exterior of the machine and the ventilation slots.
●Use a soft, well-wrung-out cloth dampened with water or a mild detergent diluted with water.
●To locate the ventilation slots, see Front Side(P. 17) and Back Side(P. 19) .
3Wait for the exterior of machine to dry completely.
4Reconnect the power cord and turn ON the machine.
Maintenance
393
Fixing Unit
0W20-066
Dirt may adhere to the xing units inside the machine and cause black streaks to appear on printouts. To clean the
xing unit, perform the following procedure. Note that you cannot clean the xing unit when the machine has
documents waiting to be printed. To clean the xing unit, you need plain A4 or Letter size paper. Set the paper in the
paper drawer or multi-purpose tray ( Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 37) Loading Paper in the Multi-
Purpose Tray(P. 41) ) before performing the following procedure.
●Cleaning consumes the toner cartridge. Make sure that there is sucient toner cartridge remaining
beforehand. Checking the Amount Remaining in the Toner Cartridge(P. 397)
1Press .
2Use / to select <Adjustment/Maintenance>, and press .
3Select <Clean Fixing Assembly>, and press .
4Check that the size and type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the
machine, and press .
5Press .
➠The cleaning sheet is printed out.
6Load the printed cleaning sheet in the multi-purpose tray, with the printed side face
down.
Maintenance
394
If paper remains in the multi-purpose tray
Remove the loaded paper before loading the cleaning sheet.
7Press .
➠Cleaning starts. When the <Finished.> message is displayed approximately 1 minute later.
Maintenance
395
Replacing Toner Cartridges
0W20-067
The machine will display a message when a toner cartridge is nearly empty. Note that the print quality becomes poor if
you continue printing without taking any action. You can check the amount remaining in the toner cartridge on the
display.
When a Message Appear(P. 396)
If Printouts are Poor in Quality(P. 396)
Checking the Amount Remaining in the Toner Cartridge(P. 397)
◼When a Message Appear
Depending on which message is displayed, you will need to make sure that you have a replacement toner cartridge
ready or replace the toner cartridge. How to Replace Toner Cartridges(P. 400) Consumables(P. 443)
<Prepare a cartridge.>
This message noties you that a toner cartridge needs to be replaced soon. Make sure that you have a
replacement toner cartridge ready. Replace the toner cartridge if you see this message before you start to print
a large job.
When this message is displayed
●You can continue printing the document.
Specify when this message is displayed
●You can set any value as the percentage of the amount remaining in the toner cartridge that triggers
this message. Display Timing for Cartridge Preparation Notication (P. 332)
<Cart. end of lifetime. Rplcmt. recommended.>
This message noties you that a toner cartridge has reached the end of its lifetime. It is recommended that you
replace the cartridge with a new one. You can continue printing, but the print quality cannot be guaranteed.
◼If Printouts are Poor in Quality
If your printouts begin to show any of the following features, one of your toner cartridges is consumed. Replace the
nearly empty toner cartridge even if no message is displayed.
How to Replace Toner Cartridges(P. 400)
Maintenance
396
Streaks appear Partially faded Uneven density
Afterimages appear in blank areas White spots appear
●If, of the above symptoms, "Streaks appear," "Partially faded," or "Uneven density" appears, performing the
procedure for Using Up Toner(P. 398) may allow you to get ne print again, for some limited time.
◼Checking the Amount Remaining in the Toner Cartridge
You can check the amount remaining in the toner cartridge according to the following, whenever you want to. It is
recommended that you check the level before you start to print a large job.
<Device Status> <Amount Remaining in Cartridge> Check the amount
remaining in the toner cartridge
Toner Level
Displays the amount remaining in the toner cartridge. Depending on your environment, other internal parts
may reach the end of their lifetime before the toner runs out.
●The displayed amount remaining in the toner cartridge can be used only as a guide and may differ
from the actual amount.
LINKS
Consumables(P. 443)
Maintenance
397
Using Up Toner
0W20-068
Symptoms like the following appear on printouts when toner runs low.
Streaks appear Partially faded Uneven density
Perform the following procedure when any of the above symptoms appears. They will allow you to use up all of the
toner in the toner cartridge. Performing this procedure may allow you to get ne print again for some time until the
toner is used up. If the symptom does not improve after you perform the following procedure, replace the toner
cartridge ( How to Replace Toner Cartridges(P. 400) ). Before starting the procedure, read the precautions given in
Maintenance and Inspections(P. 9) and Consumables(P. 10) .
1Open the front cover while holding down on the button.
2Remove the toner cartridge.
3Shake the toner cartridge ve or six times as shown below to evenly distribute the
toner inside the cartridge.
Maintenance
398
4Install the toner cartridge.
●Fully push it in until it cannot go any further.
5Close the front cover.
Maintenance
399
How to Replace Toner Cartridges
0W20-069
Read the precautions in Maintenance and Inspections(P. 9) and Consumables(P. 10) before replacing the toner
cartridges.
1Open the front cover while holding down on the button.
2Remove the toner cartridge.
3Remove the replacement toner cartridge from the protective bag.
4Shake the toner cartridge ve or six times as shown below to evenly distribute the
toner inside the cartridge, and then place it on a at surface.
Maintenance
400
5Pull the sealing tape straight out.
●The full length of the sealing tape is approximately 50 cm.
When pulling out the sealing tape
If the sealing tape remains inside the toner cartridge, the quality of printouts may deteriorate.
●Do not pull out the sealing tape at an angle or sideways. If the tape breaks, you may not be able to pull it
out completely.
●If the sealing tape becomes stuck when pulling it out, keep pulling until it is completely removed.
6Install the toner cartridge.
●Fully push it in until it cannot go any further.
7Close the front cover.
Maintenance
401
Relocating the Machine
0W20-06A
The machine is heavy. Make sure to follow the procedures below when moving the machine to avoid injury, and also
make sure to read the safety precautions before you begin. Important Safety Instructions(P. 2)
1Turn OFF the machine and computer.
●When you turn OFF the machine, data that is waiting to be printed is deleted.
2Disconnect the cables and cord from the machine in numerical order as in the
illustration below.
●Whether the cables with "*" are connected depends on your environment.
Power plug
Power cord
USB cable*
LAN cable*
3When transporting the machine across a long distance, remove the toner cartridge.
How to Replace Toner Cartridges(P. 400)
4Pull out the paper drawer.
●Make sure to hold the paper drawer with both hands, and pull it out gently. Otherwise, you may damage
the paper drawer by dropping it, if it slides out too easily.
5Close all the open covers, and move the machine to a new location.
●The machine is heavy ( Machine Specications(P. 437) ). Do not try hard to carry the machine.
Maintenance
402
●Position yourself toward the front side of the machine and hold the lift handles, then lift up the machine. If
you have attached the optional paper feeder, leave the optional drawer on the oor and move it after moving
the main unit of the machine.
6Carefully place the machine at the new installation site.
●For information about how to install the machine after relocating it, see Getting Started. Manuals
Included with the Machine(P. 456)
Maintenance
403
Maintaining and Improving Print Quality
0W20-08E
When you cannot obtain a satisfactory print result, such as when the resulting print density or print position is
different than expected, try the following adjustments.
◼Density Adjustment
Adjust the toner density. You can make ne adjustment of toner density by density level. Adjusting Print
Density(P. 405)
◼Print Position Adjustment
For each paper source, you can adjust the print position. Adjusting Print Position(P. 407)
Maintenance
404
Adjusting Print Density
0W20-06C
If the resulting print is darker or lighter than expected, you can adjust the toner density. You can make ne adjustment
of the toner density by dividing the whole density range into three areas.
●If <Toner Save> is set to <On>, you cannot use this adjustment function. Toner Save(P. 316)
1Press .
2Use / to select <Printer Settings>, and press .
3Select <Print Quality> <Density>.
4Adjust the density.
1Select <Density>, and press .
2Use / to adjust the density.
3Press .
Making ne adjustment of toner density by density level
You can make ne adjustment of toner density on three density levels - high, medium, and low.
1Select <Density (Fine Adjust)>, and press .
2Select the desired density level, and press .
Maintenance
405
3Use / to adjust the density.
4Press .
●If you want to also make adjustments on other density levels, repeat the operations in steps 2 to 4.
5Select <Apply>, and press .
5Select <Apply>, and press .
When the printed text or thin lines are faded
You can make the whole print job darker by using <Printer Density> under <Adjustment/Maintenance> in the
Setting Menu of the operation panel.
Maintenance
406
Adjusting Print Position
0W20-08F
If a document is printed off-center or out of the printable range, adjust the print position. You can adjust the print
position for each paper source. You can adjust the print position in the range -5.0 to +5.0 mm in vertical direction, and
in the range -3.0 to +3.0 mm in horizontal direction, both in increments of 0.1 mm.
Checking the Direction and Distance to Adjust
When you adjust the print position, specify the direction using "+" and "-" and the distance using "mm." For
<Adjust Vertically (Front Side)>/<Adjust Vertically (Back Side)>, specify a value with a "+" sign to shift the print
position in the up-to-down direction. For <Adjust Horizontally (Front Side)>/<Adjust Horizontally (Back Side)>,
specify a value with a "+" sign to shift the print position in the left-to-right direction. To shift in the reverse
direction, specify a value with a "-" sign.
<Adjust Vertically (Front Side)>/<Adjust Vertically
(Back Side)> <Adjust Horizontally (Front Side)>/<Adjust
Horizontally (Back Side)>
1Press .
2Use / to select <Adjustment/Maintenance>, and press .
3Select <Adjust Print Position>, and press .
4Select the paper source, and press .
5Select the combination of adjustment direction and printing side, and press .
6Set an adjustment value.
Maintenance
407
●Use / to move the cursor, and use / to switch between "+" and "-" and to increase or
decrease the value.
7Press .
Adjusting Print Position for All Print Jobs
You can use <Printer Settings> in the setting menu of the operation panel to adjust the print position for all
print jobs regardless of the paper source. You can adjust the print position in the range of -50.0 to +50.0 mm in
0.5 mm increments in vertical/horizontal direction.
Offset Short Edge/Offset Long Edge(P. 318)
Maintenance
408
Printing Reports and Lists
0W20-06E
You can check the condition of consumables and the machine settings by printing reports and lists.
Consumables Status Report
You can check the consumables status. Consumables Status Report(P. 410)
User Data List/System Manager Data List
You can check the list of the settings ( Setting Menu List(P. 287) ) as well as the content that has been
registered in the machine. User Data List/System Manager Data List(P. 411)
Department ID Management Report
You can check the total volume of printouts for each <Department ID>. Department ID Management
Report(P. 412)
IPSec Policy List
You can check the list of policy names and the content of the IPSec settings that are registered in the machine.
IPSec Policy List(P. 413)
PCL Font List
You can check the list of available fonts for the machine. PCL Font List(P. 414)
PS Font List
You can check the fonts available in PS mode. PS Font List (LBP252dw)(P. 415)
Maintenance
409
Consumables Status Report
0W20-06F
You can check the consumables status installed in the machine.
<Output Report> <Print List> <Consumables Status Report> Check
that the size and type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine <Yes>
Example:
LINKS
Replacing Toner Cartridges(P. 396)
Maintenance
410
User Data List/System Manager Data List
0W20-06H
You can check the list of the settings ( Setting Menu List(P. 287) ) as well as the content that has been registered in
the machine by printing a User Data List or a System Manager Data List. Both lists include the paper size and type
registered in the machine.
<Output Report> <Print List> <User Data List> or <System Manager Data
List> Check that the size and type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the
machine <Yes>
Example:
●The <User Data List> does not include the setting lists of <Network Settings> and <System Management
Settings>. To check all the settings items, including <Network Settings> and <System Management
Settings>, print the <System Manager Data List>.
LINKS
Loading Paper(P. 35)
Maintenance
411
Department ID Management Report
0W20-06J
When Department ID Management is enabled, you can check the total volume of printouts for each <Department ID>
by printing a Department ID Management Report. By checking the printout totals, you can better manage your paper
and toner cartridge supplies.
<Output Report> <Print List> <Department ID Management Report>
Check that the size and type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the
machine <Yes>
Example:
LINKS
Setting the Department ID Management(P. 209)
Maintenance
412
IPSec Policy List
0W20-06K
You can check the list of policy names and the IPSec settings registered in the machine by printing an IPSec Policy List.
<Output Report> <Print List> <IPSec Policy List> Check that the size
and type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine <Yes>
Example:
LINKS
Conguring IPSec Settings(P. 239)
Maintenance
413
PCL Font List
0W20-06L
You can print a list to check the fonts available in PCL mode.
<Output Report> <Print List> <PCL Font List> Check that the size
and type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine <Yes>
Example:
Maintenance
414
PS Font List
0W20-06R
You can print a list to check the fonts available in PS mode.
<Output Report> <Print List> <PS Font List> Check that the size
and type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine <Yes>
Example:
Maintenance
415
Viewing the Counter Value
0W20-06S
You can check the total number of pages printed by the machine. The total number also includes pages of reports and
lists.
<Device Status> <Check Counter> Checking the number of pages printed
Maintenance
416
Using a USB Memory Device to Save/Load Registered
Data
0W20-06U
Menu options data that has been registered in the machine can be saved in a USB memory device (export). Data that is
saved on a USB memory device can also be registered in the machine (import). Data exported from this machine can
be imported to another machine of the same model. So you can easily copy a variety of settings data to multiple
machines.
Saving Registered Data to a USB Memory Device(P. 418)
Loading Registered Data from a USB Memory Device(P. 420)
Do not turn OFF the machine until the export/import process is complete
●It may take a few minutes to complete the process. If the machine is turned OFF during the process, it may
result in damage to data or the machine.
Do not operate the machine during the export/import process
●Before exporting/importing, check that no operations such as printing documents are currently in progress.
●For the settings that cannot be imported or exported, see Setting Menu List(P. 287) .
Available USB Memory Devices
You can use USB memory devices with the following format styles.
●FAT16 (memory capacity: up to 2 GB)
●FAT32 (memory capacity: up to 32 GB)
●Do not use non-standard USB memory devices. You may not be able to export/import data properly
with some USB memory devices.
●Do not connect anything other than a USB memory device. USB memory devices cannot be connected
via a USB hub or an extension cable.
●Do not use USB memory devices with special functions such as built-in security functions.
Maintenance
417
Saving Registered Data to a USB Memory Device
0W20-06W
You can export machine settings data and save them in a USB memory device. It is recommended that you regularly
back up important settings.
1Connect a USB memory device to the USB port for a USB device.
●Do not disconnect, jostle, or turn OFF the machine or USB memory device while the data is being
transferred.
2Press .
3Use / to select <System Management Settings>, and press .
●If the logon screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN using the numeric keys, and then press .
Logging on to the Machine(P. 34)
4Select <Import/Export of Settings> <Export>.
5Enter the password, select <Apply>, and press .
●Enter a password for the export data consisting of up to 32 alphanumeric characters.
This password will be required when you import the data to the machine. Loading Registered Data from
a USB Memory Device(P. 420)
6Enter the password again for conrmation, select <Apply>, and press .
}
Maintenance
418
➠Exporting starts.
7Disconnect the USB memory device from the USB port.
1Press .
2Select <Device Status>, and press .
3Select <Remove Memory Media>, and press .
●Wait until the <Memory media can be safely removed.> message is displayed.
4Disconnect the USB memory device.
Maintenance
419
Loading Registered Data from a USB Memory Device
0W20-06X
Load (import) data that was exported from the machine to a USB memory device. You can also import settings from
another machine if it is the same model as your machine.
1Connect a USB memory device to the USB port for a USB device.
●Do not remove, bump or jostle the USB memory device while data is being imported or exported.
2Press .
3Use / to select <System Management Settings>, and press .
●If the logon screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN using the numeric keys, and then press .
Logging on to the Machine(P. 34)
4Select <Import/Export of Settings> <Import>.
5Check the message, select <Yes>, and press .
6Enter the password, select <Apply>, and press .
●Enter the password that was set when exporting the data.
➠Importing starts. The machine automatically restarts after the import is complete.
Maintenance
420
7Disconnect the USB memory device from the USB port.
1Press .
2Select <Device Status>, and press .
3Select <Remove Memory Media>, and press .
●Wait until the <Memory media can be safely removed.> message is displayed.
4Disconnect the USB memory device.
Maintenance
421
Initializing Menu
0W20-070
You can restore the settings of the machine ( Setting Menu List(P. 287) ). Depending on the settings selected, you
may need to restart the machine after initialization.
<System Management Settings> <Initialize Menu> Select the item you want
to initialize <Yes> Restart the machine if necessary
Items for initializing
Select the setting you want to initialize.
When <System Management Settings> is selected
Select the specic system management settings that you want to initialize, select <Yes>, and press .
Settings to be initialized
Select the settings to be initialized.
<Initialize All>
Initializes all the system management settings.
If Remote UI settings are initialized
The Remote UI Access PIN is also initialized. After an initialization, reset the Remote UI Access PIN.
Setting a Remote UI PIN(P. 216)
Maintenance
423
You can use the procedure below to restore the default <Network Settings> set at the time of purchase.
<Network Settings> <Initialize Network Settings> <Yes> Restart the machine
<Initialize All>
Initializes all the settings on the machine.
Maintenance
424
Initializing Key and Certicate
0W20-071
You can restore the settings of the key pairs and digital certicates. Note that all the key pairs that you registered in
the machine and certicates (except the preinstalled digital certicates) will be deleted after initializing.
After initializing, functions that require key pairs such as SSL encrypted communication and TLS of the IEEE
802.1X authentication are not available. To use these functions, congure the settings for the key pairs and
activate the functions again.
<System Management Settings> <Initialize Key and
Certicate> <Yes>
LINKS
Conguring Settings for Key Pairs and Digital Certicates(P. 253)
Maintenance
425
Appendix
Appendix ............................................................................................................................................................. 427
Feature Highlights ............................................................................................................................................ 428
Going Green and Saving Money ................................................................................................................... 429
Improving Eciency ..................................................................................................................................... 431
So Much More .............................................................................................................................................. 433
Specications .................................................................................................................................................... 436
Machine Specications ................................................................................................................................. 437
Wireless LAN Specications .......................................................................................................................... 439
Paper ............................................................................................................................................................ 440
Consumables ..................................................................................................................................................... 443
Optional Items ................................................................................................................................................... 444
Using AirPrint .................................................................................................................................................... 445
Printing with AirPrint .................................................................................................................................... 449
If AirPrint Cannot Be Used ............................................................................................................................ 451
Using Google Cloud Print .................................................................................................................................. 452
Manuals Included with the Machine ................................................................................................................ 456
Using e-Manual .................................................................................................................................................. 457
Installing e-Manual ....................................................................................................................................... 458
Uninstalling e-Manual .................................................................................................................................. 462
Screen Layout of e-Manual ........................................................................................................................... 465
Viewing e-Manual ......................................................................................................................................... 470
Manual Display Settings ............................................................................................................................... 472
Others ................................................................................................................................................................ 473
Basic Windows Operations ........................................................................................................................... 474
For Mac OS Users ......................................................................................................................................... 481
Notice ........................................................................................................................................................... 482
Oce Locations ................................................................................................................................................. 487
Appendix
426
Appendix
0W20-072
This chapter contains technical specications of this machine, instructions on how to use the e-Manual, disclaimers,
copyright information, and other important information for customers.
Appendix
427
Feature Highlights
0W20-073
Give the features that are described in this section a try. The features are grouped under three headings: "Going
Green and Saving Money," "Improving Eciency," and "So Much More."
Appendix
428
Going Green and Saving Money
0W20-074
2-Sided Printing
You can print on both sides of the paper. Use 2-sided printing to save paper not only on large print jobs but also
when you only want to print a few pages. To save even more, combine 2-sided printing with N on 1 printing of
multiple pages on one sheet of paper. You can print up to 32 pages on a single sheet, which is both economical
and environmentally friendly.
To print 2-sided documents from your computer: Switching 1-Sided and 2-Sided Printing(P. 84)
To print multiple pages onto one sheet from your computer: Printing Multiple Pages onto One Sheet(P. 88)
Print Multiple Pages on a Single Sheet
When there are many pages in a document, the printout can be inconveniently bulky - hard to to carry around
and store, and also hard to read. But there is a solution. Print multiple pages onto one sheet! This allows you to
save paper and make your documents slimmer and easier to handle. It is even more effective when combined
with 2-sided printing.
To print multiple pages onto one sheet from your computer: Printing Multiple Pages onto One Sheet(P. 88)
To print 2-sided documents from your computer: Switching 1-Sided and 2-Sided Printing(P. 84)
Appendix
429
Sleep Mode
If you will not be using the machine for a while, you can save power by putting it into sleep mode, either
manually or automatically. You don't need to turn OFF the power each time, but you can still have the machine
minimize its power consumption. The auto shutdown function can boost the savings, by automatically turning
OFF the machine if it remains idle for a longer time. These convenient functions work in the background to save
power and money every day.
To save power by putting the machine into sleep mode: Entering Sleep Mode(P. 62)
To congure the machine to be automatically turned OFF: Powering OFF at a Fixed Time(P. 64)
Save Toner
To economize on toner, you can use draft mode for drafts and test printouts. Or you can switch between modes
according to purpose, using normal mode for beautiful photos and draft mode for company documents that do
not require presentation quality.
For more information about this function, see Saving Toner(P. 102) .
Appendix
430
Improving Eciency
0W20-075
Remote Management with Remote UI
The Remote UI allows you to manage the machine remotely from the computer at your desk. You can check the
remaining amounts of paper and toner cartridge, and check the current status of print jobs to decide if you
should temporarily interrupt print jobs to print urgent documents or move documents up among the jobs
waiting to be printed. Save time and trouble by eliminating trips between your desk and the printer.
For more information about this function, see Using Remote UI(P. 269) .
Register Favorite Settings and Call Them Up at Any Time
Everyone in the oce uses the printer. If you register the most popular settings as the default settings, you can
use them right away. You can also register frequently used combinations of print settings as "proles." Then
you can call up your favorite settings in a single operation, by selecting a prole instead of selecting each
setting every time you print.
Appendix
431
To change default print settings: Changing Default Settings(P. 120)
To register combinations of frequently used print settings as "proles": Registering Combinations of
Frequently Used Print Settings(P. 118)
Save Time with Shortcuts
When you have a number of documents to print, it would be convenient to print them all with one operation.
Canon PageComposer allows you to combine multiple documents and print them all at once. These shortcuts
save time and allow you to work more eciently.
For more information about this function, see Combining and Printing Multiple Documents(P. 104) .
Make Print Settings Quickly with Intuitive Operation
You can easily specify the page layout as well as binding position, switching between 1-sided and 2-sided
printing, etc. intuitively on the preview image in the printer driver. The simple click-operation allows you to
conveniently make settings while viewing how settings are applied.
For more information about this function, see Basic Printing Operations(P. 70) .
Appendix
432
So Much More
0W20-076
Using a smartphone/tablet
At times such as when you want to quickly print out a proposal you completed on a tablet while travelling to a
business destination, or scan materials handed out at a meeting using a smartphone, Canon Mobile Application
comes in handy. Even in environments without a wireless LAN router, you can connect to the machine with a
mobile device wirelessly and directly.
PCless, quick, and easy! An even broader range of possibilities for work/play with functionality made for this age
of speed.
For more information about this function, see Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device(P. 123)
Easy Printing with Google Cloud Print
Hook up to Google Cloud Print with your laptop or cell phone, send your data, and out come your printed
documents. With this machine, Google Cloud Print, and your mobile device, print whenever you want from
wherever you want.
For more information about this function, see Using Google Cloud Print(P. 452) .
Appendix
433
Keep Your Printouts Private (LBP252dw)
Normally, when you print something from your computer, it comes out of the printer right away. However, if
you have sensitive documents, this may not be what you want. Just use secure printing and no one will be able
to print your documents without entering your password on the machine's operation panel. Don't let your
condential documents lie exposed on the tray for everyone to see. For even greater security, you can print a
watermark such as "CONFIDENTIAL" or "PRIVATE COPY."
To print a document secured by a PIN: Printing a Document Secured by a PIN (Secure Print) (LBP252dw)
(P. 109)
To print watermarks such as "CONFIDENTIAL" over the document: Printing Watermarks(P. 96)
Go Wireless
No cables, easy installation, simple maintenance. If you've got a WPS wireless LAN router, bypass the settings
process altogether and be ready to go before you know it. Enjoy the kind of clutter-free and easy to use
document system that you can only get from wireless. Compatible with IEEE 802.11b/g/n for stress-free
wireless, and also supports WEP and WPA/WPA2-PSK (TKIP/AES-CCMP) for tighter security.
For more information about this function, see Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 136) .
Make Posters
Blow up a regular one-sheet printout and make an exceptionally large poster. A large poster will be printed out
on nine sheets. Put them together in a 3x3 grid, and voila!
For more information about this function, see Printing Posters(P. 90) .
Appendix
434
Make Booklets
Sometimes your documents deserve better presentation than a staple in the upper-left corner. Making booklets
is easy. The print driver will take care of the page positioning for you. All you have to do is fold the pages and
staple them along the middle.
For more information about this function, see Printing Booklet(P. 91) .
Automatically Collate Meeting Handouts
When you print multiple copies of a multi-page document, you can use the collate function to print one copy
after another with all of the pages in the correct order. This is convenient when preparing handouts for
meetings or presentations.
For more information about this function, see Collating Printouts by Page(P. 86) .
Appendix
435
Machine Specications
0W20-078
Type Desktop page printer
Printing Method Semiconductor laser + dry-type electrophotographic system
Toner Fixing System On-demand xing system
Resolution 600 dpi
Print Speed *1
(Plain paper (60 to 89 g/m²), A4 continuous
printing)
LBP252dw
●1-sided printing: 33 pages/minute
●2-sided printing: 16.8 pages/minute (8.4 sheets/minute)
LBP251dw
●1-sided printing: 30 pages/minute
●2-sided printing: 16 pages/minute (8 sheets/minute)
Warm-Up Time *2
(from power ON until machine enters standby)
16 seconds or less
Recovery Time *3
(recovery from sleep mode to standby)
9 seconds or less
First Print Time *3
(1-sided printing on A4 size paper, with the output
tray used)
Approx. 6.0 seconds
Acceptable Paper Stock Paper(P. 440)
Printable Area Printable Area(P. 442)
Paper Capacity ●Drawer 1: Approx. 250 sheets
●Drawer 2 (optional): Approx. 500 sheets
●Multi-purpose tray: Approx. 50 sheets
2-Sided Printing ●Standard size:
A4, Legal, Letter, Ocio, Ocio (Brazil), Ocio (Mexico), Foolscap, and Legal (India)
Paper Output Face down (output tray)/Face up (sub-output tray)
Output Capacity *4 ●Output tray: Approx. 150 sheets
●Sub-output tray: 1 sheet
Noise
(measured in accordance with ISO 7779, declared
noise emission in accordance with ISO 9296)
LwAd (declared A-weighted sound power level (1 B = 10 dB))
●During standby: Inaudible *5
●During printing:
6.9 B or less (LBP252dw)
6.8 B or less (LBP251dw)
LpAm (declared A-weighted sound pressure level (bystander position))
●During standby: Inaudible *5
●During printing:
54 dB (LBP252dw)
53 dB (LBP251dw)
Appendix
437
Environmental Conditions
(main unit only)
Operating Environment
●Temperature: 10 to 30 °C
●Humidity: 20 to 80% RH (no condensation)
Host Interface ●USB interface: Hi-Speed USB/USB
●Network interface:
Shared 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T (RJ-45) Full Duplex/Half Duplex
IEEE 802.11b/g/n
Printing Software LBP252dw
●UFR II, PCL6, and PS
LBP251dw
●UFR II and PCL6
Power Supply 220 to 240 V (± 10 %), 50/60 Hz (± 2 Hz)
Power Consumption *6
(at 20 °C)
●Maximum: 1,150 W or less
●During operation:
Approx. 550 W (LBP252dw)
Approx. 520 W (LBP251dw)
●During standby: Approx. 12.1 W
●During sleep mode:
Approx. 0.9 W (USB connection)
Approx. 1.0 W (wired LAN connection)
Approx. 1.5 W (wireless LAN connection)
●When the power switch is turned OFF: 0.1 W or less
Consumables Consumables(P. 443)
Weight Main unit and accessories
●Main unit (excluding toner cartridge): Approx. 11.5 kg
●Toner cartridge: Approx. 0.8 kg
Consumables and optional accessories
●Toner cartridge (Canon Cartridge 719): Approx. 0.8 kg
●Toner cartridge (Canon Cartridge 719 H): Approx. 1.0 kg
●Paper Feeder Unit PF-44 (including the drawer): Approx. 4.1 kg
*1 The print speed may be slower depending on the output resolution, paper size, paper type, paper orientation, and number
of copies printed.
*2 May vary depending on the use conditions of the machine (including use of optional accessories and installation
environment).
*3 May vary depending on the output environment.
*4 May vary depending on the installation environment and paper type used.
*5 Indicates that the sound pressure level of each bystander position is below the ISO 7779 absolute criteria for the
background noise level.
*6 Even if the machine is turned OFF, a slight amount of power is still consumed while the power plug is plugged into the AC
power outlet. To stop power consumption completely, unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet.
Appendix
438
Wireless LAN Specications
0W20-079
Standard IEEE 802.11g, IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11n
Transmission Scheme DS-SS System, OFDM System
Frequency Range 2,412 to 2,472 MHz
Maximum Radio-Frequency Power Transmitte 15.98 dBm
Communication Mode Infrastructure Mode
Security WEP, WPA-PSK (TKIP/AES-CCMP), WPA2-PSK (TKIP/AES-CCMP)
Connection Method WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup), Manual setup
Appendix
439
Paper
0W20-07A
◼Supported Paper Sizes
Paper sizes that can be loaded in the paper drawer, the multi-purpose tray, and optional paper feeders are listed
below.
: Available : Unavailable
Paper Size Paper Drawer Multi-Purpose Tray Automatic 2-Sided Printing *1
A4
(210.0 x 297.0 mm)
B5
(182.0 x 257.0 mm)
A5
(148.0 x 210.0 mm)
A6
(105.0 x 148.0 mm)
Legal (LGL)
(215.9 x 355.6 mm)
Letter (LTR)
(215.9 x 279.4 mm)
Statement (STMT)
(139.7 x 215.9 mm)
Executive (EXEC)
(184.1 x 266.7 mm)
Ocio
(215.9 x 317.5 mm)
*2
Ocio (Brazil)
(215.9 x 355.0 mm)
*2
Ocio (Mexico)
(215.9 x 341.0 mm)
*2
Letter (Government)
(203.2 x 266.7 mm)
*1 Automatic 2-sided printing is available without necessity of paper reloading.
*2 Set the paper size switch lever in the same position as that for Letter/Legal size. Interior(P. 21)
*3 Custom size paper with width 105.0 to 216.0 mm and length 148.0 to 356.0 mm can be loaded.
*4 Custom size paper with width 76.2 to 216.0 mm and length 127.0 to 356.0 mm can be loaded.
Appendix
440
Paper Size Paper Drawer Multi-Purpose Tray Automatic 2-Sided Printing *1
Legal (Government)
(203.2 x 330.2 mm)
Foolscap
(215.9 x 330.2 mm)
*2
Foolscap (Australia)
(206.0 x 337.0 mm)
Legal (India)
(215.0 x 345.0 mm)
*2
Envelope No.10 (COM10)
(104.7 x 241.3 mm)
Envelope Monarch
(98.4 x 190.5 mm)
C5
(162.0 x 229.0 mm)
Envelope DL
(110.0 x 220.0 mm)
3x5inch
(76.2 x 127.0 mm)
Custom *3 *4
*1 Automatic 2-sided printing is available without necessity of paper reloading.
*2 Set the paper size switch lever in the same position as that for Letter/Legal size. Interior(P. 21)
*3 Custom size paper with width 105.0 to 216.0 mm and length 148.0 to 356.0 mm can be loaded.
*4 Custom size paper with width 76.2 to 216.0 mm and length 127.0 to 356.0 mm can be loaded.
●The default paper size of the machine is set to A4. Change the paper size setting when using a different size
of paper. Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Paper Drawer(P. 51)
◼Paper Type and Paper Source Capacity
Chlorine-free paper can be used with this machine.
: Unavailable
Paper Type Paper Capacity for Paper Drawer Paper Capacity for Multi-Purpose Tray
Plain paper * 60 to 89 g/m² 250 sheets 50 sheets
* Automatic 2-sided printing is available without replacing paper.
Appendix
441
Paper Type Paper Capacity for Paper Drawer Paper Capacity for Multi-Purpose Tray
Heavy paper 90 to 120 g/m² * 200 sheets 40 sheets
121 to 163 g/m² 25 sheets
Recycled paper * 60 to 89 g/m² 250 sheets 50 sheets
Color paper * 60 to 89 g/m² 250 sheets 50 sheets
Label 20 sheets
Envelope 5 sheets
* Automatic 2-sided printing is available without replacing paper.
◼Paper Type and Setting for the Machine
Loading Paper(P. 35)
◼Printable Area
The shaded areas in the image below indicate the printable area of the document. For envelope, the top, bottom, left,
and right margins are all 10 mm.
Appendix
442
Consumables
0W20-07E
The following is a guide to the estimated replacement time for the consumables used in this machine. Purchase
consumables at your local authorized Canon dealer. Observe safety and health precautions when storing and handling
consumables ( Consumables(P. 10) ).
●Depending on the installation environment, printing paper size, or document type, you may need to replace
consumables before the end of the estimated lifetime.
◼Toner Cartridges
Supplied Toner Cartridges
The average yield* of the toner cartridge that comes with the machine is 2,100 sheets.
* The average yield is based on "ISO/IEC 19752" (the global standard related to "Method for the determination of toner
cartridge yield for monochromatic electrophotographic printers and multi-function devices that contain printer
components" issued by ISO [International Organization for Standardization]) when printing A4 size paper with the default
print density setting.
Replacement Toner Cartridges
For optimum print quality, using Canon genuine toner cartridges is recommended.
Canon Genuine Toner Cartridge Average yield of toner cartridge*
Canon Cartridge 719 2,100 sheets
Canon Cartridge 719 H 6,400 sheets
●When replacing toner cartridges How to Replace Toner Cartridges(P. 400)
Appendix
443
Optional Items
0W20-07F
The functionality of the machine can be fully utilized by using the optional items described below. Optional items can
be purchased from the retail outlet where you purchased the machine or from your local Canon dealer.
◼Paper Feeder Unit PF-44
In addition to the provided standard paper drawer and multi-purpose
tray, you can install the optional paper feeder to the machine. Adding
the drawer enables you to load different sizes of paper in each drawer
and enables the machine to hold up to 800 sheets (with the original
drawer, multi-purpose tray, and optional paper feeder).
Paper Capacity 500 sheets
Available Paper Paper(P. 440)
Power Supply From main unit
Dimensions
(W x L x H) 390 x 441 x 165.5 mm
Weight Approx. 4.1 kg
Appendix
444
Using AirPrint
0W20-07H
You can print without using drivers by sending print data from Apple devices.
AirPrint settings
Conguring AirPrint Settings(P. 445)
Displaying the Screen for AirPrint(P. 447)
Functions of the AirPrint
Printing with AirPrint(P. 449)
Troubleshooting
If AirPrint Cannot Be Used(P. 451)
Conguring AirPrint Settings
You can register information, including the name of the machine and installation location, that is used for identifying
the machine. You can also disable the AirPrint function of the machine. Use the Remote UI to change these settings.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote
UI(P. 270)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
●If you are using a mobile device, such as iPad, iPhone, or iPod touch, read "click" as "tap" in this section.
3Click [Network Settings] [AirPrint Settings].
Appendix
445
4Click [Edit].
5Specify the required settings, and click [OK].
[Use AirPrint]
Select the check box to enable AirPrint. To disable AirPrint, clear the check box.
[Printer Name]/[Location]/[Latitude]/[Longitude]
Enter the name and the installation location information to help you identify this machine when operating
your Apple device. This information is useful if you have more than one AirPrint printer.
Appendix
446
If you select the [Use AirPrint] check box
The following items are also set to <On> automatically.
●<mDNS Settings> for IPv4 and IPv6 Conguring DNS(P. 181)
●<Use HTTP> Disabling HTTP Communication(P. 232)
●<Use IPP Printing> under <IPP Print Settings> Conguring Printing Protocols and WSD
Functions(P. 165)
If you change [Printer Name]
If you change [Printer Name] that you have once specied, you may be unable to print any more from the
Mac that has been able to be used for printing so far. This phenomenon occurs because <mDNS Name> (
Conguring DNS(P. 181) ) of IPv4 is also changed automatically. In this case, add the machine to the Mac
again.
6Restart the machine.
●Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
Displaying the Screen for AirPrint
You can display the screen for AirPrint, on which you can not only access the AirPrint Settings but also view
information about consumables, such as paper and toner cartridge. Further, you can congure security function
settings ( Enabling SSL Encrypted Communication for the Remote UI(P. 235) ).
1Click [System Preferences] in the Dock on the desktop [Printers & Scanners].
2Select your printer and click [Options & Supplies].
3Click [Show Printer Webpage].
4Log on to the Remote UI.
●To change AirPrint settings, log on in System Manager Mode.
Appendix
447
Trademarks
Apple, Bonjour, iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, Mac, Mac OS, and Mac OS X are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries. AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple Inc.
Appendix
448
Printing with AirPrint
0W20-07J
You do not necessarily need to use a computer for printing e-mails, photos, Web pages, and other documents. AirPrint
enables you to print directly from Apple devices such as iPad, iPhone, and iPod touch.
Printing from iPad, iPhone, or iPod touch(P. 449)
Printing from Mac(P. 450)
System Requirements
To print with AirPrint, you need one of the following Apple devices.
●iPad (all models)
●iPhone (3GS or later)
●iPod touch (3rd generation or later)
●Mac (Mac OS X 10.7 or later)*
* Mac OS X 10.9 or later when you use USB connection.
Network Environment
You need one of the following environments.
●The Apple device and the machine are connected to the same LAN.
●The Apple device and the machine are in Direct Connection.
●The Mac and the machine are connected via USB.
Printing from iPad, iPhone, or iPod touch
1Make sure that the machine is turned ON and that it is connected to your Apple
device.
●For how to make sure of this, see "Getting Started." Manuals Included with the Machine(P. 456)
●For how to make sure whether the Apple device and the machine are in Direct Connection, see Make
Direct Connection (Access Point Mode)(P. 125) .
2From the application on your Apple device, tap to display the menu options.
3From the drop-down list, tap [Print].
Appendix
449
4Select this machine from [Printer] in [Printer Options].
●The printers connected to the network are displayed. Select this machine in this step.
[Printer Options] is not displayed on applications that do not support AirPrint. You cannot print by using
those applications.
5Specify the print settings as necessary.
The available settings and paper sizes differ depending on the application you are using.
6Tap [Print].
●Printing starts.
Checking the print status
During printing, press the Home button of the Apple device twice tap [Print].
Printing from Mac
1Make sure that the machine is turned ON and that it is connected to your Mac.
●For how to make sure of this, see "Getting Started." Manuals Included with the Machine(P. 456)
2Add the machine to the Mac from [System Preferences] [Printers & Scanners].
3Open a document in an application and display the print dialog box.
●How to display the print dialog box differs for each application. For more information, see the instruction
manual for the application you are using.
4Select this machine in the print dialog box.
●The printers connected to the Mac are displayed. Select this machine in this step.
5Specify the print settings as necessary.
The available settings and paper sizes differ depending on the application you are using.
6Click [Print].
●Printing starts.
Appendix
450
If AirPrint Cannot Be Used
0W20-07K
If AirPrint cannot be used, try taking the following solutions.
●Make sure that the machine is turned ON. If the machine is turned ON, rst turn it OFF, then wait for at least 10
seconds and then turn it back ON to check if the problem is solved.
●Make sure that no error messages are displayed on the machine.
●Make sure that Apple devices and the machine are connected to the same LAN. If the machine is turned ON, it may
take several minutes before the machine is ready for communication.
●Make sure that Bonjour on your Apple device is enabled.
●Make sure that the machine is congured to enable printing from a computer even when no department ID and
password are entered. Blocking Jobs When Department ID Is Unknown(P. 214)
●Make sure that the paper is loaded in the machine and the machine has sucient toner cartridge remaining.
Displaying the Screen for AirPrint(P. 447)
Appendix
451
Using Google Cloud Print
0W20-07L
Google Cloud Print is a service that enables a user who has a Google account to print from applications such as Google
Docs™ or Gmail™ via a smartphone, tablet, or computer connected to the Internet. Unlike conventional printing from a
computer, Google Cloud Print enables you to print without using a printer driver. For example, if you want to print an
e-mail or les that are attached to an e-mail, you can print just by using Gmail for mobile. You will nd your printouts
when you go to the machine.
Checking the Machine Settings(P. 452)
Changing Google Cloud Print Settings(P. 452)
Registering the Machine with Google Cloud Print(P. 453)
●When registering the machine or when using Google Cloud Print to print documents, you must be able to
connect the machine to the Internet. You are also responsible for paying all Internet connection fees.
●You may not be able to use this function in some countries or regions.
To use Google Cloud Print, a Google account is required. If you do not have one, access Google Web site to
create your account.
Checking the Machine Settings
Before setting up Google Cloud Print, check the following:
●Make sure that the machine is assigned an IPv4 address and connected to a computer over a network.
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 136) Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 135)
●Make sure that the date and time and the time zone settings are correct. Date/Time Settings(P. 307)
●If the Department ID Management is enabled, make sure that the machine is congured to enable printing from a
computer even when no Department ID and PIN are entered. Blocking Jobs When Department ID Is
Unknown(P. 214)
Changing Google Cloud Print Settings
Enable the Google Cloud Print function of the machine. You can also disable the Google Cloud Print function of the
machine.
1Press .
Appendix
452
2Use / to select <System Management Settings>, and press .
●If the logon screen appears, enter the correct ID and PIN using the numeric keys, and then press .
Logging on to the Machine(P. 34)
3Select <Google Cloud Print Settings> <Enable Google Cloud Print>.
4Select <On> or <Off>, and press .
Registering the Machine with Google Cloud Print
Registering the machine with Google Cloud Print allows you to print from anywhere.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote
UI(P. 270)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Network Settings] [Google Cloud Print Settings].
Appendix
453
4Click [Register] in [Registration Status].
If [Register] is unavailable
You need to enable Google Cloud Print. Click [Edit], select the [Use Google Cloud Print] check box, and then
click [OK].
To reregister the machine
To reregister the machine if the owner of the machine has changed or for other reasons, unregister the
machine and register it again.
5Click the link of the URL displayed for [URL for Registration].
Appendix
454
6Follow the on-screen instructions to register the machine.
➠You can print from a Google Cloud Print compatible application such as Google Chrome™, Gmail, or
Google Docs.
Access the Google Cloud Print Web site for information about the latest applications that support Google
Cloud Print.
Registering from a mobile device or Google Chrome
You can also register the machine from a mobile device or Google Chrome. The machine's display shows the
following conrmation screen before completion of the registration. Press <Yes> to complete the registration.
●For the registration procedure, see the instruction manual for your mobile device or the Google Cloud Print
Web site.
Appendix
455
Manuals Included with the Machine
0W20-07R
The manuals listed below are included with the machine. Refer to them as necessary.
Getting Started Read this manual rst. It describes basic setup procedures, from removing
the packing materials to setting up the machine.
Wireless LAN Setting Guide This manual describes the procedure for connecting the machine to a
wireless LAN router, it also contains information for troubleshooting when
conguring the settings. Read this manual with Getting Started.
e-Manual
(This Manual)
This manual describes all the functions of the machine in a manual that is
viewed using a Web browser. You can browse information by category or
enter a keyword to search for pages on a specic topic. Using e-
Manual(P. 457)
Printer Driver Installation Guide This manual describes how to install the printer driver and the supplied
software on the User Software and Manuals CD-ROM/DVD-ROM.
Appendix
456
Using e-Manual
0W20-07S
The e-Manual is a manual that can be viewed on your computer that describes all of the functions of the machine. You
can search from your intended use or enter a keyword to quickly nd the page you are looking for. You can use the e-
Manual by installing it on your computer, or start the e-Manual directly from the DVD-ROM. Installing e-
Manual(P. 458)
How to Find the Topic You Are Looking for
You can nd the page you are looking for using the following 3 methods.
Search the contents
You can nd the page you are looking for by selecting the topic from the [Contents] tab on the left side of the
screen, and selecting the [Chapter icon] next to the topic.
Top Page(P. 465)
Topic Page(P. 467)
Search by keyword
Perform a search by entering a keyword, such as "envelope" or "toner cartridge", and the pages containing the
keyword are displayed. You can nd the page you are looking for from those results. You can also enter phrases
such as "connecting to a network." The keyword search also supports the AND Boolean to search for multiple
keywords.
Search Tab(P. 468)
Search the site map
Click [Site Map] on the top part of the screen, and a list of all the e-Manual topics is displayed. From there you
can nd the topic you are looking for.
Site Map(P. 469)
System Requirements
●To use the e-Manual, the following Web browsers are required. The content of the e-Manual may not display
correctly if a browser not listed below is used.
Windows:
Internet Explorer 8.0/9.0/10.0/11.0
Firefox 24.x ESR/26.x/29.x/30.x/31.x/31.x ESR/32.x/33.x/34.x/35.x/36.x
Mac OS:
Safari 7.x/8.x
Firefox 24.x ESR/26.x/29.x/30.x/31.x/31.x ESR/32.x/33.x/34.x/35.x/36.x
●The DVD-ROM provided for this product may include manuals in PDF format. If you do not have access to
Adobe Reader to view the manuals in PDF format, try other programs such as PDF Preview developed by
Vivid Document Imaging Technologies.
About the latest e-Manual
For the latest e-Manual, see the Canon Web site.
Appendix
457
Installing e-Manual
0W20-07U
Install the e-Manual on your computer by using the DVD-ROM that comes with the machine.
1Insert the User Software and Manuals DVD-ROM into the drive on the computer.
●Select a language and click [OK] if you are prompted to do so.
●If the [Software Programs/Manuals Setup] screen does not appear, remove the DVD-ROM from the drive and
insert it again, or see Displaying the [Software Programs/Manuals Setup] Screen(P. 476) .
●If [AutoPlay] is displayed, click [Run MInst.exe].
2Click [Installation].
3Clear all the check boxes except for [Manuals], and click [Install].
Appendix
458
4Read the License Agreement and click [Yes] to agree.
5Select the folder in which to install the e-Manual, and click [Install].
●The installation begins.
●Wait a moment. This process may take some time.
6Click [Exit].
7Click [Next] [Exit].
Appendix
459
Viewing the e-Manual
Double-click the shortcut icon of the e-Manual on the desktop.
If a security warning message appears
●Click [Allow blocked content].
TIPS for Viewing the e-Manual Directly from the DVD-ROM
1Insert the User Software and Manuals DVD-ROM into the drive on the computer.
Appendix
460
●Select a language and click [OK] if you are prompted to do so.
●If the [Software Programs/Manuals Setup] screen does not appear, remove the DVD-ROM from
the drive and then insert it again, or see Displaying the [Software Programs/Manuals
Setup] Screen(P. 476) .
2Click [Manuals].
3Click [e-Manual].
Appendix
461
Uninstalling e-Manual
0W20-07W
You can remove the e-Manual from the computer to restore the computer to the same state it was in before the e-
Manual was installed.
1Insert the User Software and Manuals DVD-ROM into the drive on the computer.
●Select a language and click [OK] if you are prompted to do so.
2Click [Start Software Programs].
●If the above screen is not displayed, see Displaying the [Software Programs/Manuals Setup]
Screen(P. 476) .
●lf [AutoPlay] is displayed, click [Run MInst.exe].
3Click [Start] for [Manual Uninstaller].
Appendix
462
4Click [Next].
●Uninstall begins.
●Wait a moment. This process may take some time.
5Click [Exit].
6Click [Back] [Exit].
Appendix
463
Appendix
464
Screen Layout of e-Manual
0W20-07X
The e-Manual is divided into different screens, and the content of each screen varies.
Top Page
Appears when e-Manual is started.
Canon
Click to return to the top page.
[Contents] tab/[Search] tab
Click to toggle the display between the table of contents and search.
Contents
The titles of chapters are displayed ( ). Place the mouse pointer over one of the titles, and topics of the
chapter are displayed on the right. Click a topic and its page is displayed.
Appendix
465
[Top]
Click to return to the top page.
[Site map]
Click to display all the e-Manual topics.
[Help]
Click to display information on how to view the e-Manual, how to perform a search, and other information.
[Print]
Click to print the displayed content.
Feature Highlights
Provides a variety of practical examples of ways to use the machine. Click / / / to toggle the
display of practical examples by category, or click the sliding display for more information about each
category. The sliding display can be stopped by moving the pointer onto it. Feature Highlights(P. 466)
[Quick Help] / [Troubleshooting] / [Maintenance]
Click to view how to solve problems or maintain the machine.
[For Mac OS Users]
Click to view precautions when using Mac OS.
[Notice]
Click to view important information you should know when using the machine.
[Oce Locations]
Click to display contact information for any inquiries about the machine.
Feature Highlights
Provides a variety of practical examples of ways to use the machine.
Appendix
466
/
Click to display the detailed information. Click again to close the window.
Click to display the corresponding topic page.
Topic Page
Contains information about how to congure and use the machine.
Appendix
467
[Contents]
The chapter icons and titles are displayed.
[Expand all]/[Collapse all]
Click [Expand all] to display all of the subsections of all topics. Click [Collapse all] to close all of the
subsections of all the topics.
Chapter icons
Click a chapter icon to navigate to the top of the corresponding chapter.
Topic page
Displays the topics of the selected chapter. If "+" is displayed on the topic, clicking it displays the
subsections of that topic. Click "-" to close the expanded topic.
[Print all]
All pages of the selected chapter are opened in a separate window. The chapter can be printed if
necessary.
Navigation
See what chapter topic you are currently viewing.
Click to return to the page top.
/
Click to display the previous or following topic.
Click to jump to the corresponding page. To return to the previous page, click "Back" on your Web
browser.
Click to display the hidden detailed descriptions. Click again to close the detailed descriptions.
Search Tab
Contains a text box to perform a search and nd the page you are looking for.
[Enter keyword(s) here]
Appendix
468
Enter a keyword or keywords and click to display the search results in the search result list ( ). You
can search for pages containing all the keywords by separating the keywords by a space (blank). Also you
can only search for pages containing an exact phrase by enclosing the keywords in double quotation
marks.
[Search options]
Click to specify search conditions such as scope of search and fuzzy match conditions. To display the
conditions, click this button when it is gray. To close the display, click the button when it is orange.
Search scope selector
Species the search scope. You can eciently search for topics by narrowing the search scope. The search
scope selector is especially useful when you can predict the general location of the topic that you are
looking for.
Search options selector
Select the check box to make your search case-sensitive.
[Search with these conditions]
Click to display the search results with the conditions specied with and .
Search result list
Displays the search results of the pages that contain the specied keywords. From the results, locate the
page you are looking for and click the topic title of the page. If the results cannot be displayed on one
page, click / or a page number to display the results on the corresponding page.
Site Map
Displays the table of contents for the e-Manual.
Chapter icons
Click to jump to the topic of the selected chapter.
Title (Topic)
Displays titles and topics. Click a title or topic to jump to the page.
Click to return to the page top.
/
Click to go to the previous or next chapter.
Appendix
469
Viewing e-Manual
0W20-07Y
Marks
Cautions regarding safety, restrictions and cautions regarding the handling of the machine, useful tips, and
other information are indicated using the marks below.
Indicates a warning concerning operations that may lead to death or injury to
persons if not performed correctly. To use the machine safely, always pay
attention to these warnings.
Indicates a caution concerning operations that may lead to injury to persons if not
performed correctly. To use the machine safely, always pay attention to these
cautions.
Indicates an operation that must not be performed. Read these items carefully,
and make sure not to perform the described operations.
Indicates operational requirements and restrictions. Be sure to read these items
carefully to operate the machine correctly, and avoid damage to the machine or
property.
Indicates a clarication of an operation, or contains additional explanations for a
procedure.
Indicates useful functions or tips for using the machine.
Keys and Buttons Used in this Manual
Keys on the operation panel and buttons on the computer display appear in the following notation:
Type Example
Keys on the operation panel ( )
Settings displayed on the operation panel <Timer Settings>
<Paper jammed.>
Buttons and other text interfaces displayed on the computer display [Preferences]
/ Used in This Manual
The / keys are used to select a desired setting. They are only described at the rst applicable occurrence
of their use in a page and omitted from the second time onward. For example, the / keys appear in Step
2, but are omitted in Step 3.
Example:
1Press .
2Use / to select <Network Settings>, and press .
3Select <TCP/IP Settings> <IPv4 Settings> <IP Address Settings>.
Appendix
470
Screens Used in This Manual
Unless otherwise noted, displays used in the e-Manual are those for the LBP252dw. Depending on the
operating system you are using, the appearance of the displays used in this manual may slightly differ from the
actual displays. Also, the appearance of drivers and software may differ depending on their version.
Illustrations Used in This Manual
Unless otherwise noted, the illustrations of the machine used in the e-Manual are those for the LBP252dw. The
illustrations of the toner cartridge used in the e-Manual are those for the Canon Cartridge 719.
Appendix
471
Manual Display Settings
0W20-08J
Appendix
472
Others
0W20-080
This section describes basic Windows operations and includes disclaimers, copyright information, and other
information.
Appendix
473
Basic Windows Operations
0W20-081
Displaying [Computer] or [My Computer](P. 474)
Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 474)
Enabling [Network discovery](P. 474)
Displaying Shared Printers in the Print Server(P. 475)
Displaying the [Software Programs/Manuals Setup] Screen(P. 476)
Printing a Test Page in Windows(P. 476)
Checking the Bit Architecture(P. 477)
Checking the Printer Port(P. 478)
Checking Bidirectional Communication(P. 479)
Checking the SSID to Which Your Computer Is Connected(P. 480)
◼Displaying [Computer] or [My Computer]
Windows Vista/7/Server 2008
[Start] select [Computer].
Windows 8/Server 2012
Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen select [File Explorer] [Computer] or [This PC].
Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2
Right-click [Start] select [File Explorer] [Computer] or [This PC].
Windows Server 2003
[Start] select [My Computer].
◼Displaying the Printer Folder
Windows Vista
[Start] select [Control Panel] [Printer].
Windows 7/Server 2008 R2
[Start] select [Devices and Printers].
Windows 8/Server 2012
Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen select [Control Panel] [View devices and printers].
Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2
Right-click [Start] select [Control Panel] [View devices and printers].
Windows Server 2008
[Start] select [Control Panel] double-click [Printers].
Windows Server 2003
[Start] select [Printers and Faxes].
◼Enabling [Network discovery]
If you are using Windows Vista/7/8/Server 2008/Server 2012, enable [Network discovery] to view the computers on
your network.
Windows Vista
[Start] select [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks] select [Turn on network discovery] under
[Network discovery].
Appendix
474
Windows 7/Server 2008 R2
[Start] select [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks] [Change advanced sharing settings]
select [Turn on network discovery] under [Network discovery].
Windows 8/Server 2012
Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen select [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks]
[Change advanced sharing settings] select [Turn on network discovery] under [Network discovery].
Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2
Right-click [Start] select [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks] [Change advanced sharing
settings] select [Turn on network discovery] under [Network discovery].
Windows Server 2008
[Start] select [Control Panel] double-click [Network and Sharing Center] select [Turn on network
discovery] under [Network discovery].
◼Displaying Shared Printers in the Print Server
1Open Windows Explorer.
Windows Vista/7/Server 2003/Server 2008
[Start] select [All Programs] or [Programs] [Accessories] [Windows Explorer].
Windows 8/Server 2012
Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen select [File Explorer].
Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2
Right-click [Start] select [File Explorer].
2Select [Network] or [My Network Places] in printer server.
●To view computers on the network, you may need to turn on network discovery or search the network for
computers.
➠Shared printers are displayed.
1
Appendix
475
◼Displaying the [Software Programs/Manuals Setup] Screen
If your computer does not display the [Software Programs/Manuals Setup] screen after inserting the DVD-ROM, follow
the procedure below. The DVD-ROM drive name is indicated as "D:" in this manual. The DVD-ROM drive name may
differ depending on the computer you are using.
Windows Vista/7/Server 2008
[Start] enter "D:\MInst.exe" in [Search programs and les] or [Start Search] press the [ENTER] key.
Windows 8/Server 2012
Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen [Run] Enter "D:\MInst.exe" click [OK]
Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2
Right-click [Start] [Run] Enter "D:\MInst.exe" click [OK]
Windows Server 2003
[Start] [Run] enter "D:\MInst.exe" click [OK]
◼Printing a Test Page in Windows
You can check whether the printer driver is operational by printing a test page in Windows.
1Load A4 size paper in the multi-purpose tray. Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose
Tray(P. 41)
2Open the printer folder. Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 474)
3Right-click your printer icon and click [Printer properties] or [Properties].
4Click [Print Test Page] in [General] tab.
Appendix
476
➠The test page is printed.
◼Checking the Bit Architecture
If you are not sure whether your computer is running 32-bit or 64-bit Windows, follow the procedure below.
1Display [Control Panel].
Windows Vista/7/Server 2008
[Start] select [Control Panel].
Windows 8/Server 2012
Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen select [Control Panel].
Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2
Right-click [Start] select [Control Panel].
2Display [System].
Windows Vista/7/8/Server 2008 R2/Server 2012
Click [System and Maintenance] or [System and Security] [System].
Windows Server 2008
Double-click [System].
3Check the bit architecture.
For 32-bit versions
[32-bit Operating System] is displayed.
For 64-bit versions
[64-bit Operating System] is displayed.
Appendix
477
If you are using a network connection and have changed the machine's IP address
●If [Description] for the selected port is [Canon MFNP Port], and the machine and the computer are on the
same subnet, then the connection will be maintained. You do not need to add a new port. If it is [Standard
TCP/IP Port], you need to add a new port. Conguring Printer Ports(P. 168)
◼Checking Bidirectional Communication
1Open the printer folder. Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 474)
2Right-click your printer icon and click [Printer properties] or [Properties].
3In the [Ports] tab, make sure that the [Enable bidirectional support] check box is
selected.
Appendix
479
◼Checking the SSID to Which Your Computer Is Connected
If your computer is connected to a wireless LAN network, click , , or in the system tray to display the SSID of
the connected wireless LAN router.
Appendix
480
For Mac OS Users
0W20-082
Your machine may have not come with a driver for Mac OS depending on when you purchased the machine.
The drivers are uploaded to the Canon website when they become needed. Check the operating system of
your computer and download the appropriate driver from the Canon website. For the driver installation
procedure and how to operate the driver, see the "Canon UFR II/UFRII LT Printer Driver Guide".
In the e-Manual and Printer Driver Installation Guide, methods to operate in the Windows environment are explained
as examples. To view how to use the driver and utility for Mac OS, see the following guide or help.
Object Reference
Installing the Driver ●Getting Started
●Canon UFR II/UFRII LT Printer Driver Guide
●Canon PS Printer Driver Guide (LBP252dw)
Using each feature ●Driver's Help
●Canon UFR II/UFRII LT Printer Driver Guide
●Canon PS Printer Driver Guide (LBP252dw)
◼Displaying the Driver Guide
Double-click the following HTML le in the [Documents] folder on the supplied DVD-ROM.
Canon UFR II/UFRII LT Printer Driver Guide / Canon PS Printer Driver Guide(LBP252dw)
[Documents]-[Print]-[XXXXXX]*-[Guide]-[index.html]
* For [XXXXXX], select your desired language.
◼Displaying the Driver Help
Click [ ] on the driver.
Appendix
481
Notice
0W20-083
◼Third Party Services and Software
Third Party Services and Software
◼Product Name
Safety regulations require the product's name to be registered.
In some regions where this product is sold, the following name(s) in parentheses ( ) may be registered instead.
LBP252dw / LBP251dw (F161900)
◼EMC requirements of EC Directive
This equipment conforms with the essential EMC requirements of EC Directive. We declare that this product conforms
with the EMC requirements of EC Directive at nominal mains input 230 V, 50 Hz although the rated input of the product
is 220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz. Use of shielded cable is necessary to comply with the technical EMC requirements of EC
Directive.
◼Laser Safety
This product is certied as a Class 1 laser product under IEC60825-1:2007 and EN60825-1:2007. This means that the
product does not produce hazardous laser radiation.
Since radiation emitted inside the product is completely conned within protective housings and external covers, the
laser beam cannot escape from the machine during any phase of user operation. Do not remove protective housings
or external covers, except as directed by the equipment's manuals.
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
LASER KLASSE 1
APPAREIL À LASER DE CLASSE 1
APPARECCHIO LASER DI CLASSE 1
PRODUCTO LÁSER DE CLASE 1
APARELHO A LASER DE CLASSE 1
LUOKAN 1 LASER-TUOTE
LASERPRODUKT KLASS 1
Use of controls, adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those specied in this manual may
result in hazardous radiation exposure.
Appendix
482
◼International ENERGY STAR Program
As an ENERGY STAR® Partner, Canon Inc. has determined that this product meets the
ENERGY STAR Program for energy eciency.
The International ENERGY STAR Oce Equipment Program is an international program that
promotes energy saving through the use of computers and other oce equipment.
The program backs the development and dissemination of products with functions that
effectively reduce energy consumption. It is an open system in which business proprietors
can participate voluntarily.
The targeted products are oce equipment, such as computers, displays, printers,
facsimiles, and copiers. The standards and logos are uniform among participating nations.
◼WEEE Directive
Only for European Union and EEA (Norway, Iceland and Liechtenstein)
These symbols indicate that this product is not to be disposed of with your household waste, according to the WEEE
Directive (2012/19/EU), the Battery Directive (2006/66/EC) and/or national legislation implementing those Directives.
If a chemical symbol is printed beneath the symbol shown above, in accordance with the Battery Directive, this
indicates that a heavy metal (Hg = Mercury, Cd = Cadmium, Pb = Lead) is present in this battery or accumulator at a
concentration above an applicable threshold specied in the Battery Directive.
This product should be handed over to a designated collection point, e.g., on an authorized one-for-one basis when
you buy a new similar product or to an authorized collection site for recycling waste electrical and electronic
equipment (EEE) and batteries and accumulators. Improper handling of this type of waste could have a possible
impact on the environment and human health due to potentially hazardous substances that are generally associated
with EEE. Your cooperation in the correct disposal of this product will contribute to the effective usage of natural
resources.
For more information about the recycling of this product, please contact your local city oce, waste authority,
approved scheme or your household waste disposal service or visit www.canon-europe.com/weee , or www.canon-
europe.com/battery .
◼IPv6 Ready Logo
The protocol stack included in this machine has obtained the IPv6 Ready Logo Phase-2
established by the IPv6 Forum.
Appendix
483
◼Product Information required by COMMISSION REGULATION (EU) No 801/2013 amending
Regulation (EC) No 1275/2008
Power consumption of the product in networked standby if wired network ports are connected and all wireless
network ports are activated (if they are available at the same time).
Model Name Power consumption of the product in networked standby
LBP252dw / LBP251dw 1.6 W
The above value(s) are the actual values for single machine, chosen arbitrarily, and may therefore vary from the
value of the machine in use. Optional network ports are not connected and/or activated in the measurement.
◼Legal Limitations on the Usage of Your Product and the Use of Images
Using your product to scan, print or otherwise reproduce certain documents, and the use of such images as
scanned, printed or otherwise reproduced by your product, may be prohibited by law and may result in criminal
and/or civil liability. A non-exhaustive list of these documents is set forth below. This list is intended to be a guide
only. If you are uncertain about the legality of using your product to scan, print or otherwise reproduce any
particular document, and/or of the use of the images scanned, printed or otherwise reproduced, you should
consult in advance with your legal advisor for guidance.
●Paper Money
●Travelers Checks
●Money Orders
●Food Stamps
●Certicates of Deposit
●Passports
●Postage Stamps (canceled or uncanceled)
●Immigration Papers
●Identifying Badges or Insignias
●Internal Revenue Stamps (canceled or uncanceled)
●Selective Service or Draft Papers
●Bonds or Other Certicates of Indebtedness
●Checks or Drafts Issued by Governmental Agencies
●Stock Certicates
●Motor Vehicle Licenses and Certicates of Title
●Copyrighted Works/Works of Art without Permission of Copyright Owner
◼Wireless LAN Regulatory Information
Regulatory information for users in Jordan
LBP252dw / LBP251dw includes approved Wireless LAN Module (Model name: AW-NM383).
Contains Wireless LAN Module approved by TRC/SS/2014/38
Appendix
484
Regulatory information for users in UAE
LBP252dw / LBP251dw includes approved Wireless LAN Module (Model name: AW-NM383).
TRA
REGISTERED No: ER0126617/14
DEALER No: DA0060877/11
◼Disclaimers
●The information in this document is subject to change without notice.
●CANON INC. MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
EXCEPT AS PROVIDED HEREIN, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, THEREOF, WARRANTIES AS TO MARKETABILITY,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF USE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. CANON INC. SHALL
NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE, OR LOSSES OR
EXPENSES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS MATERIAL.
◼Copyright
Copyright CANON INC. 2015
No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into
any language or computer language in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical, chemical,
manual, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Canon Inc.
◼Trademarks
Adobe, Acrobat, and Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or
other countries.
Apple, AppleTalk, EtherTalk, LocalTalk, Mac, Mac OS, Safari, Bonjour, iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, and OS X are trademarks
of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple Inc.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista, Windows Server, Internet Explorer, Word and Excel are either registered
trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Google Cloud Print, Google Chrome, Android, Google Docs and Gmail are either registered trademarks or trademarks
of Google Inc.
This product contains the Universal Font Scaling Technology or UFST® under license from Monotype Imaging, Inc.
UFST® is a trademark of Monotype Imaging, Inc. registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Oce and may
be registered in certain jurisdictions.
UFST: Copyright © 1989 - 1996, 1997, 2003, 2004, 2008, all rights reserved, by Monotype Imaging Inc.
Adobe, PostScript, and the PostScript logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems
Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
Appendix
485
Copyright © 2007 -08 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved.
Protected by U.S. Patents 5,737,599; 5,781,785; 5,819,301; 5,929,866; 5,943,063; 6,073,148; 6,515,763; 6,639,593;
6,754,382; 7,046,403; 7,213,269; 7,242,415; Patents pending in the U.S. and other countries.
All instances of the name PostScript in the text are references to the PostScript language as dened by Adobe Systems
Incorporated unless otherwise stated. The name PostScript also is used as a product trademark for Adobe Systems'
implementation of the PostScript language interpreter.
Except as otherwise stated, any reference to a "PostScript printing device," "PostScript display device," or similar item
refers to a printing device, display device or item (respectively) that contains PostScript technology created or licensed
by Adobe Systems Incorporated and not to devices or items that purport to be merely compatible with the PostScript
language.
Adobe, the Adobe logo, PostScript, the PostScript logo, and PostScript 3 are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds. Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
All other product and brand names are registered trademarks, trademarks or service marks of their respective owners.
Appendix
486
Oce Locations
0W20-084
CANON INC.
30-2, Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo 146-8501, Japan
CANON MARKETING JAPAN INC.
16-6, Konan 2-chome, Minato-ku, Tokyo 108-8011, Japan
CANON U.S.A., INC.
One Canon Park, Melville, NY 11747, U.S.A.
CANON EUROPA N.V.
Bovenkerkerweg 59, 1185 XB Amstelveen, The Netherlands
CANON CHINA CO. LTD.
2F Jinbao Building No.89, Jinbao Street, Dongcheng District, Beijing 100005, PRC
CANON SINGAPORE PTE LTD
1 Fusionopolis Place, #15-10, Galaxis, Singapore 138522
CANON AUSTRALIA PTY LTD
Building A, The Park Estate, 5 Talavera Road, Macquarie Park, NSW 2113, Australia
CANON GLOBAL WORLDWIDE SITES
http://www.canon.com/
Appendix
487
This Font Software is licensed under the SIL Open Font License,
Version 1.1.
This license is copied below, and is also available with a FAQ at:
http://scripts.sil.org/OFL
-----------------------------------------------------------
SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE Version 1.1 - 26 February 2007
-----------------------------------------------------------
PREAMBLE
The goals of the Open Font License (OFL) are to stimulate worldwide
development of collaborative font projects, to support the font
creation efforts of academic and linguistic communities, and to
provide a free and open framework in which fonts may be shared and
improved in partnership with others.
The OFL allows the licensed fonts to be used, studied, modied and
redistributed freely as long as they are not sold by themselves. The
fonts, including any derivative works, can be bundled, embedded,
redistributed and/or sold with any software provided that any reserved
names are not used by derivative works. The fonts and derivatives,
however, cannot be released under any other type of license. The
requirement for fonts to remain under this license does not apply to
any document created using the fonts or their derivatives.
DEFINITIONS
"Font Software" refers to the set of les released by the Copyright
Holder(s) under this license and clearly marked as such. This may
include source les, build scripts and documentation.
"Reserved Font Name" refers to any names specied as such after the
copyright statement(s).
"Original Version" refers to the collection of Font Software
components as distributed by the Copyright Holder(s).
"Modied Version" refers to any derivative made by adding to,
deleting, or substituting -- in part or in whole -- any of the
components of the Original Version, by changing formats or by porting
the Font Software to a new environment.
"Author" refers to any designer, engineer, programmer, technical
writer or other person who contributed to the Font Software.
PERMISSION & CONDITIONS
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
a copy of the Font Software, to use, study, copy, merge, embed,
modify, redistribute, and sell modied and unmodied copies of the
Font Software, subject to the following conditions:
SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE
488
1) Neither the Font Software nor any of its individual components, in
Original or Modied Versions, may be sold by itself.
2) Original or Modied Versions of the Font Software may be bundled,
redistributed and/or sold with any software, provided that each copy
contains the above copyright notice and this license. These can be
included either as stand-alone text les, human-readable headers or
in the appropriate machine-readable metadata elds within text or
binary les as long as those elds can be easily viewed by the user.
3) No Modied Version of the Font Software may use the Reserved Font
Name(s) unless explicit written permission is granted by the
corresponding Copyright Holder. This restriction only applies to the
primary font name as presented to the users.
4) The name(s) of the Copyright Holder(s) or the Author(s) of the Font
Software shall not be used to promote, endorse or advertise any
Modied Version, except to acknowledge the contribution(s) of the
Copyright Holder(s) and the Author(s) or with their explicit written
permission.
5) The Font Software, modied or unmodied, in part or in whole,
must be distributed entirely under this license, and must not be
distributed under any other license. The requirement for fonts to
remain under this license does not apply to any document created using
the Font Software.
TERMINATION
This license becomes null and void if any of the above conditions are
not met.
DISCLAIMER
THE FONT SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT
OF COPYRIGHT, PATENT, TRADEMARK, OR OTHER RIGHT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING
FROM, OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE FONT SOFTWARE OR FROM
OTHER DEALINGS IN THE FONT SOFTWARE.
SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE
489